JP6547728B2 - Pachinko gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  It is about a pachinko game machine.

  As a pachinko gaming machine in recent years, a big hit lottery with a predetermined probability is made with the game ball entering the starting opening on the game board surface (game area), and if the big hit lottery is won, a big hit (special game The pachinko game machine which can shift to the state and open the large winning opening provided on the game board surface and obtain a large number of prize balls is the mainstream. In the pachinko gaming machine configured in this way, a time-saving gaming state that raises the efficiency of symbol fluctuation for notifying the lottery result in the big hit lottery and the probability variation gaming state that raises the winning probability in the big hit lottery There are also gaming machines that have the above-mentioned gaming states and create a gaming progress state advantageous to the player by these gaming states, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

JP, 2000-225255, A Patent No. 5297594 Patent No. 5536601 Patent No. 5572745

  However, since there are many such gaming machines in the past, there is a problem that development of a model that can realize further innovative game characteristics is desired.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect is
The starting opening where the game ball can enter, and
A variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state,
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information;
A main gaming unit that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display unit capable of displaying an effect;
And an auxiliary game unit that controls the effect display on the effect display unit;
The main game club is
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on entry into the starting opening;
A random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired random number as a hold until the random number acquisition unit acquires the random number until the condition for determining whether the acceptance or rejection is satisfied;
Consent decision means for performing aptitude determination based on the random number related to a certain hold when satisfying a certainty determination permission condition regarding a certain hold;
Identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display unit based on the result of the success or failure judgment by the success or failure judgment means;
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, the variable winning opening can be made advantageous to the player until there is a predetermined number of balls entered into the variable winning opening or the predetermined period elapses. Special game control means capable of executing a special game that executes a unit game a plurality of times;
In the case of having a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and in the specific gaming state, the variable display of identification information starts to stop display as one unit, and the specific gaming state is entered. Game state control means that can be controlled so as not to be in the normal game state until a certain number of times is counted from when the unit is performed a predetermined number of times;
Game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the side of the secondary gaming unit to the secondary gaming unit side,
A first variation pattern table as a table referred to when determining the variation display time of the identification information, and a second variation pattern table in which the selection tendency of the variation display time of the identification information is different from the first variation pattern table; The variation pattern table and the second variation pattern table have at least a third variation pattern table having different selection tendencies of the variation display time of the identification information, and the first variation state referring to the first variation pattern table, and the second It has at least a second change state that refers to the change pattern table and a third change state that refers to the third change pattern table, and the first change state is a change state in a specific period of the specific gaming state, The second fluctuation state is the fluctuation state in the specific gaming state, and is shifted from the first fluctuation state by the end of the specific period A dynamic state, the third variation state is variable state is migrated from it and a second change state variation state in the normal game state,
The secondary gaming unit is
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game unit side;
And an effect display content control means capable of displaying an effect on the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
If the remaining number of one unit in the specific gaming state becomes a specific number of times less than the predetermined number of times, in the specific gaming state thereafter, it indicates that the number of remaining one unit in the specific gaming state is the number of times less than the specific number of times It is possible to execute the remaining number of suggested effects that are the effects to be
While having at least a first period and a second period which is a period after the first period as a period in the first fluctuation state, the remaining number suggestive effect is not performed in the first period in the first fluctuation state The remaining number suggestive effect can be performed in the second period in the first variation state,
In the case of the second variation state, the remaining number suggestive effect can be performed,
In the case of the third change state, the remaining number suggestive effect is not executed.
In the case of the first change state, the number of reservations at the time of satisfying the qualification determination permission condition is the first number of reservations, and the number of reservations at the time of satisfaction of the qualification determination permission condition is the first suspension The average value of the fluctuation display time of the identification information in the case where the result of the propriety judgment by the propriety judgment means at the time of satisfying the propriety judgment permission condition is the second hold number more than the number. While an average difference of predetermined time occurs,
In the case of the second variation state, the number of reservations at the time of satisfying the qualification determination permission condition is the first number of reservations and the number of reservations at the time of satisfaction of the qualification determination permission condition is the second The selection tendency of the variation display time of the identification information is configured to be the same when the result of the qualification determination by the qualification determination means at the time of satisfying the qualification determination permission condition is not winning, in the case of the number of reservations. Yes,
The first variation pattern table is configured to be referred to in any of the first period in the first variation state and the second period in the first variation state,
Control is performed such that a first fluctuation state can be set until the one unit is performed a first number of times, and is controlled such that a second fluctuation state can be set until the one unit is performed a second number of times, and The first number of times is configured to be greater than the second number of times ,
Identification information that can be selected when the number of reservations is the first variation and the number of reservations at the time when the condition for judging success or failure is satisfied is the second number of reservations, and the result of the judgment of success or failure by the judgment unit is non-winning The number of candidates relating to the fluctuation display time of the is the second fluctuation state and the number of holdings at the time of satisfying the validity determination permission condition is the second number of holdings, and the result of the success or failure judgment by the validity judgment means is not elected The pachinko game machine according to the present invention is configured to be larger than the number of candidates for the variable display time of the identification information which can be selected in the case of
<Supplementary Note>
In addition, although listed about another aspect different from this aspect below, it is possible to implement without being limited to these at all.
The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect is
A starting opening where game balls can enter (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10),
A variable member (for example, second main game start opening electric role thing B11 d which is attached to the start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10, second main game start opening B10) and which can be shifted to the open state and closed state ), And when it is shifted to the open state, the game ball can enter the start opening (for example, the first main game start opening A10, the second main game start opening B10) and can enter the ball easily or in comparison with the closed state Yes, when the ball is displaced to the closed state, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10) and it is difficult to enter in Variable members (for example, the second main game start opening electric role B11d),
A game winning ball in which the game area flowing down on the first area side is located at a position where entering the ball is easier than the game ball flowing down on the second area side. With the second big winning opening C20),
A specific area (for example, V winning opening C 27) in which the game ball entering the variable winning opening may enter the ball,
An identification information display section capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g);
A main gaming unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A speaker capable of outputting sound (for example, a speaker D24);
And a sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) for controlling an effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) and an audio output of the speaker (for example, the speaker D24);
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on entering a ball into the starting opening (for example, the first main gaming starting opening A10, the second main gaming starting opening B10),
Based on the random number acquired by the random number acquisition means, after the identification information is variably displayed in the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display A21g and the second main game symbol display B21g), the identification information is stopped and displayed. Identification information display control means for controlling to
First special game control means for executing a first special game that may be advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
A variable winning opening opening game control means for executing a variable winning opening opening game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) can be opened from the closed state after the identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode ,
A second special game that executes a unit game that can be made advantageous to the player a plurality of times when the variable winning opening opening game is executed and there is an entry into the specific area (for example, V winning opening C27) Second special game control means for executing
Game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the side of the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) to the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) side,
As a game state relating to the ease of opening the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric role B11d), a variable member than the normal gaming state and the normal game state (for example, the second main game start opening electric role B11d) Has a specific gaming state that is likely to be in an open state, and controls so that the specific gaming state can be made after the end of the execution of the first special game or the second special game,
The secondary gaming unit (for example, secondary control board S),
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) side;
The effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
As a variable winning opening opening game, variable winning opening opening game A where entry probability to a specific area (for example, V winning opening C27) is a predetermined probability, and entering a specific area (for example, V winning opening C27) It has at least a variable winning opening opening game B where the possibility is lower than the predetermined probability,
When the identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode in the normal gaming state, a variable winning opening firing effect is issued to instruct the game ball to be launched toward the variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) Configured to earn,
The variable winning opening emission effect is an effect mode in which the specific sound is output from the speaker (for example, the speaker D24) after the specific display is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
If the game ball is shot toward the second area side, the shot game ball can flow down the second area and enter the variable winning opening (for example, the second big winning hole C20), but from the speaker When the game ball is fired toward the second area at the timing when the specific voice is started to be output, the fired game ball flows down the second area and the variable winning opening (for example, the second big winning opening) At the timing when C20) is reached, the variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) is in a closed state, or the variable winning opening (for example, a second large winning opening C20) is in a closed state. The probability of being set is higher than the probability that the variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) is in the open state,
When the identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode in the normal gaming state, and when the variable winning opening opening game A is executed, the variable winning opening is opened after the identification information starts variable display. In the period until the game A is finished executing, the variable winning opening firing effect can be executed,
In the normal gaming state, when the identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode, and when the variable winning opening opening game B is executed, the variable winning opening is opened after the identification information starts variable display. The pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention is configured such that the variable winning opening emission effect is not executed in a period until the end of the execution of the game B.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine according to the present aspect, it is possible to realize further novel gaming characteristics in a gaming machine adopting the concept of creating a gaming progress state advantageous to the player.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is an overall electrical block diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 5 is a flowchart of auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a flowchart of a motorized product drive determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a flowchart of main gaming symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 is a flowchart of first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a configuration diagram of a main gaming table used in a first (second) main gaming symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flowchart of limited frequency A fluctuation mode determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of limited frequency B fluctuation mode determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a limited frequency table on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of special game operating condition determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 19 is a main flow chart on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of hold information management processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display content determination processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display control process on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flowchart of special game related display control processing on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of special game effect execution processing on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of stay stage determination processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the determination processing after the end of the specific game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 29 is a flowchart of special game effect execution processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 30 is a flowchart of stay stage determination processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 31 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a main gaming table used in a first (second) main gaming symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 33 is a flowchart of limited frequency B fluctuation mode determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 34 is a flowchart of gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 35 is a flowchart of external signal output processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 36 is a table according to the content of external terminal transmission on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 37 is a flowchart of a main game content determination random number acquisition process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 39 is a flowchart of a variation fixed time determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 40 is a main flowchart on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 41 is a flowchart of right-handed instruction display control processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 42 is a flowchart of a main game content determination random number acquisition process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 43 is a configuration diagram of a main gaming table on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 44 is a configuration diagram of a main gaming table on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the hold information management process on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the winning pre-reading determination process on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 47 is a flowchart of pre-reading effect contents determination processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 48 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display content determination processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 49 is a flowchart of effect content determination processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of an effect content determination process on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 51 is a configuration diagram of a main gaming table on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of limit frequency B fluctuation mode determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 53 is a limited frequency table on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flowchart of gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 55 is a flowchart of stay stage determination processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 56 is a configuration diagram of a main gaming table on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 57 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 58 is a flowchart of distribution game execution processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 59 is a flowchart of a shielding member drive control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 60 is a flowchart of gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 61 is a flowchart of special game related display control processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko game machine according to the first modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 62 is a flowchart of stay stage determination processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the third embodiment. FIG. 63 is a front view of the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 64 is an operation diagram according to a second big winning opening of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 65 is an operation diagram according to the electric role of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 66 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 67 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 68 is a flowchart of a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 69 is a configuration diagram of a main gaming table on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 70 is a flowchart of gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 71 is a flowchart of the small hitting game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 72 is a flow chart of distribution combination control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 73 is a flowchart of a V winning a prize entrance determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 74 is a main flowchart of the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 75 is a flowchart of V prize detection effect display control processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 76 is a flowchart of special game effect execution processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 77 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 78 is a configuration diagram of a main gaming table on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 79 is a flowchart of gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 80 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display content determination processing on the sub main control unit side in a pachinko gaming machine according to a second modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 81 is a flowchart of the process of determining the effect content during rendering on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second variation from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 82 is a flowchart of a motorized product drive determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 83 is a configuration diagram of a main gaming table on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 84 is a flowchart of V winning detection effect display control processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 85 is a flowchart of a motorized product drive determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 86 is a flowchart of a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 87 is a diagram showing a main gaming table used in a first (second) main gaming symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 88 is a flowchart of limit frequency variation mode determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 89 is a limitation frequency table on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 90 is a flowchart of gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 91 is a table configuration diagram on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 92 is a flowchart of gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board M side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 93 is a flowchart of special game effect execution processing on the side of the sub control board S in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 94 is a table configuration diagram on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth modification of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 95 is a flowchart of the small hitting game control process on the main control board M side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 96 is a flowchart of a V winning detection effect display control process on the side of the sub control board S in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth modification of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flowchart of a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 98 is a table configuration diagram on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 99 is a flowchart of limited frequency variation mode determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 100 is a limited frequency table on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 101 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 102 is a flowchart of gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 103 is a flowchart of stay stage determination processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 104 is a table configuration diagram on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 105 is a flowchart of special game operating condition determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 106 is a flowchart of gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 107 is a main flowchart of the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 108 is an example of a stay stage determination table on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 109 is a flowchart of special game effect execution processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 110 is a flowchart of stay stage determination processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 111 is a flow chart of the gaming state display control process at the time of winning on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment.

Form to carry out

First, the meaning of each term in the present specification will be described. The term "entry" includes not only winnings where the winning balls are paid out, but also passing to "through chuckers" where there is no winning balls paid out. The “identification information” may be in any form as long as it can identify the type of information through the five senses (visual, auditory, tactile, etc.), but preferably it is visual, eg, numbers, letters, symbols And the like. In addition, in the present specification, "identification information" may be referred to as a main gaming symbol / special symbol (special drawing) or a decorative symbol (graphic drawing), but "special symbol (special drawing)" is a main control board It is identification information whose display is controlled on the side, and "decorative symbol (dressing)" is identification information as an effect to be displayed on the sub control board side. “Identifiable information can be displayed” is not limited to any display method. For example, light emission of light emitting means (for example, liquid crystal, LED, 7 segments) (including not only the presence or absence of light but also the difference in color), physical Display (for example, stop display of a symbol drawn on a reel band at a predetermined position) and the like can be mentioned. "Effect" refers to display content that enhances the interest of a game, and includes, for example, identification information change, stop, notice, etc., moving images and pictures such as animations and live-actions, still images such as pictures, characters, etc. Combinations can be mentioned. The "opened state, open state" and "closed state, closed state" are, for example, open state = easy-to-win state and closed state = no prize in the configuration of a general large winning opening (so-called, attacker). It will be easy. Also, for example, a state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as an advanced state) projected from the game board (the player side) and a state (hereinafter referred to as the retracted state) retracted into the game board (opposite to the player side) In a configuration (so-called Vero type attacker) capable of taking the above condition, the advancing state = the winning easy state, and the retreating state = the winning non-easiness state. The "random number" is a random number used in a lottery (lottery by an electronic computer) for determining some game content in a pachinko gaming machine, and includes pseudo random numbers in addition to narrow random numbers (for example, hard as random numbers Random number, soft random number as pseudo random number). For example, the so-called "basic random number" affecting the outcome of the game, specifically, "winning random number (random number for winning lottery)" associated with the transition of the special game, the variation pattern (or variation time) of the identification symbol is determined "Variation mode decision random number" for doing, "symbol decision random number" which decides stop pattern, and "per hit symbol decision random number" which decides whether or not to shift to specific game (for example probability fluctuation game) after special game be able to. When determining the content of the variation mode or the content of the fixed identification information, it is not necessary to use all these random numbers, and at least one random number which is the same as or different from each other may be used. In addition, in this specification, the number of random numbers may be displayed in the form of the number of random numbers or a plurality of random numbers, but once in the entrance (for example, starting entrance) which is a trigger for acquiring random numbers. The random number acquired by entering the ball is referred to as one (ie, in the above example, a bundle of random numbers such as a winning random number + a variation mode determination random number + a symbol determination random number ... is referred to as a single random number) . Also, for example, one type of random number (for example, a winning random number) may also be another type of random number (for example, a symbol determination random number). The “gaming state” is, for example, a special gaming state in which the special winning opening can be opened, a transition to the special gaming state, a transition to the special gaming state from a non-probability fluctuation gaming state where the lottery probability is a predetermined value. Transition game state with high lottery probability, transition to special game Auxiliary game state with assistance for winning to start slot that becomes transition lottery to special game (so-called, normal symbol time reduction state, for example, variable members are attached to the start slot In the case, the open period of the variable member is long, the open winning probability of the variable member is high, the notification time of the result of the open lottery of the variable member is short, and so on. The “expected average execution time of easily enterable ball games per unit time” assumes a situation in which the symbol variation of the auxiliary gaming symbol is performed continuously (for example, the condition in which the suspension relating to the auxiliary gaming symbol always exists) In this case, it means the ratio of the open period per unit time (for example, 5 minutes) of the variable member attached to the starting opening, but in terms of internal processing, in other words, based on the gaming state mentioned above, When the variable member is attached to the starting opening, long and short of the open period of the variable member (so-called open extension function operation state / non-operation state), winning of the ordinary symbol (auxiliary game symbol) that triggers the opening of the variable member Probability high and low (so-called flat figure high probability state · low probability state), long and short variation time of the normal symbol (auxiliary game pattern) that triggers opening of the variable member (so-called flat figure fluctuation shortening function Operating condition-actuated state), is realized by any one or more combinations of the like. The “average value of the fluctuation display period of the identification information” is not limited to the meaning of measuring the fluctuation display period every fluctuation display of the identification information and taking an average value based on the actually measured value. More specifically, in the case where the variable display period is configured to be determined for each variable display of identification information, there are a plurality of types of variable display period candidates to be determined (selected). Although the expected value (sum of “selection probability × variation display period”) based on the plurality of types of fluctuation display periods is obtained, if there is one type of the variation display period candidate to be selected, one type The variable display period itself of (ie, it includes both concepts). Furthermore, the concept limited to only the average value of the fluctuation display period of identification information at the time of losing, or the concept restricted to only the average value of the fluctuation display period of identification information at the time of hitting, or only the fluctuation display period having the highest selection probability It should be added that the meaning of this wording is to use it as an index that indicates the progressing speed of the game that the player can feel, so that the meaning of the term “variation display period of the identification information As a method of realizing the “average value” different, the candidate of the variable display period and / or the selection probability are made different, or even if the candidate of the variable display period and / or the selection probability is the same, a further variable display period is added There are various methods such as changing the period value at the time of performing, but the method is not limited to any one). “The first variation period state in which the average value of the variation display period of the identification information is the first period, and the second period in which the average value of the variation display periods of the identification information is different from the first period "Having at least a fluctuation period state" means not only the two states concerned but also three or more states (or any two states in the case of having three or more states) For example, according to the number of times of display of variation of identification information, “first variation period state” → “second variation period state” → “third variation period state” It also includes those that can be taken. In this case, when the average value of the fluctuation display periods of the identification information in each state is configured to be “first fluctuation period state” <“second fluctuation period state” <“third fluctuation period state”, State transition of high-speed game progress state → medium-speed game progress state → low-speed game progress state can be constructed {Of course, the reverse state transition (game progress state) may be constructed, In that case, it becomes suitable when combined with the probability fluctuation gaming state + electric chow opening easy state which continues until the next big hit (the next big hit is obtained despite the situation where the next big hit occurrence is almost definite) As the situation does not continue, the progressing speed of the game is improved, so that it is possible to eliminate the so-called fatigue at the time of cheating. Furthermore, as a feature of each state, in the “first fluctuation period state”, the difference between the average value of the fluctuation display period of identification information at the time of losing and the average value of the fluctuation display period of identification information at the time of hitting In the “third fluctuation period state”, which is smaller than the difference in the “second fluctuation period state”, an average value of fluctuation display periods of identification information at the time of losing and an average value of fluctuation display periods of identification information at hitting In addition to the difference being smaller than the difference in the “second fluctuation period state”, the fluctuation display period of the identification information at the time of losing is particularly likely to be relatively long compared to the “first fluctuation period state” In other words, in the “second fluctuation period state”, the fluctuation display period of identification information at the time of hitting is relatively long particularly in the “second fluctuation period state” compared to other states. (I.e., the short display of fluctuation with a definite loss) The display of a fluctuation of a short display with a loss or the display of a display with a middle fluctuation that suggests a hit is not selected (or not selected), but the fluctuation of reach fluctuation (per long fluctuation) It can be exemplified that the feature is selected (or easily selected) only during the display period. The "specific period in the high probability lottery state after the end of the special game execution" may be a period immediately after the end of the special game execution until the symbol variation for a predetermined number of times is made, or the special game It may be a period until the symbol variation is made a predetermined number of times after one or more symbol variations are made after the end of the execution (ie, the high probability lottery state is maintained after the completion of the special game execution) If it is within the range, it means that it is an arbitrary period within that range, therefore, the above-mentioned "first fluctuation period state"->"second fluctuation period state"->"third fluctuation period state" When the state transition with can be taken, the specific period may mean the staying period of the “first variation period state” and / or the “second variation period state”. "When the predetermined condition is satisfied in the information about the hold" means that there is a high possibility that a special game (so-called big hit game) will occur at the time of the holding process, for example, but the special game may occur There is no particular limitation on the judgment criteria. More specifically, "winning random number (random number for winning lottery)", "variation mode determination random number" for determining the variation mode (or variation time) of the identification symbol, "symbol determination random number" for determining the stop pattern, It is also possible to use a random number value such as "per symbol design random number" to decide whether or not to shift to a specific game (for example, probability fluctuation game) after a special game, or an event content derived from these random values The length of fluctuation time, the type of stop symbol, whether to shift to a specific game, etc.) may be used as the judgment standard. In the case of suggesting or announcing the existence of the hold, for example, it is performed in conjunction with the effect (the pattern variation mode of the decorative symbol, or the like during the holding digestion until the hold is reached). Background information etc) can be changed, and when reporting, for example, the display mode of the suspension indicator light (may be an image on the liquid crystal display device) at the time of the suspension occurrence (In this case, change the display color, change the display shape, etc.), change the sound such as the hold occurrence sound or BGM at the hold occurrence time, the lamp for effect at the hold occurrence time Execution mode of other effects (pattern variation mode of decorative symbol, background effect performed in conjunction with it, etc.) being executed at the time of the hold occurrence, changing the lighting mode of (frame lamp etc.) The To reduction, and the like. The “average value of the fluctuation display period of the identification information” is not limited to the meaning of measuring the fluctuation display period every fluctuation display of the identification information and taking an average value based on the actually measured value. More specifically, in the case where the variable display period is configured to be determined for each variable display of identification information, there are a plurality of types of variable display period candidates to be determined (selected). Although the expected value (sum of “selection probability × variation display period”) based on the plurality of types of fluctuation display periods is obtained, if there is one type of the variation display period candidate to be selected, one type The variable display period itself of (ie, it includes both concepts). Furthermore, the concept limited to only the average value of the fluctuation display period of identification information at the time of losing, or the concept restricted to only the average value of the fluctuation display period of identification information at the time of hitting (including the so-called small hit time) The concept may be limited to only the variable display period where the selection probability is high, that is, the meaning of this word is to be used as an index indicating the progressing speed of the game that the player can feel (therefore, As a method of realizing “average value of fluctuation display period of identification information”, candidates of fluctuation display period and / or selection probability are made different, or candidates of fluctuation display period and / or selection probability are the same. Although there are various methods such as changing the period value when adding a further variable display period, the present invention is not limited to any method). The "stay stage" is a stage dependent upon controlling the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display device SG, and the tendency of the effect to be displayed when the stay stage is different {type of advance notice effect that can be executed, is executed Types of background effects to be obtained, execution frequency of preview effects that can be executed, execution frequency of background effects that can be executed, occurrence frequency of reach effects (SP reach effect, development effect, etc.) are different. The "high probability turning effect" is an effect that asks whether or not to shift to the probability fluctuation gaming state after the big hit ends, and may be referred to as a probability changing turning effect. In addition, the "high probability turning effect" may be an effect asking whether or not to shift to the probability variation gaming state (including both time shortening gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state) after the big hit ends, or after the big hit end It may be an effect asking whether or not to shift to the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, or an effect asking whether to shift to the probability variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state after the big hit ends. The "specified game turning effect" is an effect to ask whether or not to shift to the time shortening gaming state after the big hit ends, and may be referred to as a time shortening turning effect. In addition, "specific game turning effect" may be an effect asking about whether to shift to a time shortening gaming state (including both probability fluctuation gaming state and non-probability fluctuation gaming state) after the big hit ends, or after the big hit end It may be an effect asking about whether or not to shift to the probability fluctuation gaming state and time shortening gaming state, or an effect asking whether to shift to the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and time shortening gaming state after the big hit ends, “high probability A presentation that asks which game state to shift to after a big hit, such as a "score effect" or a "specific game turn effect", may be collectively referred to as a "score effect". The “first notification image” is an image prompting the player to shoot the game ball at a specific firing intensity, and may be referred to as a first right-handed instruction display. The “second notification image” is an image prompting the player to shoot the game ball at a specific firing intensity, and may be referred to as a second right-handed instruction display. More broadly, the “first notification image” and the “second notification image” are not limited to the images displayed on the effect display device as the “first notification effect” and the “second notification effect”, The emission intensity (direction of emission) may be suggested by lighting, blinking or extinguishing of the lamp, or the emission intensity (direction of emission) may be suggested by audio notification from the speaker (the occurrence condition is the first notification) The same may be applied to the image and the second notification image), and further, a plurality of notifications may be combined (while the first notification image is displayed on the effect display device, the right notification by sound is provided) Etc), and "first notification effect" and "second notification effect" may be different notification modes (the first notification effect is displayed on the effect display device, and the second notification effect outputs the sound from the speaker Do, etc.). The "specified hold notification effect" is an effect that suggests that there may be a hold with a high profit by a player such as a small hit or a big hit, and may be referred to as a small hit hold notification effect. . “Effect to conceal the number of unit games” is an effect that does not notify the number of execution rounds executed in the big hit definitively, but suggests the number of execution rounds in the middle of the execution of the big hit, and round up effect ( It may be referred to as round-up success production or round-up failure production). The "effect for promoting the launch of the game ball toward the variable member" is an effect that suggests a launch timing at which the game ball can enter the predetermined entrance, and may be referred to as a right-handed execution instruction effect. The "variable winning opening firing effect" is an effect that indicates a firing timing at which the game ball can enter the big winning opening, and may be referred to as a shooting instruction effect. Note that the time reduction gaming state according to the present embodiment may be that the main game time short flag is on, or the auxiliary game time short flag may be on, that is, the time reduction game state May indicate that the open time extension function is operating, or the non-time saving gaming state may indicate that the open time extension function is not active. The time saving gaming state may be referred to as a specific gaming state, and the non-time shortening gaming state may be referred to as a normal gaming state. Also, the probability variation gaming state may be referred to as a high probability lottery state, and the non-probability variation gaming state may be referred to as a low probability lottery state.

  The following embodiment is a model in which two conventional type 1 pachinko gaming machines are mixed (type 1 first type compound machine). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is within the scope when applied to other gaming machines (eg, conventional pachinko gaming machines such as conventional type 1, type 2, type 3 and general electronic combination). . Note that the present embodiment is merely an example, and relates to the order of each step regarding various processes such as the location and function of each means, the on / off timing of the flag, and the means name etc. It is not limited to the following aspects. In addition, the embodiments and modifications described above should not be construed as limiting as applied to specific ones, and may be any combination. For example, it should be understood that a modification of one embodiment is a modification of another embodiment, and even if one modification and another modification are independently described, It should be understood that a combination of the modification and the other modification is also described. Further, in the present embodiment, there are a lottery table and a reference table regarding various tables, but these are not limited, and the lottery table may be a reference table or vice versa. Further, in the present example, the “table” is not limited to the format, and one or more selection candidates are selected from a plurality of selection candidates based on one or more pieces of information. It should be understood that it is an aspect that is associated. Furthermore, numerical values as specific examples shown in the following embodiments and modifications {e.g. winning probability at the time of lottery execution, maximum number of rounds at special game, symbol fluctuation time, number of continuations in each gaming state, etc.} This is merely an example, and in particular, different conditions (for example, the conditions of the first main game side and the second main game side, the conditions of the probability change game and the non-probability change game, time reduction game and the non-probability change game) It is understood that the size relationship and combination of the numerical values shown in the conditions for the time reduction game, etc. may be changed as appropriate without departing from the spirit of the following embodiments and modifications. Should. For example, on the first main game side and the second main game side, the winning probability at the time of lottery execution and the magnitude relationship in the expected value of the maximum round number at the special game time are: first main game side = second main game side Even if it is illustrated as such, the magnitude relationship may be appropriately changed such that the first main game side <the second main game side, or the first main game side> the second main game side. Good (other figures, same for conditions). Also, for example, when configuring as the number of continuations of the probability variation gaming state based on the purport of continuing until the next big hit occurs, does “65535” be set as the number of continuations (constructed so as to be substantially continued), Alternatively, even in the option of the realization method based on the same purpose of maintaining the probability fluctuation gaming state until the next big hit occurs without setting the number of continuations, it does not greatly deviate from the spirit of the following embodiments and modifications. It should be understood that it may be changed as appropriate. Note that the time reduction gaming state according to the present embodiment may be that the main game time short flag is on, or the auxiliary game time short flag may be on, that is, the time reduction game state May indicate that the open time extension function is operating, or the non-time saving gaming state may indicate that the open time extension function is not active. The time saving gaming state may be referred to as a specific gaming state, and the non-time shortening gaming state may be referred to as a normal gaming state. Also, the probability variation gaming state may be referred to as a high probability lottery state, and the non-probability variation gaming state may be referred to as a low probability lottery state.

  Here, before describing each component, the features (outline) of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

  First, the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Pachinko gaming machines are mainly composed of gaming machine slots and gaming boards. Hereinafter, these will be described in order.

  First, the gaming machine frame of the pachinko gaming machine includes an outer frame D12, a front frame D14, a transparent plate D16, a door D18, an upper bowl D20, a lower bowl D22, and a firing handle D44. First, the outer frame D12 is a frame for fixing the pachinko gaming machine at a position where it should be installed. The front frame D14 is a frame aligned with the opening of the outer frame D12, and is attached to the outer frame D12 so as to be able to open and close via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The front frame D14 includes a mechanism for firing a game ball, a mechanism for detachably accommodating a game board, a mechanism for guiding or recovering the game ball, and the like. The transparent plate D16 is formed of glass or the like and is supported by the door D18. The door D18 is openably and closably attached to the front frame D14 via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The upper ball dish D20 has a mechanism for storing game balls, sending out the game balls to the shooting rail, and removing the game balls from the lower ball dish D22. The lower ball tray D22 has a mechanism for storing and removing game balls. Further, a sub-input button SB is provided on a partial surface of the bowl unit D17 (in this example, the upper surface of the upper bowl plate D20), the effect mode of which can be changed by the player's operation.

  Next, in the game board, a game area D30 partitioned by the outer rail D32 and the inner rail D34 is formed. Then, in the game area D30, in addition to a plurality of mechanisms such as a plurality of game nails and windmills not shown and various general winning openings, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10, an auxiliary game start opening H10, 1st large winning opening C10, 2nd large winning opening C20, 1st main game symbol display device A20, 2nd main game symbol display device B20, effect display device SG, auxiliary game symbol display device H20, center decoration D38 and out mouth D36 is installed. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail in order.

  Next, the first main game start port A10 is installed as a start winning port corresponding to the first main game. As a specific configuration, the first main game start port A10 is provided with a first main game start port entering ball detection device A11s. Here, the first main game start slot entrance ball detection device A11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of the game ball to the first main game start slot A10, and the first main game start indicating the entrance ball at the time of entry Generate ball entry information.

  Next, the second main game start port B10 is installed as a start winning port corresponding to the second main game. As a specific configuration, the second main game start port B10 includes a second main game start port ball detection device B11s and a second main game start port electric role object B11d. Here, the second main game start slot entrance ball detection device B11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of the game ball to the second main game start slot B10, and indicates the second main game start indicating the entrance ball at the time of entry. Generate ball entry information. Next, the second main game start port electric role B11d changes into a closed state in which the game ball is less likely to win in the second main game start port B10 and an open state in which the game ball is easier to win than the normal state.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the first main game start opening A10 and the second main game start opening B10 are arranged to overlap, and the second main game start is started by the presence of the first main game start opening A10. The upper part of the mouth B10 is blocked. In addition, the game balls flowing down the game area D30 are configured to be guided to the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 from either the right side or the left side.

  In the present embodiment, although the electric bonus is provided on the second main game start opening B10 side, the present invention is not limited to this, and the electric bonus is provided on the first main game start opening A10 side. May be Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first main game start opening A10 and the second main game start opening B10 are arranged to overlap, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the first main game start opening A10 and the first main game start opening A10 The two main game starting openings B10 may be arranged separately from each other.

  Next, the auxiliary game start port H10 includes the auxiliary game start port entrance detection device H11s. Here, the auxiliary game start slot entrance detection device H11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of the game ball to the auxiliary game start slot H10, and generates the auxiliary game start slot entrance information indicating the ball entry when entering the ball. Do. It should be noted that the entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game start port H10 is a trigger for a lottery for expanding the second main game start port electric winning combination B11d of the second main game start port B10.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the game ball flowing down the right side (based on the center of the game area) of the game area D30 is easily guided to the auxiliary game start port H10, and the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) The game ball flowing down is configured to be less likely to be guided to the auxiliary game start port H10. The arrangement of the auxiliary game start port H10 is not limited to that of this example, and is arranged so that the game ball flowing down the left side (based on the center of the game area) of the game area D30 is easily guided to the auxiliary game start port H10 If two auxiliary game starting openings H10 are provided and flow down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area), the game ball may flow down the right side (based on the center of the game area) of the game area D30. Any of them may be configured to be easily induced to the auxiliary game start port H10.

  Next, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20 are provided on the upper right of the out port D36, and the gaming ball flowing down the right side (based on the middle of the gaming area) of the gaming area D30 is Before reaching the out port D36, it is configured to easily pass through the area where the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20 are disposed.

  Next, the first large winning opening C10 is in the form of a horizontal rectangle that opens when the first main gaming symbol (special symbol) or the second main gaming symbol (special symbol) is stopped by the big hit symbol, and the out-port It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game located at the upper right of D36. Specifically, the first large winning opening C10 is a first large winning opening winning detection device C11s for detecting the entry of the game ball, and the first large winning opening electric combination C11d (and the first large winning). And a motor electric product solenoid C13). Here, the first large winning opening winning combination detection device C11s is a sensor that detects the entering of the gaming ball to the first large winning opening C10, and the first large winning opening entering ball information indicating the entering at the time of entering the ball Generate The first big winning opening electric winning combination C11d changes the first big winning opening C10 to the first big winning opening C10 in the normal state where the gaming ball can not win or difficult to win and the opening state where the gaming ball is easy to win (first (1) The winning prize opening electric combination product solenoid C13 is excited and varied). In the present embodiment, the form of the big winning opening is changed to a horizontal rectangular shape and the gaming ball can not be won or difficult to win in a normal state and an open state in which the gaming ball can easily win. It is not limited to In that case, for example, a mode capable of taking an advanced state in which the rod-like member provided in the big winning opening protrudes to the player side and a retracted state in which the bar member is retracted to the player side (so-called Even if the opening on the passage where the game ball can roll and the opening where the game ball can roll is made a big winning opening, it is possible to take a state in which the opening is closed and a state in which it is opened (a so-called sliding attacker). It is preferable in the case where it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entering the special winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

  Next, the second large winning opening C20 forms a horizontal rectangular shape that is opened when the first main gaming symbol (special symbol) or the second main gaming symbol (special symbol) stops at the big hit symbol. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game located at the upper right of the mouth D36. As a specific configuration, the second large winning opening C20, the second large winning opening winning detection device C21s for detecting the entry of the game ball, and the second large winning opening electric combination C21d (and the second large winning And a motor electric product solenoid C23). Here, the second large winning opening winning combination detection device C21s is a sensor that detects the entering of the gaming ball to the second large winning opening C20, the second large winning opening entering ball information showing the entering at the time of entering the ball Generate The gaming ball having entered the second big winning opening C20 is configured to be detected by the second big winning opening winning detection device C21 s. Next, the second big winning opening electric winning combination C21d, in the second big winning opening C20 the game ball can not be winning or difficult to win the normal state and the opening state where the gaming ball is easy to win the second big winning opening C20 Make it variable. In the present embodiment, the form of the big winning opening is changed to a horizontal rectangular shape and the gaming ball can not be won or difficult to win in a normal state and an open state in which the gaming ball can easily win. It is not limited to In that case, for example, a mode capable of taking an advanced state in which the rod-like member provided in the big winning opening protrudes to the player side and a retracted state in which the bar member is retracted to the player side (so-called An opening on the passage through which the game ball can roll is a large winning opening, and it is also possible to use a state in which the opening is closed and a state in which the opening is open (so-called slide-type attacker). It is preferable in the case where it is desired to secure the number of ball entry into the special winning opening to a predetermined number (for example, 10).

  Next, the first main game symbol display device A20 (the second main game symbol display device B20) is related to the first main game symbol (the second main game symbol) corresponding to the first main game (the second main game) Is an apparatus that executes the displayed information. Specifically, the first main game symbol display device A20 (the second main game symbol display device B20), the first main game symbol display portion A21g (the second main game symbol display portion B21g), and the first main game And a symbol hold display unit A21 h (a second main game symbol hold display unit B21 h). Here, the first main game symbol holding display area A21h (the second main game symbol holding display area B21h) is composed of four lamps, and the number of lighting of the lamps is the first main game (second main game) Corresponds to the number of pending random numbers (the number of fluctuations of the main game symbol not being executed). In addition, 1st main game symbol display part A21g (2nd main game symbol display part B21g) is comprised by 7 segment LED, for example, and 1st main game symbol (2nd main game symbol) is "0"-"9. "10" numbers displayed with "" and lost "-" {However, not limited to this, 7-segment LED is used to make it difficult for the player to recognize which main game symbol is displayed It is preferable to use and display by a symbol or the like. In addition, the number of reservations is not limited to four lamps, and the maximum number of reservations can be displayed (for example, one lamp can be displayed. Number 1: lighted, pending number 2: low-speed blinking, pending number 3: medium-speed blinking, pending number 4: high-speed blinking, if configured).

  In the present embodiment, the first main game symbol display device A20 (the second main game symbol display device B20), because the first main game symbol (the second main game symbol) does not have to have a dramatic role. The size of is set so as not to be noticeable. However, when adopting a method in which the first main game symbol (the second main game symbol) itself has an effective role and the first decorative symbol (the second decorative symbol) is not displayed, the effect to be described later The first main game symbol (second main game symbol) may be displayed on a liquid crystal display such as the display device SG.

  Next, the effect display device SG is a device that executes display or the like of an effect image including a decorative symbol that fluctuates / stops in conjunction with the first main gaming symbol and the second main gaming symbol. Here, as a specific configuration, the effect display device SG includes a display area SG10 in which the effect is executed including the change display of the decorative symbol and the like. Here, the display area SG10 is a first hold display unit SG12 (and a second hold display unit SG13) for displaying main game hold information, and a moving image of a decorative symbol variation of a plurality of rows imitating, for example, a slot machine game. And a decorative symbol display area SG11 for displaying the In the present embodiment, the effect display device SG is configured by a liquid crystal display, but may be configured by other display means such as a mechanical drum or an LED. Next, the first hold display unit SG12 (and the second hold display unit SG13) is composed of four lamps, which are linked to the hold lamp of the main game symbol.

  Next, the auxiliary gaming symbol display device H20 is a device that executes display and the like regarding the auxiliary gaming symbol. As a specific configuration, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 includes an auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g and an auxiliary game symbol hold display portion H21h. Here, the auxiliary gaming symbol holding display unit H21 h is configured of four lamps, and the number of lighting of the lamps corresponds to the number of holdings of the auxiliary gaming symbol fluctuation (the number of auxiliary gaming symbol fluctuation not being executed).

  Next, the center decoration D38 is installed around the effect display device SG, and has functions such as a channel of the game ball, protection of the effect display device SG, and decoration. In addition, the game effect lamp D26 is provided in an area other than the game area D30 or the game area D30, and plays an effect by blinking or the like. Further, a speaker D24 is provided between the D14 and the game effect lamp D26, and a sound effect corresponding to the game state or the like is output. Also, in this example, when hitting the left (shooting the gaming ball so that the gaming ball flows down on the left side of the board) also hitting the right (shooting the gaming ball so that the game ball flows down on the right side of the board) The game ball can flow down in the vicinity of the second main game start opening B10 also at the time of execution, and when the left strike is executed, the game ball can not enter the auxiliary game start opening H10, making it difficult to substantially strike the left. It is difficult to enter the second main game start opening B10 at the time of execution (because the second main game start opening electric combination B11d is closed), it is easy to enter the second main game start opening B10 at the time of right-handed execution ( When the second main game start opening electric role B11d is open) is configured. In addition, it is not limited to this, the position of the 2nd main game start opening B10 is the board right side, namely, when left hitting execution it is difficult for the game ball to reach near the 2nd main game start opening B10, right turn execution 2nd (2) The game ball may be configured to easily reach the vicinity of the main game start opening B10.

  Next, the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko game machine controls the entire operation of the pachinko game machine, and in particular, controls the entire game operation such as lottery when entering the first main game start port A10 (second main game start port B10) (ie, the game Control board M that performs control directly related to the benefit of the person and effect control means (sub main control) that performs display control and the like related to various effects on the effect display device SG that adds interest to the game U volume Part) SM, sub-sub control unit SS mainly performing effect display, prize ball tank KT, prize ball rail KR, and game balls supplied from the prize ball tank KT according to the winning on each winning opening A prize ball dispensing apparatus (set base) KE having a dispensing unit KE10 or the like for dispensing to the dish D20, a prize ball dispensing control board KH for controlling the dispensing operation by the dispensing unit KE10, and a gaming ball (storage ball) for the upper bowl dish D20. The game area D30 A launcher D 42 for launching one ball at a time, a launch control board D 40 for controlling the launch operation of the launcher D 42, a power unit E for supplying power to each part of the pachinko gaming machine, and a pachinko gaming machine power on / off A power switch Ea or the like which is a switch is provided on the back of the front frame D14 (opposite to the game side).

  Next, the electrical schematic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, as described above, the payout of gaming balls is performed based on the main control board M that controls the progress of the game and information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M. Based on information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M to control the award ball payout control board KH to be controlled, various effects on the effect display device SG such as fluctuation / stop of the decorative symbol, sound from the speaker D24, A sub control board S (in this example, the sub main control unit SM and the sub sub control unit SS are disposed on one board) which controls the lighting of the game effect lamp D26 and the execution of an error notification etc. And a power supply unit E that supplies power to the entire gaming machine including the control board. Here, the sub control board S controls various effects on the effect display device SG such as variation and stop of the decorative symbol, sounds from the speaker D24, lighting of the game effect lamp D26, and an error notification. And two control units of a sub-sub control unit SS that executes display processing such as variation display / stop display of the decorative symbol on the effect display device SG, suspension display, and advance notice display. The main control board M, the prize ball payout control board KH, the sub main control unit SM, and the sub sub control unit SS include a CPU that performs various arithmetic processing, a ROM that pre-stores a program that defines the arithmetic processing of the CPU, A RAM for temporarily storing data (such as various data generated during a game and a computer program read from a ROM) handled by the computer is mounted. The outline configuration of each substrate and the electrical connection between each substrate and device will be outlined below.

  First, the main control board M, the winning opening sensor Ns {the aforementioned first main game start opening ball insertion detection device A11s, the second main game start opening ball insertion detection device B11s, auxiliary game start opening ball insertion detection device H11s, the first 1 large winning opening winning detection device C11s, the second large winning opening winning detection device C21s, a general winning detection device (not shown, but with a general ball entry, there is a winning ball, but not a lottery for entering a symbol) ), Driving solenoids (not shown, first big winning opening electric combination solenoid C13, second big winning opening electric combination solenoid C23, etc.), information display LED (not shown), etc., progress of the game It is electrically connected to an input / output device that is essential to the control of the game, and controls the progress of the game based on input signals from each input device. Furthermore, the main control board M is also electrically connected to the winning ball payout control board KH and the sub control board S (sub main control unit SM and sub sub control unit SS), and based on the game progress, the prize balls are paid out. The information (commands) relating to etc. is configured to be able to be transmitted to the winning ball payout control board KH, and the information (commands) relating to the presentation / playing state of the game etc to the sub control board S. The main control board M can be connected to the hall computer HC or the like through an external connection terminal (not shown), and the main control board M can be connected by wiring with the hall computer HC through the external connection terminal. Is configured to output game related information to an external device.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as indicated by the arrows in FIG. 3, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH are configured to enable two-way communication, while the main control board M and the sub main The control unit SM is configured to enable one-way communication from the main control board M to the sub main control unit SM (the communication method may use either serial communication or parallel communication). Communication between control boards (between control devices) may be one-way communication or two-way communication. Further, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH output game related information and payout related information as external output information to the hall computer HC via the external relay terminal board (not shown) (on the hall computer HC side) One-way communication).

  Next, the prize ball payout control board KH is a prize ball payout device KE that executes payout of game balls and a device that can be operated by a player, and receives a request for lending of game balls and receives the prize ball payout control board KH. It is connected to the game ball lending device R to be transmitted. Further, although not shown, in the present embodiment, the control circuit unit of the launcher is additionally provided in the prize ball payout control board, and the prize ball payout control board and the launcher (launch handle, launch motor, ball feed device) Etc.). In the present embodiment, the game ball lending device R is adopted separately as a form adjacent to the game machine, but may be integrated with the game machine, in which case, it is rented by the prize ball payout control board KH. Control and management control of a recording medium for lending such as electronic money may be integrated.

  Next, the sub control board S is connected to the effect display device SG for displaying a decorative symbol etc. as described above, the speaker D24, the game effect lamp D26, and a drive device (not shown) for other effects. . In the present embodiment, as described above, the sub main control unit SM and the sub sub control unit SS are provided in the sub control substrate S, and the control of sound to be output from the speaker D24 by the sub main control unit SM Lighting control of the lamp D26 and determination control of display contents to be displayed on the effect display device are performed, and display control (substantial display control) on the effect display device is performed by the sub-sub control unit SS Is configured. In the present embodiment, the sub main control unit SM and the sub sub control unit SS are configured to be integrated by the sub control substrate S, but the present invention is not limited to this (configured as a separate substrate Although it may be possible, a merit of being able to reduce the situation where noise mixes in space merit, wiring, etc. arises by being configured to be integrated. Further, the work assignment in both control units can be appropriately changed, for example, the voice control is executed by the sub-sub control unit SS (suitable in the case where a voice control circuit is integrated with VDP is adopted). Also, electronic value may be given without giving a physical award ball as a prize ball.

  Next, various functions of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. First, the main control board M is a game peripheral device related to a game (first main game peripheral device A, second main game peripheral device B, first and second main game shared peripheral device C, auxiliary game peripheral device H), The sub main control unit SM (sub game control means SM) involved in the effect, a prize ball payout control board KH performing payout control of a predetermined number of prize balls based on a payout instruction from the main control board M, and information communicably connected ing. Further, the sub main control unit SM (sub game control means SM) is electrically connected to the sub sub control unit SS (effect display means SS) for executing image effects, various game effect lamps D26 (for example, side lamps) and the speakers D24. It is connected. Furthermore, the prize ball payout control substrate KH is electrically connected to a prize ball dispenser KE provided with a stepping motor, a sprocket, and the like. The main control board M, sub main control unit SM (sub game control means SM), sub sub control unit SS (effect display means SS), prize ball payout control board KH, etc. store data and programs in terms of hardware. And ROM, RAM, and elements such as a CPU used for arithmetic processing. The respective units included in the main control board M below may be configured to be mounted on a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device). For example, each means included in a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device) may be configured to be mounted on the main control board M. Hereinafter, the details of each means (apparatus) will be described.

  The “random number” in the claims and the present specification may be, for example, “0” to “65535” or “0” to “0” assigned according to the type of random number (for example, a winning random number or a variation mode determination random number). It is a value randomly selected from a predetermined range such as “255”. The random number is not limited to a mathematically generated random number, and may be a pseudo random number generated by hardware random number, software random number, or the like. For example, the expression method of each value in the random number is a method (plus one method) in which the values are sequentially expressed along the random number sequence, the next value when the final value of the random number sequence is expressed (initial value There may be mentioned a method (initial value update method) in which)) is determined by a value having chance, a combination of these, and the like.

  In addition, with the limited frequency, the type and / or the selection rate of the variation mode of the main gaming symbol after the specific symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation mode of the main gaming symbol before the specific symbol is stopped and displayed. The type and / or selectivity is a state different from the state (limited frequency state) and continues for a predetermined period. In addition, the table referred to when determining the variation mode related to the main gaming symbol in the limited frequency state is referred to as the limited frequency table, and the limited frequency table may have a plurality of types, and the gaming state and the special game end A limited frequency table to be referred to is determined according to the number of times of fluctuation of the main game symbol afterward. Further, when the limited frequency table X and the limited frequency table Y are included as the limited frequency table, the limited frequency table Y is referred to from the state (also referred to as the limited frequency X state) referring to the limited frequency table X. Switching to a certain state (also referred to as a limited frequency Y state) is referred to as a limited frequency state transition. In addition, the limited frequency state can have a plurality even in one game state, that is, the probability fluctuation gaming state and time shortening gaming state, the probability fluctuation gaming state and non time shortening gaming state, the non probability fluctuation gaming state and time It is configured to be able to have a plurality of limited frequency states also in any one of the four game states of the short game state, the non-probability fluctuation game state and the non-time short game state, and one game state At one or more times the limited frequency state transitions, ie, probability fluctuation gaming state and time shortening gaming state, probability fluctuation gaming state and non time shortening gaming state, non probability fluctuation gaming state and time shortening gaming state, One or more limited frequency states may be configured to transition also in any one of four game states of non-probability fluctuation gaming state and non-time shortening gaming stateIn addition, in the case of determining the variation mode of the main gaming symbol with reference to the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table (sometimes referred to as a limitation frequency table), the different limitation frequency table when the limitation frequency state is different. (Variation mode selection candidates may all be different or refer to a different table), or selection rates of variation modes are made different by referring to a common limited frequency table (ie, selection targets The variation mode itself is the same but the selectivity differs (or the variation mode and the selectivity to be selected are the same, but it is further fixed to the variation time value according to the selected variation mode It may be configured to adopt a method of adding values.

  Here, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment has the first and second main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C (decrement counter) which can be cleared to zero. Furthermore, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment further includes an auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H capable of measuring time. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a second main game start opening electric combination open timer MP22t-B that measures the drive (open) time of the second main game start opening electric combination B11d. There is. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a winning ball counter MP33c that measures winning balls to the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20. The special game time management means MP34 further has a special game timer MP34t for managing the round time.

Here, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a probability variation counter MP51c capable of counting the probability variation number, and a time reduction counter MP52c capable of counting the time reduction number. Here, the “specific game” is, for example, a probability variation game in which the lottery probability for the special game is higher than that in the normal game, or a time reduction game in which the fluctuation time of the main gaming symbol is relatively shorter than that in the normal game. Point to.

  Here, in the present embodiment, during the time shortening game, the variation time of the first main gaming symbol and the second main gaming symbol is relatively shortened compared to the non-time shortening gaming in progress (time shortening function). Furthermore, the fluctuation time of the auxiliary game symbol is relatively shortened, and the open extension time of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is relatively extended (open time extension function). In addition, the time shortening game in the present embodiment is ended when the total value of the number of fluctuations of the first main gaming symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second main gaming symbol exceeds a predetermined number. That is, the time reduction number is configured to be subtracted for each change (stop) of the first main gaming symbol and the second main gaming symbol. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment has, for example, a function to perform a transfer lottery from a specific game (for example, a probability change game or a time reduction game) to a normal game at a predetermined probability every time the symbol changes. Good (in the case of a so-called pachinko game machine with a falling lottery function).

  Next, gaming peripherals will be described. Note that some of the peripheral devices have already been described in detail, so the remaining configuration will be briefly described. First, the gaming peripherals are a first main gaming peripheral A which is a peripheral of the first main gaming side, a second main gaming peripheral B which is a peripheral of the second main gaming side, and a first main gaming side The first and second main game common peripheral device C, which is a common peripheral device on the second main game side, an auxiliary game peripheral device H regarding an auxiliary game, a sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM, and a sub sub control unit SS (and effect display device SG) and the like are included. Here, the effects controlled by the sub main control unit SM include the variation of the decorative symbol in a form synchronized in time with the variation of the first main gaming symbol and the second main gaming symbol, in the result of the game. It relates to the display of only information that does not affect. Hereinafter, these peripheral devices will be described in order.

  First, the first main game peripheral device A is a first main game start port A10 that triggers a transition to a special game, and a first main game symbol display device A20 that can perform stop display and change display of the first main game symbol. ,have.

  Next, the second main game peripheral device B is a second main game symbol display device B20 capable of the second main game start port B10, which is a trigger for transition to a special game, and the second main game symbol stop display and variable display. And.

  Next, the first and second main game common peripheral devices C are in the closed state at the time of the normal game, and in the special game (big hit), the first big winning opening C10 which is opened under the predetermined condition And the second large winning opening C20.

  Next, the auxiliary gaming peripheral device H is an auxiliary gaming start opening H10 that triggers the opening of the second main game starting opening electric combination B11d of the second main game starting opening B10, and a stop indication and change indication of the auxiliary gaming symbol. And an auxiliary game symbol display device H20 that can be played.

  Here, the drawing fluctuation time management timer SM21t is configured to measure the fluctuation time of the decorative symbol.

  Further, the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is electrically connected to the effect display device SG which displays an image concerning the effect based on the information from the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS. Here, the effect display device SG has a display area SG10 for displaying an image.

  Here, the display area SG10 has a decorative symbol display area SG11 for variably displaying a decorative symbol, and a first hold display unit SG12 (and a second hold display unit SG13) for displaying main game hold information. ing.

  The first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20 and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are connected to the main control board M so as to be able to transmit information, and the remaining effect display means (sub sub control unit ) SS is connected to the secondary game control means (sub main control unit) SM so as to be able to transmit information. That is, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20 and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are controlled by the main control board M, and the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is the sub-game control Means (sub main control unit) means to be controlled by SM. Note that another peripheral device may be controlled via the main control board M and another peripheral device controlled by one-way communication (one-way communication).

  Next, FIG. 4 is a main flow chart showing a flow of general processing performed by the main control board M. After the game machine is powered on, the process of FIG. That is, after power on of the gaming machine, after performing initialization (not shown), the CPUMC of the main control board M confirms the input port of the RAM clear button in step 1002 and resets the power supply unit E It is determined whether the RAM clear button has been operated, that is, whether the manager of the game arcade has intentionally performed an operation to clear the contents of the RAM. If Yes in step 1002, in step 1004, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears all the contents of the RAM on the main control board M side (for example, information in the game state temporary storage means MB). Next, in step 1006, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits, to the sub main control unit SM, ram clear information (command) indicating that the RAM of the main control board M has been cleared (sent at that timing). Alternatively, a command may be set at this timing and may be configured to be transmitted in a control command transmission process described later), and the process proceeds to step 1016. On the other hand, in the case of No in Step 1002, the CPUMC of the main control board M checks the contents of the RAM area in the main control board M in Step 1008 (for example, save in the checksum and RAM area recorded at power off) Compare with the amount of information being Next, in step 1010, based on the check result, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the contents of the RAM are not normal (that is, whether the information at the time of power failure is backed up in the RAM). Do. If Yes in step 1010, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is abnormal, the process proceeds to the process of step 1004 (the above-described RAM clear process). On the other hand, if the result of step 1010 is No, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is normal, then in step 1012, the CPUMC of the main control board M stores power (back up) in the RAM of the main control board M In step 1014, the acquired various information command is transmitted to the sub main control unit SM side (it may be transmitted at the relevant timing, or the command is set at the relevant timing, which will be described later. It may be configured to transmit in the control command transmission process), and the process proceeds to the process of step 1016. Next, in step 1016, the CPUMC of the main control board M triggers an execution scheduled interrupt (for example, a hardware interrupt every about 1.5 ms) related to the main processing on the main control board M side shown in FIG. However, in this example, the interrupt cycle is allowed to be T) and as a result {(b) of FIG. It shifts to processing (for example, processing of incrementing a random number counter). After step 1018, the CPUMC of the main control board M repeatedly executes various random number updating processes until the next scheduled interrupt timing is reached.

  Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The CPU MC of the main control board M executes the processing of FIG. 7B based on the interrupt request generated when the scheduled interrupt timing is reached. That is, triggered by the arrival of the scheduled interrupt cycle T (for example, a hardware interrupt every about 1.5 ms), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes an auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process described later in step 1100. . Next, in step 1200, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a motorized product drive determination process described later. Next, in step 1300, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a main game content determination random number acquisition process described later. Next, in step 1400, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a main game symbol display process described later. Next, in step 1600, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a special game operating condition determination process described later. Next, in step 1700, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes special game control processing described later. Next, in step 1997, the CPUMC of the main control board M (in particular, the prize ball payout determination means MH) performs a prize ball payout control process (drive control of the prize ball payout device KE, etc.) Processing for causing the prize ball delivery control board KH to execute and managing the result is executed. Next, in step 1998, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes output processing of an external signal (output of information to an external terminal board, a hall computer HC or the like). Next, in step 1999, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes control command transmission processing (sends the command set in each of the above-mentioned processing to the sub main control unit SM side), and immediately before execution of this interrupt processing. Return to the process that was being executed.

  Next, NMI interrupt processing will be described. As described above, the CPUMC of the main control board M is configured such that the power interruption signal from the reset IC is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU, and the processing of FIG. Is executed. That is, when the game machine is powered off (in this example, NMI interrupt), in step 1020, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets power-off time information (for example, checksum) based on the information in the RAM area. . Next, in step 1022, the CPU MC of the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM area and prohibits timer interrupt processing, and shifts to a power-off wait loop processing.

  Next, FIG. 5 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition processing according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. First, at step 1102, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the game ball has entered the auxiliary game start port H10 (flow in, in the case of a gate, passage). In the case of Yes in step 1102, in step 1104, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the holding balls are not the upper limit (for example, four). In the case of Yes in step 1104, in step 1106, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires an auxiliary game content determination random number (for example, an auxiliary game symbol winning random number). Next, in step 1108, the CPU MC of the main control board M adds 1 to the holding sphere in a form of temporarily storing the random number in the RAM area of the main control board M together with information indicating the number of the hold. It transfers to the next process (process of step 1200). Also in the case of No in steps 1102 and 1104, the process proceeds to the next processing (processing of step 1200).

  Next, FIG. 6 is a flowchart of the motorized prize drive determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, at step 1202, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the motor-operated combination open flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1202, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1204 whether or not the auxiliary gaming symbol variation flag is off. If Yes in step 1204, in step 1206, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a holding ball related to the auxiliary game pattern. In the case of Yes in step 1206, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the gaming state on the auxiliary gaming side (flag state of the auxiliary gaming time short flag) in step 1216, and also acquires the acquired gaming state on the auxiliary gaming side Determine the stop symbol based on the auxiliary game symbol winning random number based on the holding ball (for example, when the auxiliary game time short flag is on, the winning symbol is selected with high probability compared to the case where it is off) and the main control It temporarily stores in the RAM area of the substrate M.

  Here, the right in the figure is an example of a lottery table for determining an auxiliary game stop symbol. As shown in the same table, in this example, the stop symbol is "D0, D1", and the stop symbol to be the hit symbol is "D1", and it is released due to each stop. In the non-time shortening game, when the stopped symbol is "D1", the open mode is (0.2 seconds open → closed). In addition, in the time reduction game, when the stopped symbol is "D1", the opening mode is (open for 0.2 seconds → closed for 0.2 seconds → open for 0.2 seconds → closed for 3.0 seconds → 4). It is configured to be open for 0 seconds → closed). In the non-time reduction game, the stop symbol is likely to be a lost symbol "D0", and in the time reduction game, the stop symbol is configured to be easy to hit and be a symbol "D1".

  Next, in step 1218, the CPUMC of the main control board M changes the auxiliary gaming symbol fluctuation time to the auxiliary gaming symbol fluctuation management timer MP11t-H based on the auxiliary gaming side gaming state (flag state of the auxiliary gaming time short flag). The predetermined time relating to (for example, 1 second if the auxiliary game time short flag is on, and 10 seconds if the auxiliary game time short flag is off) is set. Then, at step 1220, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary gaming symbol variation flag in the flag area of the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1222, the CPUMC of the main control board M updates the hold information temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M (subtracts 1 from the auxiliary game hold ball) and for auxiliary game symbol fluctuation management After the timer MP11t-H is started, variable display of the auxiliary game symbol is started on the auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g.

  Next, in step 1224, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time related to the fluctuation time of the auxiliary gaming symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1224, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol in step 1226, and the stop symbol of the acquired auxiliary game symbol is determined and displayed on the auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g. Do. Then, at step 1228, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary gaming symbol variation flag in the flag area of the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1230, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol of the auxiliary gaming symbol is "hit" (in this example, D1). In the case of Yes in step 1230, the CPUMC of the main control board M in step 1232 opens the second main game start opening electric combination B11d based on the gaming state and stop symbol on the auxiliary gaming side (for example, hit symbol " When D1 is stopped, if the auxiliary game time short flag is off, it is an open mode that is "0.2 second open → closed", and if the auxiliary game time short flag is on, "0.2 second Open → 0.2 seconds closed → 0.2 seconds open → 3.0 seconds closed → 4.0 seconds open → closed), and the predetermined time for the open time (open / close time) of the electric part The second main game start opening electric combination opening timer MP22t-B is set. Next, in step 1234, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the motor-operated accessory open flag. Then, in step 1236, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the second main game motorized role B11d of the second main game start port B10 {based on the opening mode determined in step 1232, the second main game start Opening (or closing) mouth-operated accessory B11d}. Next, in step 1238, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the open end timing of the second main game start opening electric combination B11d has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1238, the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the second main game electric symbol B11d of the second main game start port B10 in step 1240 and step 1242 and also sets the flag of the electric character open state. It turns off and it transfers to the following process (process of step 1300).

  If NO at step 1202, the process proceeds to step 1238. If NO at step 1204, the process proceeds to step 1224. If NO at step 1206, step 1224, step 1230, or step 1238, the next process is performed. It transfers to (the process of step 1300).

  Moreover, in this flowchart, after the stop symbol display in step 1226 for convenience, although it transfers to the following step immediately after, it is not limited to this. In that case, the process may be configured to shift to the next process after the stop display fixed time of about 500 ms (for example, this process is performed by performing the branch process using the stop display fixed flag and the timer). Is achievable).

  Next, FIG. 7 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. First, at step 1302, the CPUMC of the main control board M receives the first main game start opening information from the first main game start opening entrance detection device A11s of the first main game start opening A10. judge. If Yes in step 1302, in step 1304, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the number of holding balls for the main game (particularly, the first main game side) is not the upper limit (for example, four). In the case of Yes in step 1304, in step 1306, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires a first main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as a first main game content determination random number, a random lottery random number for determining success or failure, a symbol lottery random number for determining a symbol when hit, and a variation pattern (variation time) of special symbols are determined. Three random numbers of variation mode lottery random number to be acquired. Incidentally, these three random numbers are generated from random number generation means having different update cycles and random number ranges, respectively, and are obtained sequentially at this timing. Next, in step 1308, the CPU MC of the main control board M temporarily stores (holds) the acquired random number in the RAM area of the main control board M. Next, in step 1310, the CPU MC of the main control board M transmits a command transmission buffer for transmitting information (hold generation command) indicating that the first main game content determination random number has been acquired to the sub main control unit SM. The MT 10 is set (sent to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing of step 1999).

  Next, at step 1312, whether or not the CPUMC of the main control board M has received the second main game start opening ball insertion information from the second main game start opening ball detection device B11s of the second main game start port B10. Determine In the case of Yes in step 1312, in step 1314, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the holding balls for the main game (particularly the second main game side) are not the upper limit (for example, four). If Yes in step 1314, in step 1316, the CPUMC of the main control board M obtains a second main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as the second main game content determination random number, three random numbers of a winning lottery random number, a symbol lottery random number, and a variation aspect lottery random number are acquired similarly to the first main game content determining means. By the way, the acquisition range of each random number on the first main game side and the acquisition range of each random number on the second main game side (for example, the acquisition range of the winning lottery random number for the first main game and the winning lottery random number for the second main game) Is set to the same. Next, in step 1318, the CPU MC of the main control board M temporarily stores (holds) the acquired random number in the RAM area. Next, in step 1320, the CPU MC of the main control board M transmits a command transmission buffer for transmitting information (hold generation command) indicating that the second main game content determination random number has been acquired to the sub main control unit SM. The MT 10 is set (sent to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing of step 1999), and the process proceeds to the next processing (processing of step 1400). If NO in step 1302 and step 1304, the process proceeds to step 1312. If NO in step 1312 and step 1314, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1400).

  In this embodiment, the information to the effect that the random number is acquired is transmitted as the information to be transmitted to the sub main control unit SM in step 1310 and step 1320, but the information of the random number and the main game symbol The number of reservations may be attached and transmitted, or it may be substituted as information to the effect that random numbers have been acquired using these information.

  Next, FIG. 8 is a flow chart of the main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. First, at step 1401, the CPU MC of the main control board M checks whether or not there is a hold of the second main game symbol. If Yes in step 1401, in step 1400 (1), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a first main game symbol display process described later, and shifts to the next process {the process of step 1600}. On the other hand, if No in step 1401, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a second main gaming symbol display process described later in step 1400 (2), and shifts to the next process {process of step 1600}.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, when there is a holding ball of the second main game symbol, regardless of the presence of the holding ball of the first main game symbol (even if the winning sequence is the first main game symbol) Even in the case of the first main game symbol, the second main game symbol is configured to be prioritized and executed, but the present invention is not limited thereto (the first main game symbol may be prioritized, It may be configured to execute a reserve process based on the winning order and a parallel lottery in which both main gaming symbols are drawn simultaneously and in parallel).

  Next, FIG. 9 is a flowchart of a first main game symbol display process (second main game symbol display process) according to a subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} in FIG. In addition, since this processing is substantially the same processing on the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described, and the processing on the second main game symbol side will be described. Write in parentheses. First, in step 1403, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. Here, the change start condition is not during special game (or during operation of the condition device), and is not during main game symbol fluctuation, and there is a condition that there is a hold of the main game symbol. In addition, although not illustrated in this example, when the fluctuation fixed time (time to stop and display the finalized display symbol after the final display of the main gaming symbol) is provided, the fluctuation start condition of the next fluctuation during the fluctuation fixed time May not be satisfied.

  In the case of Yes in step 1403, the CPUMC of the main control board M is temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M in step 1405 and step 1406, and the first main game content determination random number related to symbol variation this time ( The second main game content determination random number) is read, and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) is deleted, and the remaining information temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M is Shift (pending digest). Next, in step 1408, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a main gaming symbol lottery based on the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (in particular, the winning lottery random number).

  Here, FIG. 10 (main game table 1) is an example of a first main game use lottery table (second main game use lottery table). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the jackpot winning probability in the probability variation gaming state is configured to be higher than the jackpot probability in the non-probability variation gaming state. The winning probability is merely an example, and is not limited to this. In the present embodiment, although the small hit is not provided, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first main game side and / or the second main game side may be provided with the small hit.

  Next, in step 1410, the CPUMC of the main control board M is a main game based on the main gaming symbol equality lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (especially, symbol lottery random number) The stop symbols relating to the symbols are determined, and these are temporarily stored in the RAM area.

  Here, FIG. 10 (main game table 2) is an example of a first main game stop symbol determination lottery table (second main game stop symbol determination lottery table). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, when a big hit is won, from among a plurality of main game symbol candidates (in this example, "2A, 3A, 5A, 7A" and "2B, 7B") One main game symbol is configured to be determined as a big hit symbol. In addition, the number of rounds of the special game determined with reference to the main game symbol is 2R: 2R, 2B: 4R, 3A, 5A, 7A: 8R, 7B: 16R. That is, the number of rounds executed during the big hit is relatively larger in the big hit of the second main game side than the big hit of the first main game side. The random number value and the type of stop symbol are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the lost symbol is not limited to one type of symbol, and a plurality of types of symbols may be provided. May}.

  Next, in step 1411-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the limitation frequency flag is off (whether the limitation frequency A flag or the limitation frequency B flag is off). Do. In the case of Yes in step 1411-1, in step 1412, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the main gaming symbol acceptance lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) The variation mode of the main game symbols is determined based on the random number), and these are temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, and the process proceeds to step 1418.

  Here, FIG. 10 (main game table 3) is an example of a first main game variation mode determination lottery table (second main game variation mode determination lottery table). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the variation mode (variation time) of the main gaming symbol is determined based on the result of the lottery result of the main gaming symbol. That is, in the case where the lottery result of the main gaming symbol is a hit, it is configured that the fluctuation mode in which the fluctuation time is relatively long is easily determined. In addition, this example is an example to the last, and it is not limited at all by the kind of a stop symbol, selection rate, etc. Further, in the present embodiment, for convenience of explanation, the main gaming table 3 is not configured to have different tables according to the number of holding balls, but is configured to have different tables according to the number of holding balls It goes without saying that it is also good. Furthermore, the symbol variation time of the first main game may be relatively long in the time reduction gaming state (when the main game time short flag is on) {the symbol on the second main game When it is configured that it is advantageous for the player to execute the fluctuation, it is easy to cause the second main gaming side to hold by lowering the symbol fluctuation efficiency of the first main gaming side (it is advantageous for the player In order to construct a situation, it is particularly effective when the starting opening on the first main game side and the starting opening on the second main game side can not be separated.

  On the other hand, if No in step 1411-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1411-2 whether the limit frequency A flag is on. If Yes in step 1411-2, in step 1450, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes limited frequency A fluctuation mode determination processing described later, and proceeds to step 1418. In the case of No at step 1411-2, that is, when the limitation frequency B flag is on, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes limitation frequency B variation mode determination processing to be described later at step 1500, and step 1418. Migrate to

  Next, in step 1418, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a command (stop symbol information, stop symbol attribute information, fluctuation mode information, etc.) related to the main gaming symbol temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control substrate M Set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting the command (symbol variation display start instruction command) related to the current gaming state to the sub main control unit SM side (the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing of step 1999) Sent to). Next, in step 1420, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined time relating to the fluctuation time of the main gaming symbol to the first and second main gaming symbol fluctuation management timer MP11t-C. Next, in step 1422, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the first main game symbol display area A21g (second main game symbol display area) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). In B21g), according to the fluctuation mode temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M, the fluctuation display of the main game symbol is started. Next, in step 1424, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the fluctuation flag and shifts to step 1428.

  On the other hand, if No in step 1403, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1426 whether the in-fluctuating flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1426, the process proceeds to step 1428, and in the case of No in step 1426, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1600).

  Next, in step 1428, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not a predetermined time related to the fluctuation time of the main gaming symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1428, in step 1430, the CPU MC of the main control board M transmits a command to transmit information (design confirmation display instruction command) indicating that design variation is finished to the sub main control unit SM side The buffer MT10 is set (sent to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999). Next, in step 1432, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the first main game symbol display area A21g (second main game symbol display area) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). B21g) Stop the fluctuation display of the main game symbol on, and control the display of the stop symbol temporarily stored in the RAM area of the main control board M as the fixed stop symbol. Next, at step 1434, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the in-fluctuation flag.

  Next, in step 1436, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a big hit symbol. If Yes in step 1436, in step 1438, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the condition device activation flag, and proceeds to step 1550. On the other hand, also in the case of No at step 1436, the process proceeds to step 1550.

  Next, in step 1550, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a specific game end determination process described later, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1600). Also in the case of No at step 1428, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1600).

  Next, FIG. 11 is a flowchart of limited frequency A fluctuation mode determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1450 in FIG. 9 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1452, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the variation mode (variation time) regarding the main gaming symbol with reference to the limited frequency table 1 based on the random number on the main gaming side and the lottery result. Next, in step 1454, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a limited frequency A command (a command to the side of the sub control board S and a command relating to the variation time regarding the determined main game symbol) (step 1999) It is transmitted to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing). Next, in step 1456, the CPU MC of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the counter value of the limited frequency A counter MN 52c-1. Next, in step 1458, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the counter value of the limit frequency A counter MN 52c-1 is zero. If Yes in step 1458, in step 1460, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the limit frequency A flag, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1418). Also in the case of No in step 1458, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1418).

  Next, FIG. 12 is a flowchart of limited frequency B fluctuation mode determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. 9 in the present embodiment. First, in step 1502, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the counter value G of the limit frequency B counter MN 52c-2 within the first step range (the limit frequency which becomes the first step in the limit frequency state having three steps) It is determined whether or not the counter value of the B counter MN 52c-2 is within the range of 100 、 G> 90). In the case of Yes in step 1502, the CPUMC of the main control board M in step 1504 refers to the limited frequency table 1 based on the random number on the main game side and the lottery result, and the variation mode (variation time) regarding the main gaming symbol And go to step 1512.

  On the other hand, if No in step 1502, in step 1506, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the counter value G of the limited frequency B counter MN 52c-2 within the second stage range (in the limited frequency state having three stages It is determined whether or not it is within the range of the counter value of the limited frequency B counter MN 52c-2 which is the second step, and 90 ≧ G> 1). In the case of Yes in step 1506, the CPUMC of the main control board M in step 1508 refers to the limited frequency table 2 based on the random number on the main game side and the lottery result, and the variation mode (variation time) regarding the main game symbol And go to step 1512. On the other hand, if No in step 1506, in other words, the limit frequency B counter MN 52c-2 has a counter value G within the third step range (the limit frequency B counter which becomes the third step in the limit frequency state having three steps). If it is within the range of the MN 52c-2 counter value and G = 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M at step 1510 limits the frequency based on the random number on the main game side, the result of the lottery result, the number of reservations. The variation mode (variation time) relating to the main game symbol is determined with reference to Table 3, and the process shifts to 1512.

  Next, in step 1512, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a limited frequency B command {a command to the side of the sub control board S, and a command relating to a variation aspect (variation time) regarding the determined main In step 1514, the CPUMC of the main control board M subtracts one from the counter value of the limited frequency B counter MN 52c-2 in step 1514. , And proceeds to the process of step 1516. Next, at step 1516, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the counter value of the limited frequency B counter MN 52c-2 is zero. If Yes in step 1516, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the limitation frequency B flag in step 1518, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1418). Also in the case of No at step 1516, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1418). As described above, in the present embodiment, the limited frequency state is divided into two types (the limited frequency A state in which the counter value of the limited frequency A counter MN52c-1 is decremented and the counter values of the limited frequency B counter MN52c-2 are subtracted). Limit frequency B)).

  Next, FIG. 13 is an example of the limited frequency tables 1 to 3. First, to describe the limit frequency table 1 in detail, in the present embodiment, when the counter value G of the limit frequency B counter MN 52 c-2 is a value within a predetermined range (100GG> 90), or the limit frequency A When the counter value of the counter MN52c-1 is larger than 0, the limit frequency table 1 is referred to. The tables referred to on the first main game side and the second main game side have the same contents. Moreover, the fluctuation time at the time of hitting is relatively longer than the fluctuation time at the time of losing. In addition, as compared with the limited frequency table 2 and the limited frequency table 3, the limited frequency table 1 is configured to have the shortest average fluctuation time. Further, in the limited frequency table 1, the same table is referred to regardless of the number of holding balls. Further, in the present embodiment, in the state of referring to the limited frequency table 1, the limited frequency table 2 or the limited frequency table 3, that is, in the limited frequency A state or the limited frequency B state, the time reduction gaming state The second main game symbol is changed and the game proceeds mainly (the hold on the second main game side is prioritized and digested). Further, the description of the number of reservations in the same figure is the number of reservations on the first main game side in the table referred to when determining the variation mode of the first main game side, and the variation mode of the second main game side In the table referred to when deciding, it is the number of reservations on the second main game side.

  Next, the limitation frequency table 2 will be described in detail. In the present embodiment, the limitation frequency table is used when the counter value G of the limitation frequency B counter MN 52c-2 is a value within a predetermined range (90 ≧ G> 1). 2 is referred to. The tables referred to on the first main game side and the second main game side have the same contents. In addition, the fluctuation time at the time of hitting is relatively longer than the fluctuation time at the time of losing (a table with a long fluctuation time is easily selected). In addition, as compared with the limited frequency table 1 and the limited frequency table 3, the limited frequency table 2 is configured to have the longest average fluctuation time. Further, in the limited frequency table 2, the average fluctuation time at the time of losing is shorter in the case where two or three balls are present compared with the case where there are 0 or 1 balls.

  Next, the limitation frequency table 3 will be described in detail. In the present embodiment, the limitation frequency table 3 is referred to when the counter value G of the limitation frequency counter MN 52c-2 is in a predetermined range (G = 1). The tables referred to on the first main game side and the second main game side have the same contents. Further, only one type of fluctuation time can be selected in the limited frequency table 3 and, as a result of the success or failure lottery, it is constant regardless of the number of holding balls.

  The contents of the limited frequency table are not limited to this, and the contents of the limited frequency table to be referred to on the first main game side and the second main game side are only at a predetermined stage (for example, the first stage). It may be configured to be identical. Further, in a predetermined stage (for example, the third stage), the variation mode may be determined regardless of the number of reservations (both on the first main gaming side and the second main gaming side). When not configured as such, the first main game side selects the variation mode from the same table regardless of the number of reservations, and the second main game side holds the number of reservations if the number of reservations is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. It is desirable to configure so as to have a relatively shorter fluctuation time than when the number is less than a predetermined number.

  In this embodiment, the limitation frequency table has three types and is configured to be switched in three steps in the order of “limit frequency table 1 → limitation frequency table 2 → limitation frequency table 3” (so-called three-step ST) There is no problem even if the order of the tables to be referred to is changed, regardless of the type of the limited frequency table. Furthermore, there are two tables of limitation frequency table 1 and limitation frequency table 2, and the table to be referred is switched in the order of limitation frequency table 1 → limitation frequency table 2 → limitation frequency table 1 as a three-step ST mode It is also good.

In the present embodiment, the configuration of the limited frequency may be configured as follows.
(1) In the case of determining the fluctuation time of the first main game symbol in the limited frequency state (limited frequency A state or limited frequency B state) (the first main game symbol fluctuates), the first main game side The content of the limited frequency table 2 related to the first main game symbol is the first main game regardless of the number of holdings, that is, even when determining the variation time of the first main game symbol with reference to the limited frequency table 2 It is configured not to depend on the number of reservations on the side (for example, regardless of the number of reservations on the first main game side, refer to the table in the case where the number of reservations of limited frequency table 2 in FIG. 13 is 0 or 1). Will be
(2) In the limited frequency table 1 as well as the limited frequency table 2, the contents of the table to be referred to may differ depending on the number of reservations (number of reservations on the second main game side).
(3) When shifting to the limit frequency B state, the limit frequency table to be first referred to may be the limit frequency table 2.
(4) For the part where the same time value is obtained in the table referred to in the case of hit and the table referred to in the case of loss in FIG. For example, with regard to the limited frequency table 3, 5 seconds is selected for both the hit case and the loss case, but for the limited frequency table 3, 6 cases are selected for the hit case. It may be configured to be seconds, and in the case of a loss, to be 5 seconds. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to secure time for notifying the player that it is a hit.
(5) The period for referring to the limited frequency table 3 may be a plurality of variations (preferably less than 10 variations). For example, when the limited frequency counter value is 1 to 5, the limited frequency table 3 is referred to You may
(6) Each table in the figure (all tables referred to in the case of limited frequency tables 1 to 3, hit time, lost time, hold 0 to 1, hold 2 to 3, 16 The variation time candidate may be incremented one by one for any of the tables, for example, all the tables may be configured to have two or more variation time candidates. In such a configuration, a time value twice as long as the longest time value of each table may be added as an example of the time value to be added, and the random value range in that case is the longest value. The random value range of the time value which becomes may be halved. For example, when changing the table contents at the time of the loss of the second main game side in the limited frequency table 1, "random number 0 to 799 → 1 second", "random number 800 to 911 → 3 seconds", "random number "912-1023-> 6 seconds" may be configured.

In addition, in a configuration in which the limited frequency table (limited frequency state) to be referred to in the probability variation gaming state (or time shortening gaming state) transitions, the limited frequency X state for referencing the limited frequency table X and the limited frequency table Y In the case of limited frequency Y state to refer to
(1) In the limited frequency Y state, the average value of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation that causes loss when the number of reservations is the first number of reservations (for example, 0), and the number of second holdings (for example, 3) The average value difference of a predetermined period arises with the average value of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation which becomes a loss in the case of.
(2) In the limited frequency X state, the average value of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation that causes loss when the number of reservations is the first number of reservations (for example, 0), and the number of second holdings (for example, 3) The average value difference of the predetermined period does not occur with the average value of the variation time of the symbol variation which is a loss in the case of
(3) The second selection number (for example, three) in the limit frequency Y state is the most selected, rather than the variation time that causes the second selection number (for example, three) in the limit frequency X state to be the most easily selected loss The fluctuation time that is likely to be lost is longer than the fluctuation time.
(4) The limited frequency Y state stays for a longer period (number of fluctuations) than the limited frequency X state.
(5) The specific effect that can be displayed in the limited frequency Y state is not displayed in the limited frequency X state.
(6) If it is in the time shortening gaming state, the pre-reading effect concerning the first main game side is not displayed.
(7) Although there are a plurality of effect display formats (stay stages) in the limited frequency Y state, there is only one effect display format (stay stage) in the limit frequency X state.
(8) The effect display format (stay stage) in the limited frequency Y state and the effect display format (stay stage) in the limited frequency X state are different in type.
It may be configured as Also, a plurality of these configurations may be combined or only one may be applied. In each limited frequency state, it is sufficient to stay for a period in which one or more symbol variations are executed (at least a period in which one symbol variation is executed). Further, as a modification, the limit frequency X state may be set as a state in which the limit frequency table 1 in FIG. 13 is referred to, and the limit frequency Y state may be set as a state in which the limit frequency table 2 in FIG. The X state may refer to the limit frequency table 1 in FIG. 13 and the limit frequency Y state may refer to the limit frequency table 3 in FIG. 13. Alternatively, the limit frequency X state may refer to the limit frequency table in FIG. State 2 may be referred to, and the state of limited frequency Y may be referred to as the state of referring to the limited frequency table 3 in FIG.

  Next, FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1550 in FIG. First, at step 1552, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main game probability change flag is off. If Yes in step 1552, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1570 whether the count value of the time saving number counter MP52c is larger than zero. If Yes in step 1570, in step 1572 the CPU MC of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the value of the counter MP52c. Next, at step 1574, the CPU MC of the main control board M refers to the time reduction number counter MP52c, and determines whether the counter value is zero or not. If Yes in step 1574, in step 1576, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game time short flag. Next, in step 1578, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the auxiliary game time short flag, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1600). Also in the case of No in step 1552, step 1570 or step 1574, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1600).

  Next, FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the special game operating condition determination process according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. First, in step 1602, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the condition device operation flag is on. If Yes in step 1602, in step 1604, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the specific game flag (main game probability change flag, main game time short flag, auxiliary game time short flag). Next, in step 1606, the CPU MC of the main control board M clears the value of the time saving number counter MP52c to zero. Next, in step 1608, the CPU MC of the main control board M clears the counter values of the limit frequency A counter MN52c-1 and the limit frequency B counter MN52c-2 to zero. Next, in step 1610, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the limit frequency A flag and the limit frequency B flag. Next, in step 1612, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the special game shift permission flag. Next, in step 1614, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the condition device operation flag, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1700). Also in the case of No in step 1602, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1700).

  Next, FIG. 16 is a flowchart of special game control processing according to the subroutine of step 1700 in FIG. First, in step 1702, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the special game transition permission flag is on. If Yes in step 1702, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the special game transition permission flag and turns on the special game execution flag in step 1704 and step 1706. Next, in step 1707, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets an initial value (1 in this example) to a round number counter (not shown). Next, in step 1708, the CPUMC of the main control board M sends a command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting information (special game start display instruction command) to start the special game to the sub main control unit SM side. It is set (sent to the sub main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process of step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1711.

  On the other hand, if No in step 1702, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1710 whether the special game execution flag is on. Then, in the case of Yes in step 1710, the process proceeds to step 1711. In the case of No at step 1710, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the permission for the special game is not received, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1997).

  Next, in step 1711, the CPUMC of the main control board M is a round currently being executed which is a round for sorting game execution round (a second large winning opening C20 having a specific area C22 is to be opened, this example Then, it is determined whether it is the second round). In the case of Yes in step 1711, in step 1800, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes an allotment game execution process described later, and proceeds to step 1734. On the other hand, if No in step 1711, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1712 whether or not the round continuation flag is off, in other words, whether or not it is just before the start of each round. If Yes in step 1712, that is, immediately before the start of each round, first, in step 1714, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets an open pattern (for example, an open pattern that continues open, a pattern that opens and closes). Do. Next, at step 1716, the CPU MC of the main control board M clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c to zero. Next, in step 1718, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the round continuation flag. Next, in step 1720, the CPUMC of the main control board M drives the first large winning opening electric combination C11d (or the second large combination opening electric combination C21d) of the first large winning opening C10 to make the first large. The winning opening C10 (or the second big winning opening C20) is opened, a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) is set to the special game timer MP34t (especially the opening time timer), and the process proceeds to step 1722. On the other hand, if No in step 1712, that is, if the special winning opening is open, the process proceeds to step 1722 without performing the processing of steps 1714 to 1720.

  Next, in step 1722, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits a game state command (for example, the current number of rounds, the number of winning game balls, etc.) related to the current special game to the sub main control unit SM side. The command transmission buffer MT10 is set (to be transmitted to the sub main control unit SM side in the control command transmission processing of step 1999). Next, in step 1724, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the first large winning opening C10 (or the second large winning opening C20) in the round. It is determined whether or not there is a winning ball of the ball). In the case of Yes in step 1724, the process proceeds to step 1728. On the other hand, if No in step 1724, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the special game timer MP34t (in particular, the open time timer) in step 1726 for a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) related to opening of the special winning opening. It is determined whether has passed. Also in the case of Yes in step 1726, the process proceeds to step 1728. In the case of No at step 1726, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1997).

  Next, in step 1728, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the first large winning opening motorized combination C11d of the first large winning opening C10 (or the second large winning opening electric combination C21d of the second large winning opening C20). And stop the first large winning opening C10 (or the second large winning opening C20). Next, at step 1730, the CPU MC of the main control board M resets the special game timer MP34t (in particular, the open time timer). Next, in step 1732, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the round continuation flag. Next, in step 1733, the CPU MC of the main control board M adds 1 to the counter value of the round number counter (not shown), and proceeds to step 1734. Next, in step 1734, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the final round has ended (for example, whether the counter value of the round number counter (not shown) exceeds the maximum round number). . If Yes in step 1734, in step 1736, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the special game execution flag. Next, at step 1738, the CPU MC of the main control board M sends a command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting information (special game end display instruction command) to the effect of ending the special game to the sub main control unit SM side. It is set (sent to the sub main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process of step 1999). Then, in step 1750, the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a game state determination process after the end of the special game described later, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1997). Also in the case of No at step 1734, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1997).

  Next, FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process according to the subroutine of step 1800 in FIG. 16 in the present embodiment. First, at step 1802, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the distribution game underway flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1802, the process moves to step 1816. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1802, in step 1804, the CPUMC of the main control board M has stopped the main game symbol having a long opening symbol (the second big winning opening C20 is relatively long in the sorting game execution round) It is determined whether the time is open, that is, it is a big hit design in which the game ball easily enters the specific area C22, and in this example, it is 3A, 5A, 7A, 7B). In the case of Yes in step 1804, in step 1806, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a long open pattern (for example, open for 15 seconds) as an open pattern of the second big winning opening C20 having the specific area C22 Then, an open pattern (designed to make entering the specific area C22 substantially definite) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1810. On the other hand, if No in step 1804, in other words if the stop symbol is "2A" or "2B", in step 1808, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the second large winning opening C20 having the specific area C22. As a pattern, a short opening pattern (for example, an opening pattern for 0.1 second and designed so that a non-entering ball into the specific area C22 is approximately deterministic) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1810. In the present embodiment, the first main game side long opening symbol is "3A, 5A, 7A", and the ratio to be selected at the time of big hit is "524/1024", and the second main The long opening symbol on the game side is "7B", and the ratio to be selected at the big hit is "774/1024", so the big hit of the second main game side than the big hit of the first main game side The proportion of the second large winning opening C20 being long open in the distribution game execution round is high, that is, the game ball is configured to easily enter the specific area C22 at the time of a big hit. In the case of a gaming machine (sometimes referred to as a ST machine) whose probability fluctuation gaming state ends by ending the predetermined number of symbol changes after the big hit ends, the jackpot symbol on the second main game side is You may be comprised so that it may be set as all long open design. In addition, the number of execution rounds of the big hit which is executed by the fact that “3A, 5A, 7A” which is the long opening design of the 1st main game side stops is “8R”, with the long opening design of the 2nd main game side The number of jackpot execution rounds executed by stopping "7B" is "16R", and the number of execution rounds is different. In addition, the number of big hit execution rounds executed by stopping "2A" which is a short opening symbol of the first main game side is "2R", and "2B" which is a short opening symbol of the second main game side The number of big hit execution rounds executed by stopping “4R” is “4 R”, and the number of execution rounds is different.

  Next, at step 1810, the CPU MC of the main control board M clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c. Next, in step 1812, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the distribution game execution flag. Next, in step 1814, the CPU MC of the main control board M opens the second large winning opening C20 with the set open pattern, and proceeds to step 1816.

  Next, in step 1816, the CPUMC of the main control board M confirms the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and a predetermined number (10 in this example) of gaming balls are won in the second large winning opening C20. Determine if If Yes in step 1816, then the process moves to step 1820. On the other hand, if No in step 1816, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1818 whether the opening period (set opening pattern) of the second large winning opening C20 is ended. If Yes in step 1818, then the process moves to step 1820. Next, in step 1820, the CPU MC of the main control board M closes the second large winning opening C20. Next, at step 1822, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the distribution game execution flag. Next, in step 1824, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the game ball has entered the specific area C22 in the execution round of the distribution game. If Yes in step 1824, in step 1826, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on a main game probability transition shift reservation flag. Next, in step 1827, the CPUMC of the main control board M performs sub main control of a specific area entry command (a command to the side of the sub control board S and a command to the effect that the gaming ball has entered the specific area C22). The command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the part SM side is set (sent to the sub main control part SM side by the control command transmission processing of step 1999), and the process shifts to step 1828. Also in the case of No at step 1824, the process proceeds to step 1828. Next, in step 1828, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 (increment) to the counter value of the round number counter (not shown) (ends the sorting game execution round), and the next process (step 1734) Move to Also in the case of No at step 1818, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1734).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the second large winning opening C20 has the specific area C22, and the game ball enters the specific area C22 during the big hit to shift to the probability fluctuation gaming state after the big hit ends. Even in such a game machine, the ease of entering the specific area C22 is configured to be different depending on the jackpot symbol.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot winning in the probability variation gaming state continues a predetermined number of times, a gaming machine (referred to as a limiter machine to shift to the non-probability variation gaming state after the predetermined number of big hits end The game machine may be a game machine (a so-called fall lottery machine) that executes a lottery for shifting to the non-variation non-probability fluctuation gaming state in the probability fluctuation gaming state.

A configuration example applicable to the present embodiment will be exemplified below.
(1) The expected value of the number of prize balls in the big hit of the second main game side is larger than the expected value of the number of prize balls in the big hit of the first main game side.
(2) The ratio of the long opening big hit in the big hit of the second main game side (a big hit easy to enter the specific area C22 in the distribution game execution round) is greater than the ratio of the long open big hit in the big hit of the first main game side high.
(3) The fluctuation pattern table to be referred to after the big hit is different depending on whether or not the specific area C22 is made to enter during the big hit.
(4) The transition mode of the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to after the big hit differs depending on whether or not the specific area C22 is entered during the big hit (for example, big hit A: 20 change, table 1 → 30 change, table 2, big hit B: 50 fluctuations, Table 3).
(5) Depending on whether or not the specific area C22 is to be entered during the big hit, whether or not to be in the probability variation gaming state after the big hit is different.
(6) Regardless of whether or not the specific area C22 is to be hit during the big hit, transition to the time-saving gaming state after the big hit ends.
(7) A stay stage after the big hit differs depending on whether or not the specific area C22 is made to enter during the big hit.
(8) The fluctuation tendency of the final fluctuation of the time-saving gaming state after the big hit is different depending on whether or not the specific area C22 is entered during the big hit (average value of fluctuation time, presentation mode, shortest fluctuation that can be selected) time).
(9) The game machine is configured to be able to end the probability variation gaming state by the number of times of symbol variation from the end of the big hit (so-called ST machine), and always shifts to the probability variation gaming state after the big hit of the second main game side (A case may be provided where the game does not shift to the probability variation gaming state after the big hit of the first main game side ends).
(10) Configure the game machine in which the probability change gaming state is not ended by the number of times of symbol change from the end of the big hit, and after the big hit end of the first main game side also after the big hit of the second main game side There is a case to shift or a case not to shift (after the big hit end of the second main game side it is easier to shift to the probability fluctuation gaming state after the big hit end than after the big hit end of the first main game side, ie, second The main game side's jackpot is likely to be a big hit easier to enter the specified area C22 in the distribution game execution round during the big hit than the first main game side's big hit).
In addition, since the above configuration is configured to shift to the probability change gaming state after the big hit by entering the specific area C22 in the distribution game execution round during the big hit, it shifts to the probability change gaming state Perform = hit a specific area C22 during a big hit, do not shift to the probability variation gaming state = not enter a specific area C22 during a big hit.

  Next, FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1750 in FIG. First, in step 1752, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main game probability change shift reservation flag is on. If Yes in step 1752, in step 1754, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game probability transition shift reservation flag. Next, in step 1755, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on a main game probability change flag. Next, in step 1756, the CPUMC of the main control board M has a predetermined value C (65536 in this example) for the time reduction counter MP52c, and it is substantially short to continue until the next big hit. It is the number of times and よ い times may be set), and the process moves to step 1776.

  On the other hand, if No in step 1752, in step 1758, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not it is after the end of the big hit pertaining to the second main game side. If YES in step 1758, in step 1760, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value B (100 in this example) in the time reduction counter MP52c, and proceeds to step 1776. On the other hand, if No in step 1758, that is, after the big hit end pertaining to the first main game side, in step 1762 whether the CPUMC of the main control board M is after the big hit end pertaining to the short opening symbol It is determined whether or not. If YES in step 1762, the CPUMC of the main control board M in step 1764 sets the time reduction counter MP 52 c to a predetermined value A (a value smaller than the predetermined value B and the predetermined value C described above; in this example, 10) Set Next, in step 1766, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the limit frequency A flag. Next, in step 1768, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value A (10 in this example) in the limited frequency A counter MN 52c-1 and shifts to step 1776. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1762, at step 1770, a predetermined value B (100 in this example) is set to the time reduction number counter MP 52 c. Next, in step 1772, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the limit frequency B flag. Next, in step 1774, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value B (100 in this example) in the limited frequency B counter MN 52c-2 and shifts to step 1776.

  Next, in step 1776, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on a main game time short flag. Next, in step 1778, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game time short flag, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1997). Thus, in the present embodiment, when the game does not shift to the probability variation gaming state after the big hit ends, in other words, when the game ball does not enter the specific area C22 during the big hit, the second main game side After the big hit ends, the time saving gaming state is shifted to all, and a relatively large number of short times (100 times in this example) are given. On the other hand, after the big hit of the first main game side, it will shift to the time shortening gaming state all after the big hit end, but the number of times that can be granted is relatively large (100 in this example) And two relatively short time counts (10 times in this example). In addition, when it does not shift to probability fluctuation game state after the big hit of the 1st main game side, limit frequency A state (when limit frequency A flag is on may be called limit frequency A state) or limitation It is configured to shift to a frequency B state (a case where the limit frequency B flag is on may be referred to as a limit frequency B state). That is, when entering the non-probability fluctuation gaming state after the big hit end without entering the specific area C22 in the first main game big hit, and entering the specific area C22 in the second main game big hit In the case of transitioning to the non-probability fluctuation gaming state after the big hit without the big hit, it is different whether or not to shift to the limited frequency state (the selection tendency of the fluctuation mode is different).

Also, it may be configured as follows.
(1) Regardless of whether or not the gaming state in which the special game is won is the time shortening gaming state, if the special game is a special game on the second main game side, the number of time saving times is 100 times.
(2) In the case of winning the special game on the first main game side in the time saving game state, the time reduction count is 100 times, while on the other hand in the case of winning the special game on the first main game side in the non-time reducing game state On the basis of the jackpot symbol pertaining to the special game, the time reduction will be either 60 times, 80 times, 100 times.
(3) Time Reduction When a special game is won in the gaming state, the number of time saving becomes 100 times regardless of the jackpot symbol.
(4) The time reduction average value when the special game of the first main game is won in the time reduction game state is the time reduction number of when the special game of the second main game is won in the time reduction game state Greater than average. In such a configuration, the second main game side is the priority digest, "expected value of the number of winning balls obtained by the jackpot of the first main game side <expected value of the number of winning balls obtained by the jackpot of the second main game side In the case of being configured to become “1”, it is possible to compensate for the disadvantage in the case of winning the jackpot of the first main game side in the time-saving gaming state. In addition, in a gaming machine (so-called ball game machine) that becomes a probability variation gaming state after the big hit ends by the game ball entering a specific area C22 in the big winning opening during a big hit, the "first main game side If the ratio of long open big hit <% of the second main game side long open big hit, it wins the short open big hit, and enters the game ball to the specific area C22 during the short open big hit. The number of time-savings in the case where there is no ball may be relatively greater for the first main game's short open jackpot than for the second main game's short open jackpot. In addition, the first main game side is won by the big open jackpot, and when there is no entry of the game ball to the specific area C22 during the long open big hit, the number of shorting times is shorter open of the second main game side It may be configured to be larger than the number of time saving times when there is no game ball entering the specific area C22 during the short opening big hit. In addition, the first main game side's short opening is achieved if the second main game's long open jackpot is won and there is no game ball entering the specific area C22 during the long open big hit. It may be configured to be larger than the number of time saving times when there is no game ball entering the specific area C22 during the short opening big hit. In addition, the long opening big hit is a big winning opening in the distribution game execution round in big hit (transition to probability fluctuation gaming state after the big hit end by the game ball entering the specific area C22 during the round execution) Is a big hit that makes it easy to enter the specific area C22 by opening for a relatively long time, and a short open big hit is a sorting game execution round in the big hit (the game ball is in the specific area C22 during the round execution) It is a big hit that it is difficult to enter the specific area C22 by opening the big winning opening relatively for a short time in the transition to the probability fluctuation gaming state after the big hit by entering the ball).
(5) If there is a ball entering the specific area C22 during execution of the special game, transition to the probability variation gaming state and time shortening gaming state after the special game is over, and transition to the limited frequency B state, The time saving number counter MP52c is set 100 times, and the limited frequency counter (limited frequency B counter) is set 100 times. On the other hand, if there is no entry into the specific area C22 during the execution of the special game, transition to the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and time shortening gaming state after special game ending, and transition to the limited frequency A state, The time saving number counter MP52c is set 100 times, and the limited frequency counter (limited frequency A counter) is set 100 times.

  Next, control processing executed on the side of the sub main control unit SM will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 19 is a main flowchart of the sub control board S side (in particular, the sub main control unit SM side) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. Here, the process of FIG. 6A is a process on the side of the sub main control unit SM which is executed after resetting such as when the power is turned on to the gaming machine. That is, when power is supplied to the gaming machine, in step 2002, the CPUSC of the sub main control unit SM executes an initial process based on the information received from the main side (the main control board M side) (for example, RAM clear) When information is received → The sub-side RAM is initialized. When various information commands are received → presentation related information at the time of power interruption is reset to the sub-side RAM). Thereafter, the process shifts to loop processing in which (b), which is the repetitive processing routine of the sub main control unit SM, is repeatedly executed. Here, when (b) is executed, as shown in the process of (b) in the figure, first, at step 2100, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a suspension information management process described later. Next, in step 2300, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a decorative symbol display content determination process described later. Next, in step 2400, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a decorative symbol display control process described later. Next, in step 2500, the CPUSC of the secondary control board S executes special game related display control processing described later. Next, in step 2600, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a stay stage determination process described later. Next, in step 2999, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes display command transmission control processing (sends the commands set by these series of subroutines to the sub sub control unit SS side), and ends this repetitive processing routine. Do.

  As described above, the sub main control unit SM employs a mode in which the sub main routine (S2100 to S2999) is loop-processed after being reset. Further, the process of FIG. 6C is an interrupt process of the sub main control unit SM, and the signal from the STB signal line in the main control board M described above is one terminal of the CPU of the sub main control unit SM (in this example , NMI terminal) is the processing flow (c) when it is connected. That is, when an NMI interrupt occurs in the sub main control unit SM (when the STB signal line is turned on), in step 2004, the CPUSC of the sub control board S receives a command input port from the main control board M (described above Check the input port of the data signal line). Then, in step 2006, the CPUSC of the sub control board S temporarily stores the command transmitted from the main control board M side in the RAM area on the sub main control unit SM side based on the confirmation result, and immediately before this interrupt processing. Return to the process that was being executed.

  Next, FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the pending information management process according to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. First, in step 2102, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a new hold generation command (hold information relating to the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol) has been received from the main control board M side. Do. If Yes in step 2102, in step 2104, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a rendering hold counter (in this example, a maximum of four for the first main game and a maximum of four for the second main game). Add 1 (increment). Next, in step 2106, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is a hold information (in particular, a random number value related to the main game symbol lottery based on the hold generation command transmitted from the main control board M side). The random number / pattern lottery random number / variation mode lottery random number) is temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub control board S, and the process shifts to step 2116.

  On the other hand, if No in step 2102, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the symbol variation display start instruction command has been received from the main control board M side in step 2108. If Yes in step 2108, in step 2110, the CPUSC of the sub control board S subtracts (decrements) “1” from the coating reservation counter. Next, in step 2112, the CPUSC of the sub control board S deletes the suspension information (random number value) related to the symbol variation from the suspension information temporary storage area, and shifts the remaining suspension information. Next, in step 2114, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the symbol content determination permission flag, and proceeds to step 2116. In the case of No at step 2108, the process proceeds to step 2116 without executing the processing of step 2110 to step 2114. Next, in step 2116, the CPUSC of the sub control board S holds on the effect display device SG (in particular, the first hold display unit SG12, the second hold display unit SG13) the same number of hold display lamps as the drawing hold counter value. Is lighted and displayed, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300).

  Next, FIG. 21 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2300 in FIG. First, in step 2302, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the symbol content determination permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2302, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the symbol content determination permission flag in step 2304. Next, in step 2306, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S stops the stop symbol of the decorative symbol {eg, when the stop symbol relating to the main game symbol is a big hit symbol, the sloppy eyes such as "7 · 7 · 7" In the case of the lost design, it is determined temporarily and the variation mode such as "1 3 5" etc., and temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub control board S. Next, in step 2308, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the symbol content determination flag, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2400). Also in the case of No in step 2302, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2400).

  Next, FIG. 22 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. First, in step 2402, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the symbol content determination flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2402, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the symbol content determination flag in step 2404. Next, in step 2406, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on a symbol variation flag. Next, in step 2408, the CPU SC of the sub control board S starts the drawing variation time management timer SM 21t, and shifts to step 2410. Also in the case of No at step 2402, the process proceeds to step 2410.

  Next, in step 2410, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the symbol variation flag is on. If Yes in step 2410, the CPUSC of the sub control board S confirms the timer value of the drawing fluctuation time management timer SM 21t in step 2412. Next, in step 2414, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the variation start timing of the decorative symbol has been reached. If Yes in step 2414, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the variation display command of the decorative symbol in step 2416 (sent to the sub sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control processing of step 2999). , And move on to step 2426.

  On the other hand, if No in step 2414, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines in step 2418 whether or not the stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) of the decorative symbol has been reached. If Yes in step 2418, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a stop display command (temporary stop display command) of the decorative symbol in step 2420 (in the display command transmission control process of step 2999, the sub sub control unit SS side) And the process proceeds to step 2426.

  On the other hand, if No in step 2418, has the CPUSC of the sub control board S reached the display timing of the notice image or the reach image in step 2422 based on the variation mode temporarily stored in the RAM area of the sub control board S? It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2422, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets an image display command related to the notice image or the reach image in step 2424 (in the display command transmission control process of step 2999, to the sub sub control unit SS side). Sent) and proceeds to step 2426. Also in the case of No at step 2422, the process proceeds to step 2426.

  Next, in step 2426, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the main game symbol has been stopped and displayed. If Yes in step 2426, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a stop display command (decision display command) of the decorative symbol in step 2436 (sent to the sub sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999) Be done). Next, in step 2438, the CPUSC of the sub control board S stops and resets (zero clears) the drawing variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 2440, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the symbol variation flag, and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 2500). Also in the case of No in step 2410 or step 2426, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2500).

  Next, FIG. 23 is a flowchart of special game related display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. First, at step 2502, the CPUSC of the secondary control board S determines whether or not the special game flag is off. If Yes in step 2502, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a special game start display instruction command has been received from the main side in step 2504. If Yes in step 2504, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the special game flag in step 2506 and step 2508, and displays a big hit start on the effect display device SG (appropriately based on the type of big hit) Display) and the process of step 2550 is performed. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2502, the processing shifts to step 2550. Next, in step 2550, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes special game effect execution processing, which will be described later.

  Next, in step 2520, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not a special game end display instruction command has been received from the main control board M side. In the case of Yes in step 2520, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command related to the big hit end display on the effect display device SG in step 2522 (displays appropriately based on the type of big hit). Next, in step 2524, the CPUSC of the secondary control board S turns off the special game flag and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2600). Also in the case of No in step 2504 or step 2520, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing of step 2600).

  Next, FIG. 24 is a flowchart of special game effect execution processing according to the subroutine of step 2550 in FIG. First, at step 2552, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the special game being executed is a special game related to the long opening symbol. If Yes in step 2552, in step 2554, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command for sequentially displaying the number of rounds and the number of wins in numbers, and proceeds to step 2558. If No in step 2552, in step 2556, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sequentially displays the number of winnings as a number and displays an object image (for example, an image of a crystal ball) related to the number of rounds. Set the command and move to step 2558. As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of rounds is displayed as a number in the big hit according to the long opening symbol, while the number of rounds is not displayed as a number in the big hit according to the short opening symbol in the object image It is configured to display. In addition, as a configuration to display the number of rounds as an object image instead of displaying as a number, an object image may be displayed depending on execution of a round where the opening time of the big winning opening is relatively short The object image may be configured to increase depending on execution of a round (a round where a game ball can obtain a predetermined number or more, etc.) in which the opening time of the big winning opening is relatively long without increasing. In such a configuration, the number of rounds may be displayed numerically only in the big hit where all the rounds executed are rounds in which the opening time of the big winning opening is relatively long. Good. Further, in the present embodiment, the object image related to the number of rounds is configured to be increased, but the invention is not limited thereto, and a plurality of object images related to the number of rounds at the start of the special game Display the same number of object images as the number of rounds for which the time is relatively long, and subtract the object image every time the round where the opening time of the big winning opening is relatively long is performed (1 It may be configured to erase one by one (for example, when the number of execution rounds is 15 and the number of actual rounds is 8), eight object images are displayed at the start of the special game To do). Further, the number of winning balls scheduled to be acquired may be displayed at the start of the special game. When configured as such, as the number of prize balls scheduled to be acquired, "The number of actual rounds × the number of prize balls when one ball enters the big winning opening × entering the big winning opening that triggers the end of the round "Number" may be displayed. Further, when configured as such, the display of the number of rounds or the display of the object image may be simultaneously displayed, or the display of the number of rounds or the display of the object image may not be performed.

  Next, in step 2558, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the specific area entering command is received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2558, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on a specific area entering flag (a flag which will be described later when the turning on is executed) in step 2560, step 2562 Migrate to Also in the case of No at step 2558, the process proceeds to step 2560.

  Next, in step 2562, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the specific area entering flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2562, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines in step 2564 whether or not the ball entering effect execution timing has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2564, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command for executing the specified area ball effect (informing that the game ball has entered the specified area C22) in step 2566 and step 2568. At the same time, the specific area entering flag is turned off, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2520). Also in the case of No in step 2562 or step 2564, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2520). Here, the entering game execution timing may be appropriately set as long as it is a timing after the timing when the game ball enters the specific area C22. For example, the game ball enters the first large winning opening C10. It is also possible to set an arbitrary timing during the round to be executed after the sorting game execution round (or one of the sorting game execution rounds when the sorting game execution round is executed a plurality of times). It may be during the big hit end demonstration time. Moreover, in this embodiment, although it was comprised so that it might alert | report that special ball C22 was entered into special area | region during execution of a special game, it is not limited to this, A game ball is in specific area C22 during special game execution. Even if it is decided to enter the ball and shift to the probability variation gaming state after the end of the special game, the special game is not notified during the execution of the special game without notifying that it has entered the specific area C22. The stay stage after the end is the same stay stage as in the case of the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state and the case of the probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, and the current gaming state in the effect during fluctuation You may comprise so that it may be alert | reported that it is a probability fluctuation gaming state. In addition, such a configuration may be applied to all long opening symbols, or is applied only to a part of long opening symbols (for example, a big hit notifying that it entered a specific area C22 during a big hit) And a big hit that does not notify may be provided.

  Next, FIG. 25 is a flowchart of stay stage determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2600 in FIG. First, in step 2602, the CPUSC of the sub control board S changes the stay stage switching timing {the stay stage switching timing, for example, the timing when the special game is finished (is elected), the timing when the gaming state is shifted, It is determined whether or not the variation mode determination table has been switched, even if it is in the gaming state, or the timing when the number of times of variation has reached a predetermined number, etc.}. If Yes in step 2602, in step 2604, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the current gaming state is the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 2604, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the "space stage" as the stay stage in step 2606, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2999). If No in step 2604, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines in step 2608 whether a limit frequency A command or a limit frequency B command from the main control board M side has been received. If YES in step 2608, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets "night stage" as a stay stage in step 2610, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2999). If NO in step 2608, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines in step 2612 whether or not it is in the time shortening gaming state. If Yes in step 2612, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the "evening stage" as the stay stage in step 2614, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2999). In the case of No in step 2612, in other words, in the case of the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets “empty stage” as a staying stage in step 2616. Processing (processing of step 2999). Also in the case of No in step 2602, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2999). As described above, when the game does not shift to the probability variation gaming state after the big game end of the first main game side (when the limited frequency A command or the limited frequency B command is received), the "night stage" is set, and the second If it does not shift to the probability variation gaming state after the big game end of the main game side, it will shift to the "evening stage", that is, the big hit without entering the specific area C22 at the big hit of the first main game side The stay stage (rendering effect) in the case of transition to the non-probability fluctuation gaming state after completion and the case of transitioning to the non-probability fluctuation gaming state after the big hit end without entering the specific area C22 in the big hit of the second main game side Tend to differ.

  In addition, about the production tendency, "the production tendency is the same" may be the same as the contents of the production itself to be executed, and as the production group, the production group A to which the production A1 to the production A5 belong (for example, to the production group A The effect to which the character introduction is made is executed as the effect to which it belongs, and the effect group B to which effects B1 to B5 belong (for example, the battle effect is executed as the effect that belongs to effect group B And at least one of the effects A1 and A2 etc., the effects belonging to the same effect group (the effects A1 and A2 belong to the effect group A which is the same effect group) It may be considered as "identification tendency is the same". In addition, “the production tendency is different” may mean that the contents of the production itself to be performed are different, and as the production group, the production group A to which the effects A1 to A5 belong (for example, belongs to the production group A As a production, a production in which character introduction is made is executed, a production group B to which the production B1 to the production B5 belong (for example, a battle production is performed as a production belonging to the production group B), Are included in different effect groups such as effect A1 and effect B2 (the effect group to which effect A1 and effect B2 belongs differs in effect group A and effect group B). It may be assumed that "the presentation tendency is different". In addition, the concept which concerns on the said production | presentation tendency is applicable to all the structure (embodiment) which concerns on this example. In addition, "the effect is the same", "the effect is different", "the effect mode is the same", "the effect mode is different", "the stay stage is the same", "the stay stage is different", "the effect display format is The same concept can be applied to "identical" and "effect display format different". That is, in the present embodiment, the tendency of the effect to be executed during the symbol change is different according to the effect display format (the stay stage), and “stage A” and “stage B” can be used as stay stages. In the case of “stage A,” the step-up effect (preliminary effect of gradually changing to a display mode with a high probability of big hit is displayed in “Stage A”, and as one example, the display mode of the character is changed. While some character step-up effects, serif step-up effects, etc. in which the contents of the text and the text color change may be executed, the step-up effects are not performed on the “stage B”, while the movable object role thing is performed. Notice of driving effects and group notices (prediction effects such as a group of characters such as characters crossing the effect display device) or one-shot notification (driving of a feature, sound, background color Effect of effect) or the like for notifying that a jackpot is deterministic by etc. may be configured to be performed be either "stage A" and "Stage B". Also, although the step-up effect can be executed in either of the "stage A" and the "stage B", in the "stage A", only the character step-up can be performed as the step-up effect, while the "stage B" For example, only the speech step-up effect may be executed as the step-up effect, or the system of step-up effects that may be executed may be configured to be different.

  By configuring as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, relative to the gaming machine that shifts to the probability variation gaming state after the big hit by the game ball entering the specific area C22 during the big hit If it did not shift to the probability fluctuation gaming state after the big hit with the big hit concerning the long opening design which becomes easy to enter the specific territory C22, and after the big hit end, it is after the big hit of the 1st main game side or 2nd main Depending on whether it is after the big hit end of the game side, it is in the situation of the game by configuring the selection tendency of the fluctuation mode after the big hit end (presence or absence of transition to the limited frequency state) and the presentation tendency (stay stage) to be different. It is possible to set the selection tendency and the presentation tendency of various fluctuation time according to it, and the interest of the game is enhanced. In addition, during execution of the big hit, by providing a big hit that displays the number of rounds in numbers and a number of rounds in the object image, it is prevented that the number of rounds increases even though the game ball can not be acquired It is possible to reduce the stress of the player.

(Modification 1 from the present embodiment)
In this embodiment, the selection tendency and the presentation tendency of the variation mode after the big hit end are different depending on whether it is after the big hit end of the first main game side or after the big hit end of the second main game side. However, the configuration in which the selection tendency of the variation mode after the big hit and the presentation tendency are different is not limited to this. Therefore, a configuration different from the present embodiment is taken as a first modification of the present embodiment, and only the changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1750 in FIG. 16 in the first modification from the present embodiment. The change point from this embodiment is step 1780 (variation 1), that is, when it is determined in step 1762 that the CPUMC of the main control board M is after the big hit end concerning the long opening symbol, step 1780 (modification In 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not it is after the big hit completion in the non-time shortening gaming state. If Yes in step 1780 (variation 1), the process proceeds to step 1764. On the other hand, if No in step 1780 (variation 1), the process moves to step 1760.

  By configuring as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the present embodiment, the game ball does not enter the specific area C22 at the big hit according to the long opening symbol, and after the big hit the non-probability When transitioning to the fluctuation gaming state, time shortening is achieved by configuring the selection tendency of the fluctuation mode after the big hit to be different from the presentation tendency depending on whether or not the jackpot is won in the time-saving gaming state. After the big hit that was won in the gaming state, without entering the specific area C22, it is possible to have the same selection and presentation tendency of the variation mode as when entering the specific area C22, and the player has no discomfort It will be possible to advance the game.

  In the present embodiment and the first modification from the present embodiment, although not shown, from the timing when the last opening of the big winning opening in the round execution is finished and closed, the next round is started Round waiting time is provided. In addition, the length of the round standby time may be varied depending on the round, for example, the round standby time (round standby time before the start of the sorting game running round) and the sorting game running in the round immediately before the sorting game running round It may be different from the round waiting time in the round (the round waiting time after the last opening of the big winning opening in the sorting game running round is finished and closed). In addition, when the second R is the sorting game execution round, “the first standby time for the first round (the standby time before the second start) = X, the second standby time for the second round (the first standby time before the third start) When it is set that the round standby time other than Y), X and Y = Z, “X> Z and / or Y> Z” may be set.

Second Embodiment
In this embodiment, although it is configured to shift to the time saving game state all after the big hit end, it is not limited to this, it is a gaming machine that can also shift to the non-time shortening game state after the big hit end, this example The configuration applicable to the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment is referred to as a second embodiment, and only differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the specific game end determination process according to the subroutine of step 1550 of FIG. 9 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 1554 (second), step 1556 (second), step 1558 (second), and step 1560 (second), that is, step 1554 (second), The CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the probability variation counter MP51c is larger than zero. If Yes in step 1554 (second), in step 1556 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M subtracts 1 from the count value of the time reduction number counter MP52c. Next, in step 1558 (second), the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the count value of the probability variation number counter MP51 c is zero. If Yes in step 1558 (second), in step 1560 (second), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game probability change flag, and proceeds to step 1570. Also in the case of No in step 1554 (second) or step 1558 (second), the process moves to step 1570. As described above, in the second embodiment, when transitioning to the probability variation gaming state after the end of the special game, the probability variation gaming state is ended by executing a predetermined number of symbol variations (also referred to as a ST machine) There is configured to be).

  Next, FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1750 in FIG. 16 in the second embodiment. First, at step 1780-1, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main game probability change shift reservation flag is on. If Yes in step 1780-1, in steps 1780-2 and 1780-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game probability change shift reservation flag and turns on the main game probability change flag. Next, in step 1780-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value (in this example, 60 times) in the probability variation counter MP51 c, and the process shifts to step 1780-5. Also in the case of No at step 17801, the process proceeds to step 1780-5.

  Next, at step 1780-5, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not it is after the big hit completion in the time-saving gaming state. If Yes in step 1780-5, in step 1780-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value B (100 times in this example) in the time reduction number counter MP52c. Next, in steps 1780-7 and 1780-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game time short flag and turns on the auxiliary game time short flag. Next, in step 1780-9, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a space stage command (a command to the sub side, and a command to set the “space stage” as a stay stage), and Processing (processing of step 1997).

  If No in step 1780-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1780-10 whether or not it is after the end of the jackpot won in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state. If YES in step 1780-10, in step 1781-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the big hit concerning the first main game side is over. If Yes in step 1781-1, CPUMC of the main control board M is a big hit symbol which may not shift to the time-saving gaming state after the big hit end in step 1781-2, in this example, 2A · 3A · 5A) determines whether it is after the end of the big hit. If Yes in step 1781-2, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1997).

  If No in step 1781-1 or step 1781-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value B (100 times in this example) in the time reduction counter MP52c in step 1781-4. . Next, in steps 1781-5 and 1781-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game time short flag and turns on the auxiliary game time short flag. Next, in step 1781-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets an evening stage command (a command for the sub side, and a command for setting the "evening stage" as a stay stage), and Processing (processing of step 1997). In addition, when transitioning to the time saving gaming state after the end of the special game (when 100 times are given as the number of time reductions), even if the stay stage transitioning after the end of the special game is configured as the "space stage" Good. In addition, when it moves to the probability fluctuation game state and non time shortening game state after the special game end, for example “the underground stage” is set as the stay stage at the time of probability fluctuation game state and non time shortening game state You may perform (in the "underground stage", an effect that suggests or informs whether it is a probability variation gaming state or not is executed, and the "underground stage" is set even in the non-probability variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state May be configured to be

  If NO in step 1780-10, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value B (100 times in this example) in the time reduction number counter MP52c in step 1781-9. Next, in steps 1781-10 and 1781-11, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game time short flag and turns on the auxiliary game time short flag. Next, in step 1781-12, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a space stage command (a command to the sub side, and a command to set the “space stage” as the stay stage), and Processing (processing of step 1997).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when shifting to the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state after the big hit ends, the value (60 times) set in the probability variation number counter MP51c is the time reduction number counter MP52c. It is less than the set value (100 times). In other words, if the symbol change is executed after the big hit is over and the big hit is not won, "Big hit-> transition to probability fluctuation gaming state and time shortening gaming state-> probability fluctuation gaming state and time shortening gaming state 60 Transition to non-probability fluctuation gaming state and time shortening gaming state by passing the pattern fluctuation of times → non-probability fluctuation gaming state and by passing 40 times of symbol fluctuation with non-probability fluctuation gaming state and time shortening gaming state A game state will transition like "transition to a non-time shortening game state". In addition, when it moves to the probability fluctuation game state and the time shortening game state after the big hit end, the symbol fluctuation of the probability fluctuation game state and the time shortening game state 60 times, the non probability fluctuation game state and the time shortening game state 40 times Has become the symbol fluctuation, the number of fluctuations in the probability fluctuation gaming state and time shortening gaming state is more than the number of fluctuations in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and time shortening gaming state (probability fluctuation gaming state and time shortening The number of fluctuations in the gaming state may be smaller than the number of fluctuations in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state). In the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state, when winning the big hit concerning the time saving no big hit symbol of the first main game side, the non-time shortening gaming state is shifted after the big hit ends. In addition, when winning a big hit in the probability variation gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state, regardless of the big hit symbol, it shifts to the time shortening gaming state after the big hit ends, and the space stage command is on the secondary control board S side Will be sent to In other words, if you hit the big hit in the probability variation gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state, and did not enter the specific area C22 during the big hit, when you transition to the non probability variation gaming state and time shortening gaming state after the big hit end Also, it is configured to be the same stay stage (rendering tendency) as when transitioning to the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state after the big hit ends.

  Next, FIG. 29 is a flowchart of special game effect execution processing according to the subroutine of step 2550 of FIG. 23 in the second embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 2570 (second) to step 2584 (second), that is, after the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the specific area entering flag at step 2560, or When it is determined in step 2558 that the specific area entry command is not received from the main control board M side, in step 2570 (second), the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the execution timing of the definite transformation effect (big hit It is an arbitrary timing, and it is determined whether or not it has reached a timing (earlier than the execution timing of the short-time turning effect to be described later). If Yes in step 2570 (second), in step 2572 (second), the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the specific area entering flag is on. If Yes in step 2572 (second), in step 2574 (second), the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command to execute the specific area entry success presentation as the definite transformation turn presentation, step 2578 (second Move to). If No in step 2572 (the second), the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command to execute the specific area entering failure presentation as a certain change production in step 2576 (the second), step 2578 (the second Move to 2). Here, the definite transformation turning production is production that asks whether or not to shift to the probability fluctuation gaming state after the big hit end, and the specific area entry success demonstration notifies that it shifts to the probability fluctuation gaming state after the big hit end, The specific area entering failure game is an effect mode informing that it does not shift to the probability variation gaming state after the big hit end. Also in the case of No at step 2570, the processing shifts to step 2578 (second).

  Next, in step 2578 (the second), the CPUMC of the main control board M has reached the time reduction staging execution timing (arbitrary timing during the big hit, timing later than the execution timing of the above-mentioned definite transformation staging) It is determined whether or not. If Yes in step 2578 (second), in step 2580 (second), the CPUSC of the secondary control board S determines whether or not the gaming state transitioning after the end of the special game is the time-saving gaming state. If Yes in step 2580 (second), in step 2582 (second), the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command for executing a short transition success indication as a short turn effect, and executes the next process (step 2520 Transition to processing). In the case of No at step 2580, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command for executing a time reduction transition failure effect as a time reduction effect at step 2584 (second), and the next processing (processing of step 2520) Migrate to Here, the time reduction staging effect is a production asking about whether or not to shift to the time shortening gaming state after the big hit end, the time shift transition success production notifies that the time shortening gaming state is shifted after the big hit end, and the time shift shifts The failure effect is an effect mode informing that it does not shift to the time shortening gaming state after the big hit ends. Also in the case of No in step 2578 (second), the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2520). As described above, in the second embodiment, as effects that indicate the gaming state after the big hit, which is executed during the big hit, two effects of a definite transformation turning effect and a time shortening turning effect can be executed. That is, by executing a specific area entry success effect as a probability change turn effect and executing a time shift transition success effect as a time reduction turn effect, the player shifts to a probability change gaming state and a time shortening game state after the big hit ends It is configured to be able to recognize what to do. In addition, the order in which the definite transformation turning effect and the short time turning effect may be executed may be reversed, and there is no problem if two effects are not simultaneously executed. In addition, as described above, the probability change and the time reduction are both examples of the rotation effect, and according to the result of the rotation effect, (1) transition to the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state after the special game is over (No entry into a specific area and transition to non-time shortening gaming state) or not (2) Transition to non-probability fluctuation gaming state and time shortening gaming state after special game ending (field entry to specific area (3) Move to the probability fluctuation gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state after the special game is over (shift to the non-time shortening gaming state because there is a ball entering a specific area) ) Whether it will transition to the probability variation game state and time shortening game state (4) special game is over (the entry to a specific area is there and it shifts to the time shortening game state) or not The tendency of the sky is differentIn addition, the beat effect is executed during the execution of the special game won in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state, that is, it is won in the gaming state other than the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state During the execution of the special game is configured not to perform the beat effect, all non-probability variation gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state after the end of the special game won in gaming state is 100 times A transition may be made to the time-saving gaming state, and the "space stage" may be set as the stay stage.

  Next, FIG. 30 is a flowchart of stay stage determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2600 of FIG. 19 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 2618 (second) and step 2620 (second), that is, it is determined in step 2602 whether or not the CPUSC of the sub control board S has reached the stay stage switching timing. After that, in step 2618 (second), the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the space stage command from the main control board M side has been received. If Yes in step 2618 (second), the process moves to step 2606. If No in step 2618 (the second step), the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the "space stage" as the stay stage in the step 2620 (the second step), and the next process (the process of the step 2999) Migrate to In the case of No at step 2618 (second), the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines at step 2620 (second) whether or not the evening stage command from the main control board M side has been received. If Yes in step 2620 (second), the process proceeds to step 2614. In addition, in the case of No at step 2620 (second), the process proceeds to step 2616. It should be noted that even if the stay state is switched by the transition of the game state on the main game side by the change of the main game pattern (the pattern change is executed a predetermined number of times) as the change of the stay stage. Good, even if the game state on the main game side does not shift, based on the change of the main game pattern has elapsed (by switching the stay stage a predetermined number of times since the game state started) It may be configured.

  By configuring as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, two effects of definite transformation and staging effects are produced as effects that indicate the gaming state after the big hit that is executed during the big hit. By configuring to be able to execute the effect, the player pays attention to the result of the two-step effect of whether or not to shift to the probability variation gaming state and whether to shift to the time shortening gaming state, and it is a big hit It is possible to improve the interest of the presentation.

  In the second embodiment, by entering a special area C22 during the execution of the special game, it is possible to shift to the probability variation gaming state after the end of the special game. A configuration for executing a scout effect such as a form may be applied to other than ball machines, for example, a structure in which the gaming state after the big hit is determined based on the big hit symbol and the playing state at the time of the big hit. It may apply to

(Modification 1 from the second embodiment)
In the second embodiment, in the gaming machine in which the probability variation gaming state is terminated by execution of the predetermined number of symbol variations, an example of a configuration in which the number of time reductions is larger than the number of probability variations is exemplified. The configuration of the machine is not limited to that of the second embodiment. Therefore, a configuration different from the second embodiment is taken as a first modification of the second embodiment, and only the changes from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 31 is a main flowchart showing a flow of general processing performed by the main control board M in the first modification from the second embodiment. The change point from the second embodiment is step 1850 (second change 1), that is, after the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the award ball payout control process in step 1997, step 1850 (second change 1). , The CPU MC of the main control board M executes external signal output processing described later, and shifts to step 1999.

  Next, FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display processing according to the subroutine of steps 1400 (1) and (2) of FIG. 8 in the first modification from the second embodiment. . The change points from the second embodiment are step 1411-3 (second change 1), step 1439 (second change 1), step 1440 (second change 1), step 1441 (second change 1), step 1442 (Second change 1) and step 1443 (second change 1), that is, in step 1410, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the stop symbol related to the main game symbol with reference to the main game table 2. After that, in step 1411-3 (second modification 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the limit frequency B flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1411-3 (second change 1), the process moves to step 1412. In the case of No at step 1411-3 (second modification 1), the process moves to step 1500.

  If it is determined in step 1426 that the CPUMC of the main control board M is in the process of being turned off, then in step 1439 (second change 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M is in the change fixed flag (the main game It is determined whether or not the flag) which is turned on during the fluctuation fixed time from when the symbol is determined and stopped to when the next symbol fluctuation starts, is on. In the case of Yes in step 1439 (second variant 1), the process proceeds to step 1442 (second variant 1), and in the case of No, the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 1600).

  Also, after the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the fluctuation flag in step 1434, the CPUMC of the main control board M has a fluctuation fixed time (0 in this example) in step 1440 (second change 1). 3) is set in the fluctuation fixed time timer SH10t and started, and at step 1441 (second change 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the fluctuation fixed flag, and step 1442 (second change 1) Move to). Next, in step 1442 (second change 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer value of the fluctuation fixed time timer SH10t is zero. If Yes in step 1442 (second change 1), in step 1443 (second change 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the variation fixed flag and shifts to step 1436. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1442 (the second modification 1), the process proceeds to the next processing (the processing at step 1600). As described above, in the first modified example from the second embodiment, the variable fixed time is provided, and all time values are set to predetermined values (0.3 seconds in this example). There is no limitation, and it may be configured to have time values of a plurality of types of fluctuation fixed time, for example, whether or not it is a probability fluctuation gaming state, whether it is a time shortening gaming state or not, with the first main gaming symbol The fluctuation fixed time may differ depending on whether there is a second main gaming symbol or the like, or the fluctuation fixed time may differ depending on a plurality of combinations.

  Next, FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the limited frequency B fluctuation mode determination process according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. 32 in the first modification from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are steps 1502 (second variation 1) and 1506 (second variation 1), that is, in step 1502 (second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M is The counter value G of the limited frequency B counter MN52c-2 is within the range of the first step (within the range of the counter value of the limited frequency B counter MN52c-2 which is the first step in the limited frequency B state having three steps). , 100 ≧ G> 60). In the case of Yes in step 1502 (second change 1), the process moves to step 1504. If No in step 1502 (second change 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the counter value G of the limited frequency B counter MN 52c-2 in the second step range in step 1506 (second change 1). It is determined whether or not it is within the range of the counter value of the limited frequency B counter MN 52c-2 which is the second step in the limited frequency B state having three steps, and 5959G> 1. In the case of Yes in step 1506 (second modification 1), the process moves to step 1508. If No in step 1506 (the second modification 1), the process proceeds to step 1510.

  Next, FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1750 (second) of FIG. 16 in the first modification from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are steps 1780-4 (second variation 1) and steps 1782-1 (second variation 1) to steps 1782-9 (second variation 1), that is, 1780-3. After the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability change flag at step 1780-4 (second change 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the probability change number counter MP51c to a predetermined value (in this example, 40) is set, and the process shifts to step 1780-5. Also, after the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game time short flag at step 1780-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the limit frequency B counter MN52c- at step 1782-1 (second change 1). A predetermined value (100 in this example) is set to 2. Next, at step 1782-2 (second modification 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the limited frequency B flag, and proceeds to step 1780-9.

  Also, after the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game time short flag at step 1781-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the limit frequency B counter MN 52c-at step 1782-6 (second change 1). A predetermined value (100 in this example) is set to 2. Next, at step 1782-7 (the second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the limited frequency B flag, and proceeds to step 1781-8. Also, after the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the auxiliary game time short flag at step 1781-11, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the limit frequency B counter MN52c- at step 1782-8 (second change 1). A predetermined value (100 in this example) is set to 2. Next, at step 1782-9 (the second variation 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the limited frequency B flag, and proceeds to step 1781-12. As described above, in the first modification from the second embodiment, when transitioning to the time-saving gaming state, the limited frequency B state is established, and thereafter, the selection tendency of the fluctuation time will be shifted in three steps, and the big hit ends In the case of later transitioning to the probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, the big hit end → probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, and the state of determining the fluctuation mode with reference to the limited frequency table 1 is 40 times → It is a non-probability fluctuation gaming state and time shortening gaming state, the state which decides fluctuation mode referring to limitation frequency table 2 is 59 times → non-probability fluctuation gaming state and time shortening gaming state, it refers limitation frequency table 3 Then, the state of determining the variation mode is configured to make a transition as “once”. In this example, the variation time of the main gaming symbol when referring to the limited frequency table 3 is configured to be selected only 5 seconds, but it is not limited to this, a long time such as 30 seconds Only the fluctuation time of the symbol may be selected (in particular, the symbol fluctuation causing a loss), and the effect dedicated to the time-saving final fluctuation may be executed. In addition, when it moves to the probability fluctuation game state and the time shortening game state after the big hit end, the symbol fluctuation of the probability fluctuation game state and the time shortening game state 40 times, the non probability fluctuation game state and the time shortening game state 60 times The number of fluctuations in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state is greater than the fluctuation number in the probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state. In addition, it is not limited to this, the number of changes in the probability change gaming state and the time shortening gaming state and the number of changes in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state are configured to be the same number (for example, 50 times) (The configuration of the number of times of probability variation and the number of time savings can be applied to all the embodiments according to this example). Also, (1) non-probability fluctuation gaming state and as a configuration to shift to the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and time shortening gaming state after the probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state are ended by execution of a predetermined number of symbol fluctuations. After the end of the big hit won in the non-time shortening gaming state, after performing the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state a predetermined number of times, provide a big hit to shift to the probability variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state (2) After completion of the big hit won in the non-probability variation gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state, after performing the probability variation gaming state and time shortening gaming state a predetermined number of times, non-probability variation gaming state and non-time shortening gaming It may be configured to provide a big hit that shifts to the state. Further, in the first modification from the second embodiment, the staying stage after the big hit ends when there is a ball entering the specific area C22 during the big hit regardless of the gaming state and the big hit symbol winning the big hit. The stage stage after the big hit may be set as the "evening stage" if there is no entry into the specific area C22 during the big hit, and in that case, if it is the "space stage", the limited frequency B state If it is "evening stage", it may be a limited frequency A state (or a limited frequency state in which the selection tendency of the fluctuation time may differ depending on the number of reservations such as the limited frequency C state).

  Next, FIG. 35 is a flowchart of external signal output processing according to the subroutine of step 1850 (second modification 1) of FIG. 31 according to the first modification from the second embodiment. First, in step 1852, the CPU MC of the main control board M confirms the state of the gaming machine. Next, in step 1854, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the external terminal transmission content determination table 1 based on the confirmed result, and the external relay terminal board G based on the confirmed result of the gaming machine. A signal indicating the state of the gaming machine is output to the hall computer HC via the process flow, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1999).

(External relay terminal board)
Here, the signal output via the external relay terminal board G according to the first modification of the second embodiment will be described with reference to the lower part of the figure (image view of signal output). A plurality of external connection terminals as output terminal parts to which various cable connectors are connected to the external relay terminal board G {for example, information on prize ball payout, information on winning or symbol stopping, current gaming state (normal gaming state, Terminals for outputting gaming state information for outputting information on specific gaming state, special gaming state, etc.), error information for outputting various error information detected by an opening detection sensor etc. when the door is open Terminals for output, etc.} are provided. Then, as described later, the plurality of output terminals are configured to be able to output information to the hole computer HC from the plurality of output terminals by being connected to the hole computer HC by a cable harness. Here, in the first modification from the second embodiment, one output terminal is assigned as an output terminal of payout related information that is information output from the winning ball payout control board KH and is a plurality of types of information. It is done. The output terminals other than the one output terminal are output terminals for the signal output from the main control board M. For example, a big hit output terminal (a plurality of big hit types are used to output a signal during a big hit when a big hit) ), The door opening output terminal which outputs a signal while the glass door D18 is open, the start opening winning terminal for outputting a signal when winning in the starting opening, balls for the prize ball tank KT The game related information that is important information for the game arcade operator, such as a ball out output terminal that outputs a signal while being out and a special symbol determined number output terminal that outputs a signal when a special symbol is stopped. It is an output terminal. That is, by setting the output terminal of the payout related information as one output terminal, exhaustion of the output terminal of the important game related information can be avoided.

  In addition, in the first modification from the second embodiment, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH transmit the game related information and the payout related information to the external relay terminal board G in the form of one-way serial transmission. It is configured to send. That is, no transmission line is provided from the external relay terminal board G to the main control board M and the winning ball payout control board KH (the same is true for information transmission from the external relay terminal board G to the hall computer HC).

  Here, an outline of the information transmission method of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment will be described. First, between the main control board M and the winning ball payout control board KH and the external relay terminal board G , And the external relay terminal board G and the hall computer HC are connected by a cable harness. On the other hand, as shown in this example, since the external relay terminal plate G is constituted by a communication relay (so-called relay), the main control board M and the winning ball delivery control board KH and the hall computer HC are always in conduction. It is not That is, an electrical signal (a signal of binary logic whose voltage is Hi level / Low level) input from the main control board M and the winning ball payout control board KH to the input terminal of the external relay terminal plate G is the relay After being replaced by a physical signal (a signal of binary logic whose switch state is on / off) by the unit, the signal is output from the output terminal of the external relay terminal plate G to the hole computer HC. More specifically, the external relay terminal board G has a plurality of relay coils G1 and contact parts G2 corresponding to the respective input / output terminals. When the relay coil G1 is excited based on the pulse signal input to the input terminal, a magnetic force is generated, and the contact portion G2 is closed by the generated magnetic force, whereby the output terminal and the hole computer HC are conducted. When the relay coil G1 is demagnetized, the contact point G2 returns to the open state, and the output terminal and the hole computer HC do not conduct. Therefore, on the hole computer HC side, it is possible to obtain a pulse signal substantially the same as the pulse signal input to the input terminal of the external relay terminal plate G by detecting the conductive period. With such a configuration, it is possible to physically secure one-way communication from the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH to the hall computer HC, and from the hall computer HC side, the main control board M and This prevents a goto action (so-called remote control goto) which illegally operates the prize ball payout control board KH. In this example, one-way communication to the hall computer HC is possible by the mechanism using the relay coil while preventing the goto action, but the invention is not limited thereto. For example, a pair of light emitting units One-way communication is also possible by the photosensor having the light receiving unit (for example, light from the light emitting unit connected to the main control substrate M and the prize ball payout control substrate KH is connected to the hole computer HC) It is supplemented that the signal can be received by reading the

  However, since it is configured to be once replaced with a physical signal (switch state is on / off), one of the external relay terminal plates G with respect to the hall computer HC from the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH. It is difficult to transmit complex information using input / output terminals, and one type of information is transmitted using the one input / output terminal (for example, if it is an output terminal for the number of times of special symbol determination, It is customary to be configured to be able to transmit only the information to the effect that "1 variation of the special symbol has ended".

  Next, a transmission signal to the external relay terminal board G in the first modification from the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The specific contents of the signal shown in this example (numerical values, notification modes, measures in case of duplication, etc.) are merely examples, and it is supplemented that they can be changed unless they greatly deviate from the concept of this example. Keep it.

Signal number: 1
Signal type: Outline of symbol variation signal: Target a part of symbol variation (for example, symbol variation on the first main game side) that triggers opening of the big winning opening (attacker), and output the symbol variation count When the variable display of the first main game symbol is finished (for example, in the case of the first main game symbol display processing, when the flag during fluctuation is turned on → off at step 1424) {* Note that the fluctuation display is After the end, when the period during which the symbol is fixedly displayed is ended (or when it is started, it is during the period) may be used as the output timing}
1 configuration of signal: [output timing] timing when the variable display of the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol is finished {when the period in which the symbol is fixedly displayed after the variable display is finished (or start If it is in the period, it may be the output timing)
[Output period] Overlap of the ON signal for 0.5 seconds Overlap of the output period: [Possibility of overlap] There is no overlap of the same signal, but other signals (such as signal number 2 and signal number 3 described later) It is possible to overlap with the signal of the jackpot system, the signal of the security system of the signal No. 4, etc. (In addition, similarly for the signals other than the signal No. 1 in which the possibility of duplication is described as "none") Can overlap with the signal of
Remarks: It is preferable to configure the output period to be shorter than the shortest period in which the variable display period of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol can be taken. In addition, the output period of the signal is the same 0.5 seconds for the signal relating to the first main gaming symbol and the signal relating to the second main gaming symbol, and a time value different from 0.3 seconds of the fluctuation fixed time It has become.

Signal number: 2
Signal type: Big hit system summary of the signal: Output of the fact that the big hit in the time-saving game state Output 1 signal configuration: [Output timing] Special game start timing [Output period] Special game is not running, and Until the non-time shortening gaming state is reached (It remains on from the stop of the big hit symbol in the time shortening gaming state to the big hit start)
Overlapping output periods: [Duplicate possibility] No remarks: It may be continuously output even when transitioning from the probability variation gaming state and time shortening gaming state to the non-probability variation gaming state and time shortening gaming state. In addition, it is not output in the probability variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state.

Signal number: 3
Signal type: Big hit system outline: Output of 1 signal that a big hit is in progress: [Output timing] Special game start timing [Output period] Special game end timing (Big hit start demo time and big hit end demo time including)
Overlapping output period: [overlap possibility] No remarks: The output period in the big hit start demo time and the big hit end demo time is a big hit in the time-saving gaming state than when winning the big hit in the non-time shortening gaming state It is a short time if you win

Signal number: 4
Signal type: Overview of security-related signals: Output that the RAM initialization operation has been performed in the gaming machine and that the fraudulent action that can be detected by the gaming machine is being performed. During a period other than during the period when the special winning opening (attacker) can be opened (during the operation of the special electric symbol), a predetermined number (five) or more of the balls entering the special winning opening (attacker) are detected. During the period when the motorized combination can not be released, a predetermined number (five) or more of balls entering the normally operated combination are detected (unfair prize)
[1] Signal configuration: [Output timing] At the arbitrary timing after the RAM initialization operation is performed and at the time of detection of the above-mentioned wrong prize [Output period] ON signal is output during the first period (30 seconds) Overlap: [Overlap possibility] Yes [Process in the case of overlap] Overlap all output periods and maintain the ON signal output until all output periods expire Notes: Output after wrong prize and RAM clear The period may be different

Signal number: 5
Signal type: Outline of prize detection system signal: Configuration of one signal that outputs all the number of entrances to each starting opening, targeting all starting openings pertaining to the symbol variation that triggers opening of the special winning opening (attacker): [Output timing] When one ball is detected with the switch for detecting the ball entering the first main game starting port, and with the switch for detecting the ball entering the second main game starting port When the ball is detected [Output period] After outputting the ON signal for 0.1 seconds, the OFF signal for 0.1 seconds Overlapping the output period: [Possibility of overlap] Yes [Overlap] Process for obtaining] Wait for the next output until the output period of the 1 signal currently output is expired Remarks: Also in the final change (time reduction number of times counter MP52c value = 1 pattern change) of the time shortening gaming state multiple It can be output several times. In addition, when an illegal entry into the second main game start opening is detected, the output timing may not be satisfied with the entry of the ball.

  By configuring as described above, in the gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment in which the probability variation gaming state is terminated by execution of a predetermined number of symbol variations, the number of time reductions is greater than the number of probability variations. Even when configured as described above, when outputting information regarding the game progress status or error occurrence information to the outside (for example, to the hall computer HC), to output the appropriate information according to the characteristics of the gaming machine to the outside Will be able to

  In the first modification from the second embodiment, the first main gaming symbol and the case of the probability variation gaming state and time shortening gaming state and the non-probability variation gaming state and time shortening gaming state The output period of the symbol confirmation signal of the above-mentioned signal No. 1 related to the second main game symbol basically becomes the same time value (for example, 0.5 seconds), and the fluctuation fixed time is also basically the same time It becomes a value (for example, 0.3 seconds), but only in the final change of the time saving gaming state (the final change of the non-probability gaming state and the time shortening gaming state), the output period and fluctuation of the symbol determination signal of the signal number 1 Fixed time and (for any of the first main gaming symbol variation and the second main gaming variation symbol variation) for a long time (for example, the variation fixed time 0.5 seconds, signal number 2 symbol The output period of the definite signal is 0.7 seconds) Cormorant may be configured. In addition, although the fluctuation fixed time is a long time only in the final fluctuation of the time shortening gaming state, the output period of the symbol determination signal of the signal number 1 may be the same as the previous time of the symbol fluctuation execution.

(Modification 2 from the second embodiment)
In the second embodiment, in the gaming machine in which the probability variation gaming state is terminated by execution of the predetermined number of symbol variations, an example of a configuration in which the number of time reductions is larger than the number of probability variations is exemplified. The configuration of the machine is not limited to that of the second embodiment. Therefore, a configuration different from the second embodiment is taken as a second modification of the second embodiment, and only the changes from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 37 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing according to the subroutine of step 1300 of FIG. 4 in the second modification from the second embodiment. The change from the first modification to the second embodiment is step 1326 (second modification 2), that is, in step 1302, the CPUMC of the main control board M enters the ball to the first main game start opening A10. If it is determined that it is detected, in step 1326 (second modification 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M is the first main game start opening ball entry command (a command to the side of the sub control board S, the first main game A command relating to detection of entry into the starting opening A10 is set, and the process proceeds to step 1304. In addition, in the modification 2 from the second embodiment, when the ball entering the first main game start opening A10 is detected, the first start opening ball input command is transmitted to the sub control board S side. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and transmits the first starting opening ball entering command to the secondary control board S side only when entering the first main game starting port A10 is detected in the time-saving gaming state It may be configured.

  Next, FIG. 38 shows the first main game symbol display processing (second main game symbol processing related to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} in FIG. 8 in the second modification from the second embodiment. It is a flowchart of a game symbol display process). The changes from the second embodiment are the steps 1411-3 (second change 1), 1650 (second change) and 1435 (second change), step 1441 (second change 1), step 1442 (Second change 1), step 1443 (second change 1), and step 1439 (second change 1), that is, after the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the stop symbol related to the main game symbol in step 1410 At step 1411-3 (second modification 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the limit frequency B flag is off. If Yes in step 1411-3 (the second change 1), after the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the change mode (change time) regarding the main game symbol in step 1412 and temporarily stores it, or in step 1500 After the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the limited frequency B fluctuation mode determination processing, the CPUMC of the main control board M executes the fluctuation fixed time determination processing described later in step 1650 (second modification), and step 1418 Migrate to After the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the flag in step 1434, the CPUMC of the main control board M performs the processing of step 1650 (second change 2) in step 1435 (second change). The fluctuation fixed time determined in this way is set and started in the fluctuation fixed time timer SH10t, and the process shifts to step 1441. Next, at step 1441 (second change 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the fluctuation fixing flag, and shifts to step 1442 (second change 1). Further, in step 1439 (second change 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the variation fixed flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1439 (the second modification 1), the process shifts to step 1442 (the second modification 1). In the case of No at step 1439 (the second variation 1), the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1600). Next, at step 1442 (second change 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the value of the fluctuation fixed time timer SH10t is zero. If Yes in step 1442 (second change 1), in step 1443 (second change 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the variation fixed flag and shifts to step 1436. In the case of No at step 1442 (second change 1), the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1600).

  Next, FIG. 39 is a flowchart of the variation fixed time determination process according to the subroutine of step 1650 (second variation 2) of FIG. 38 in the second modification from the second embodiment. First, in step 1652, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the symbol variation is the final variation (100th variation from the end of the big hit) in the time-saving gaming state. If Yes in step 1652, in step 1654, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the fluctuation fixing time to a long time (a longer time than the fluctuation fixing time according to step 1656, 0.5 seconds in this example). Then, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1418). In the case of No at Step 1652, the CPUMC of the main control board M in Step 1656 has a short fixed time (shorter than the fixed time according to Step 1654, 0.3 seconds in this example). ) And move on to the next processing (processing of step 1418). In addition, the output period of the ON signal of the external terminal output signal according to the number of symbol variations of signal No. 1 is 0.7 seconds when the variation fixed time is long, and when the variation fixed time is short When the fluctuation fixed time is 0.5 seconds, and the fluctuation fixed time is a long time, the output period of the ON signal of the external terminal output signal according to the number of symbol fluctuation of the signal number 1 is also a long time.

  Next, FIG. 40 is a main flowchart on the side of the sub control board S (in particular, the side of the sub main control unit SM) in the second modification of the second embodiment. The change point from the second embodiment is step 2200 (second variation), that is, after the CPUSC of the sub control substrate S executes the stay stage determination processing in step 2600, step 2200 (second variation). At 2), the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a right-handed instruction display control process described later, and proceeds to step 2999.

  Next, FIG. 41 is a flowchart of right-turning instruction display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2200 (second modification 2) of FIG. 40 in the second modification of the second embodiment. First, at step 2202, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the current gaming state is the time-saving gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 2202, the process moves to step 2204. On the other hand, if No in step 2202, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the special game in progress flag is off, in other words, whether or not the special game is in progress. In the case of No at step 2203, the process moves to step 2204.

  Next, in step 2204, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command for displaying the second rightward turning indication display on the effect display device SG. Next, in step 2206, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is a first main game start opening ball entry command from the main control board M side {a command set in step 1326 (the second modification 2), the first It is determined whether or not a command to the effect that there is a ball entry to the main game start port A10 has been received. If Yes in step 2206, in step 2208, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command (for example, display for 5 seconds and then erase) to display the first right-turning instruction display on the effect display device SG. , Shift to the next processing (processing of step 2999).

  If NO in step 2202, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines in step 2203 whether the special game flag is off, in other words, whether the special game is not being performed. In the case of No at step 2203, the process moves to step 2204. In addition, while the special game is being executed, it may be configured to display a right-handed instruction display different from the first right-handed instruction display and the second right-handed instruction display. Display a fourth right-handed instruction display with a relatively small display area as a right-handed instruction display to be displayed, and satisfy a predetermined condition (for example, detection of entering the first main game starting opening) during a special game By this, the third right-handed indication display may be configured to be displayed, which has a relatively large display area. The third right-turning instruction display and the fourth right-turning instruction display may be configured to be able to display both at the same time. Even when audio notification from the speaker D24 can be output (for example, output as "right strike!") At the timing when display of the first right strike instruction display or the third right strike instruction display is started. Good.

  Further, in the case of Yes in step 2203, the CPUSC of the sub control board S erases the right turn indication display displayed from the effect display device SG in step 2212 (first right turn indication display and second right turn indication) The display is displayed, and the process is not executed if the right-handed instruction display is not displayed. The command is set, and the process shifts to the next process (the process of step 2999). Also in the case of No at step 2206, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing at step 2999). By configuring in this manner, the second right-handed instruction display can be displayed on the effect display device SG as the right-handed instruction display during execution of the special game and in the time-saving gaming state (state where the player should execute right-handling). While being able to be displayed and displaying the second right hit indication display, the player performs a left hit and the first main game start opening A10 is detected when entering the ball, although the second right hit indication display is being displayed. A right-handed instruction display can be displayed together on the effect display device SG to urge the player to play a game by right-handling.

  Next, the lower part of the same figure is a display image diagram of a right-handed instruction display. First, the left side is a first right-handed instruction display displayed on the effect display device SG, and the right side shows a second right-handed instruction display displayed on the effect display device SG. The first right-handed instruction display is larger than the second right-handed instruction display, and the display mode is conspicuous. With this configuration, it is clearer to the player who plays the game by the left strike, although the right strike instruction display (the second right strike instruction display) indicates that the right strike is instructed. Can be instructed to hit the right. Here, the right strike is to launch the game ball by adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball to a relatively strong intensity so that the game ball flows down the right side of the game area D30, and it may be called a rubber strike is there. In addition, the left hitting means that the game ball is adjusted to a relatively weak strength to launch the game ball so that the game ball flows down the left side of the game area D30. In addition, the configuration for prompting the player to play the game by the right strike is not limited to this, and when it is determined that the left strike is being executed for a predetermined time (a predetermined entrance to the ball entrance which can enter the ball by the left strike) The first right hit indication display may be displayed on the detection of the number of balls, etc., or a sensor capable of detecting the game ball flowing down the game area D30 is provided, and the sensor is executing the left hit. The first right-handed indication may be displayed when it is detected. In addition, when the player is executing left hitting, the present invention is not limited to only displaying the first right hitting indication display, and a warning sound may be generated by the speaker D24. Further, the first right strike indication may be displayed after being displayed for a predetermined time and may be erased, or may be erased when it is determined that the right strike is being performed for a predetermined time or more.

The configuration according to the right-handed instruction display according to the second modification from the second embodiment is configured as follows.
(1) If the game ball enters the first main game start opening A10 one second before the fluctuation stop of the final fluctuation in the probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, the first right-turn indication display is displayed Is configured so that the first right-turning instruction display can be continuously displayed even during symbol variation in the non-probability variation gaming state and time shortening gaming state, which is the next variation, but the non-probability variation gaming state and time When the first right-handed instruction display is displayed by the game ball entering the first main game start opening A10 one second before the final variation fluctuation stop in the shortening gaming state, the next fluctuation non-probability The first right-handed instruction display will be erased at the start of symbol variation in the variable gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state. That is, although the first rightward indication display may be displayed over the final variation in the probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state from the subsequent symbol fluctuation, the first rightward indication display is the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening game It is not displayed from the final change in the state to the subsequent pattern change. In addition, the configuration may be applied only to the final variation in the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, and the symbol variation in which the final variation in the non-probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state is lost.
(2) The display modes of the first right-handed instruction display and the second right-handed instruction display are the same in the probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state and the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, but The stay stage (rendering tendency) and / or the specific effect (for example, the effect relating to the end of the time-saving gaming state) in the probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state and the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state The presence or absence of execution may differ.
(3) The second right-handed instruction display continues to be continuously displayed on the effect display device SG in the probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state and the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, and the second right Only the hit instruction display can be displayed alone or can be displayed overlapping with the first right hit instruction display (the first right hit instruction display and the second right hit instruction display can be displayed simultaneously). In such a case, the display priority of the first rightward display may be higher (displayed on the front) than the second rightward display. In addition, it may be configured such that only the first right strike indication display can not be displayed alone. In addition, the configuration may be configured to be applied only at least during variation display of a predetermined decorative symbol (for example, symbol variation that does not result in a reach related to a loss).

In addition, the configuration according to the right-handed instruction display according to the second modification from the second embodiment may be configured as follows.
(1) Similar to the limited frequency B state in the present embodiment, in the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, the limited frequency is transitioned to three stages {a state where the limited frequency table 1 is referred to (limited frequency B1 State of referring to limited frequency table 2 (referred to as limited frequency B 2) → state of referring to limited frequency table 3 (referred to as limited frequency B 3)} stop of fluctuation of final fluctuation in limited frequency B 2 During the symbol change in the limited frequency B3 (when the limited frequency B3 is only 1 change) when the first right-handed indication display is displayed by the game ball entering the first main game starting opening A10 seconds before the second Although it is configured that the first right-handed indication can be continuously displayed also in the case of ending one time of the one fluctuation, it is the final fluctuation (probability) in the limited frequency B3. It is the final change in the movement game state and the time reduction game state, and when the limitation frequency B3 ends with only 1 change, it indicates the change of 1 time) 1st main game before the change stop 1 second When the first right-handed instruction display is displayed by the game ball entering the starting opening A10, in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state (not limited frequency state) which is the next change At the start of symbol variation, the first right-handed indication display is erased. That is, the first right-handed indication can be displayed from the final variation in the limited frequency B2 to the subsequent symbol variation (the first right-handed indication is displayed from the final variation in the limited frequency B1 to the subsequent symbol variation) However, the first right-handed indication display is from the final change in the limit frequency B3 (in the case where the limit frequency B3 ends with only one change, it indicates the one change). It is not displayed over the subsequent symbol variation.
(2) Similar to the limited frequency B state in the present embodiment, in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, the state of referring to the limited frequency table 1 which makes the limited frequency transition to three stages {(limited frequency B1 and State of referring to the limited frequency table 2 (referred to as limited frequency B2) → a state of referring to the limited frequency table 3 (referred to as limited frequency B3)}, stop the fluctuation of the final fluctuation in the limited frequency B2 When the game ball enters the first main game start slot A10 one second ago and the first right-turn indication display is displayed, the symbol variation in the limited frequency B3 (limited frequency B3 is only 1 fluctuation) Although the first right-handed indication display can be continuously displayed during the one-time change, the final change in the limited frequency B3 (not shown). It is the final change in the rate fluctuation gaming state and time shortening gaming state, and when the limitation frequency B3 ends with only 1 fluctuation, it indicates the fluctuation of 1 time) 1 second before the fluctuation stop When the first right-handed instruction display is displayed by the game ball entering the game starting opening A10, the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state (not limited frequency state) which are the next change The first right-handed indication display is to be erased at the start of symbol variation in. That is, the first right-handed indication can be displayed from the final variation in the limited frequency B2 to the subsequent symbol variation (the first right-handed indication is displayed from the final variation in the limited frequency B1 to the subsequent symbol variation) However, the first right-handed indication display is from the final change in the limit frequency B3 (in the case where the limit frequency B3 ends with only one change, it indicates the one change). It is not displayed over the subsequent symbol variation.
(3) During the change of a predetermined decorative symbol (for example, the change which does not become reach concerning loss), the first right-handed instruction display and the second right-handed instruction display are displayed on the front than the display of the decorative symbol High priority (display priority)}. For example, a display layer on the effect display device SG includes a first layer, a second layer, and a third layer from the front, the first layer being the frontmost, the third layer being the backmost, and an image to be displayed In the case where the images displayed in the layer on the front side are displayed preferentially in the case where the two are overlapped, the decorative symbol is displayed on the third layer, and the first right hit indication display and the second right hit indication The display may be configured to be displayed on the first layer or the second layer.
(4) The first right-handed indication display may be displayed at a position overlapping the decorative symbol. The second right-handed indication display may also be displayed at a position overlapping the decorative symbol. The first right-handed instruction display may be displayed at a position overlapping with a specific advance notice effect such as a step-up effect (effect similar to that described above). The second right-handed instruction display is displayed at a position not overlapping the specific advance notice effect such as the step-up effect. The first right-handed indication display is displayed at a position not overlapping the hold display image. The second right-handed indication display is also displayed at a position not overlapping the hold display image.

  By configuring as described above, in the gaming machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment, the probability fluctuation gaming state is terminated by execution of a predetermined number of times of symbol fluctuation, an appropriate right based on the transition of the gaming state A hit indication can be displayed, and the user-friendly gaming machine can be provided.

(Modification 3 from the second embodiment)
In the second embodiment, in the gaming machine in which the probability variation gaming state is terminated by execution of the predetermined number of symbol variations, an example of a configuration in which the number of time reductions is larger than the number of probability variations is exemplified. The configuration of the machine is not limited to that of the second embodiment. Therefore, a configuration different from the second embodiment is taken as a third modification of the second embodiment, and only the changes from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 42 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing according to the subroutine of step 1300 (second modification 3) of FIG. 4 in the third modification from the second embodiment. First, in step 1321, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the first main game start opening ball insertion information has been received from the first main game start opening ball detection device A11s. In the case of Yes in step 1321, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1322 whether or not the holding balls for the main game (particularly, the first main game side) are not the upper limit (for example, four). If Yes in step 1322, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires a first main game content determination random number in step 1323. In the present example, as a first main game content determination random number, a lottery random number for determining success or failure, a symbol lottery random number for determining a symbol when hit, and a variation pattern (variation time) of special symbols are determined. Because of the variation of the random number lottery random number is acquired three random numbers. Incidentally, these three random numbers are generated from random number generation means having different update cycles and random number ranges, respectively, and are obtained sequentially at this timing. Next, in step 1324, the CPU MC of the main control board M temporarily stores (holds) the acquired first main game content determination random number. Next, in step 1325, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the special game execution flag is off. If Yes in step 1325, in step 1326, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main game time short flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1326, in step 1327, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in advance the result of the acceptance and the stop symbol relating to the stored suspension based on the suspension information (the lottery random number and the symbol determination random number). Next, in step 1328, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting the command regarding the newly generated pending yes / no result and the stop symbol information to the sub main control unit SM. (It is transmitted to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing of step 1999), and the process shifts to step 1329.

  Next, in step 1329, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines, based on the suspension information (variation mode determination random number), the variation mode random number delimiter information and the variation mode group (non-short time variation mode group and time variation) The mode group is determined in advance (for the variation mode random number division information and the variation mode group, refer to the main game table 3 in FIG. 43), and the process shifts to step 1330. In the third modification of the second embodiment, one variation mode group is configured to include a plurality of types of variation modes (variation time). Even in the case of No at step 1325 or step 1326, the process proceeds to step 1330. Next, in step 1330, the CPU MC of the main control board M performs a sub main control of a command relating to a new suspension occurrence (a suspension generation command of the first main game content determination random number, a command pertaining to variation mode random number division information, etc.) The command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the unit SM is set (sent to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing of step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1331. In the case where symbol information is transmitted to the side of the sub control board S as in the third modification of the second embodiment, even if an effect that suggests a big hit is performed as the effect to be executed on the side of the sub control board S Well, in such a configuration, it is desirable to be able to notify the player of the stop symbol of the main game symbol to be the big hit (stop only when the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a big hit) Report the symbol). In addition, also in the case of No in step 1321 or step 1322, the processing shifts to step 1331. Incidentally, although the first main game content determination random number is temporarily stored in step 1324, if the process relating to the first main game content determination random number is described in detail, (1) entering the first main game start opening A10 As a trigger, the first main game content determination random number is acquired, and the random number is stored in the register. (2) The first main game content determination random number stored in the register is stored in the RAM of the main control board M, and based on the first main game content determination random number stored in the register, the variation start of the main game symbol Perform a pre-reading lottery in front. (3) Based on the first main game content determination random number stored in the register, while storing the first main game content determination random number stored in the RAM of the main control board M at the start of variation of the main game symbol The hit / not decision is executed (the hit / not decision may be executed based on the first main game content determination random number stored in the RAM of the main control board M). If the second main game side is also configured to execute the pre-reading lottery, the same process may be performed for the second main game content determination random number.

  As described above, in the third modification from the second embodiment, the variation mode random number at the time of acquiring (or at the time of holding) the main game content determination random number (first main game content determination random number or second main game content determination random number) It is configured to determine the delimiter information and the variation mode group.

  It should be noted that the main game content determination random number information, the success / failure random number division information, the variation mode random number division information and the variation mode group information may be transmitted to the secondary control board S at the timing when the suspension occurs. Information to be transmitted to the side of the sub control board S is not limited to this, information related to the stop symbol of the main game symbol, information related to the profit mode of the main game symbol to be a big hit (special according to the main game symbol to be stopped The number of rounds of game, etc., and the number of reservations immediately after the holding prize (only the number of holdings on the first main game side or the second main game side), both the first main game side and the second main game side May be configured to be able to transmit information pertaining to the number of reservations, etc.) {with or without random number division information, each gaming state on the first main game side (second main game side) and a random number value (Or random number value range) and the result of the lottery It is one of the grouped random number division information, for example, in the probability change gaming state or the non-probability change gaming state, even if it is lost, even in the probability change gaming state or the non-probability change gaming state If it is a probability change gaming state, it is a hit, but if it is a non-probability fluctuation gaming state, a grouping such as a loss can be mentioned}.

  Next, in step 1331, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the second main game start opening ball insertion information has been received from the second main game start opening ball detection device B11s. In the case of Yes in step 1331, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1332 whether or not the holding balls for the main game (particularly, the second main game side) are not the upper limit (for example, four). If Yes in step 1332, in step 1333, the CPUMC of the main control board M acquires a second main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as the second main game content determination random number, similarly to the first main game symbol determination means, three random numbers of a winning lottery random number, a symbol lottery random number, and a variation aspect lottery random number are acquired. By the way, the acquisition range of each random number of the first main game content determination random number and the acquisition range of each random number of the second main game content determination random number (for example, the lottery random number for the first main game and the lottery random number for the second main game Acquisition range of) is set to the same. Next, in step 1334, the CPU MC of the main control board M temporarily stores (holds) the acquired second main game content determination random number. Next, in step 1335, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the special game execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1335, in step 1337, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in advance the result of the acceptance and the stop symbol relating to the stored suspension based on the suspension information (e.g. Next, in step 1338, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting the command regarding the newly generated pending yes / no result and the stop symbol information to the sub main control unit SM. (Sent to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing of step 1999). Next, in step 1339, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines, based on the suspension information (variation mode determination random number), the variation mode random number delimiter information and the variation mode group (non-time variation mode group and time variation) The mode group is determined in advance (for the variation mode random number division information and the variation mode group, refer to the main game table 3 in FIG. 44), and the process shifts to step 1340.

  In the case of No at step 1335, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines at step 1336 whether or not the main game time short flag is off. In the case of Yes at step 1336, control is passed to step 1340. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1336, the process proceeds to step 1337.

  Next, in step 1340, the CPU MC of the main control board M controls the sub main control command (the second main game content determination random number hold generation command, the command relating to the variation mode random number division information, etc.) The command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the unit SM is set (sent to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing of step 1999), and the process proceeds to the next processing (processing of step 1400). In addition, also in the case of No in step 1331 or step 1332, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1400).

  Here, the main game table 3 shown in FIGS. 43 and 44 is an example of a first main game change mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (a second main game change mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B). As shown in the figure, in the third modification from the second embodiment, the variation pattern (variation time) of the main gaming symbol with respect to a random number value based on the main lottery result of the main gaming symbol, the main gaming time short flag state. Are configured so that they can be determined. For example, with regard to a random number value, when the main lottery is a winning or losing lottery result, it is easy to determine the fluctuation mode in which the fluctuation time is relatively long, when the main game time short flag is on (time reduction game In the state (1), a variation mode in which the variation time is relatively short is easily determined. Note that this example is just an example and is not limited at all to the type of the variation mode (variation time) or the selectivity. In addition, the symbol variation time of the first main game may be relatively long in the time shortening gaming state (when the main game short flag is on) {symbol variation on the second main game When it is configured to be advantageous for the player to be executed, it is easy for the second main game side to be suspended by lowering the symbol variation efficiency on the first main game side (as it is advantageous for the player) In order to construct a situation, it is particularly effective when the starting opening on the first main game side and the starting opening on the second main game side can not be separated. In addition, in FIG. 43 and FIG. 44, although fluctuation mode random number division | segmentation information and fluctuation mode group are provided in all the situations (playing state etc.), it is not limited to this, The situation which transmits to the sub control board S side In the case where is limited, the variation mode random number delimiter information or the variation mode group may be provided only in that case. For example, on the first main game side, the variation mode random number division information and the variation mode group are not provided in the time shortening gaming state, and on the second main game side, the variation mode random number in the non-time shortening gaming state It may be configured not to provide the separation information and the variation mode group. Also, in the non-time shortening gaming state, the prefetch lottery is not executed for the second main gaming side holding, and in the time shortening gaming state, the first lottery is not executed for the first main gaming side holding It may be configured. In such a case, it is preferable that the hold on the second main game side be digested prior to the hold on the first main game side. In addition, the table referred to in “when lost, time reduced game” in FIG. 43 may be configured such that the fluctuation time is determined without depending on the number of reservations (all the numbers of reservations 0 to 3 are the same) Refer to the table of contents). In addition, the table referred to in “when lost, non-time shortened game” in FIG. 44 may be configured such that the fluctuation time is determined without depending on the number of reservations (all the numbers of reservations 0 to 3 are the same) Refer to the table of contents)

  Further, as shown in the present example, in the third modification from the second embodiment, the variation mode group is configured to be determined by the variation mode determination random number. The variation mode group is determined to be group 1 (group A) when the variation time of the main gaming symbol is short, and is set to group 3 (group C) when the variation period of the main gaming symbol is long It is configured to be easily done (when it does not correspond to any group, it becomes group 2 (group B)). Note that, in the third modification example from the second embodiment, only the hold determined to the group C or the group B can be put on hold (trigger hold) serving as a trigger for generating a prefetch effect.

  Incidentally, although the storage of the first main game content determination random number and the storage of the second main game content determination random number are executed in step 1324 and step 1334, the main game content determination is made in the storage area of the main control board M RAM. When storing the random number, a dedicated storage area is secured, and only information related to the "main game content determination random number" is stored in the byte storing the information related to the main game content determination random number (various types It is preferable to configure so as not to store other information such as a timer value etc. (When operating another data stored in the same 1 byte, the information related to the main game content determination random number is rewritten due to noise etc. To prevent it). In addition, with regard to the lottery random number, the change in the gaming state (the gaming state relating to the suspension recorded already) is obtained during the period from when the lottery random number is obtained to when the lottery for the Not only the change but also a change in the gaming state may occur due to the newly generated suspension, so the gaming state at the time of the execution of the lottery for the lottery random number may be unpredictable. It is comprised so that the said lottery random number may be memorize | stored until it performs. In the third modification from the second embodiment, the command to the sub main control unit SM related to the information of suspension can be transmitted only at the time of suspension occurrence related to the first main game in the non-time shortening gaming state In the time-saving gaming state, it is configured to be able to transmit only when the holding occurrence related to the second main game is made, but it is the holding related to the first main game whether it is the holding related to the first main game regardless of which gaming state Regardless of whether or not the command may be transmitted, the sub main control unit SM may be configured to determine whether to use the received command in such a case. You may In the third modification from the second embodiment, when the first main game content determination random number is stored, the special game is not executed, and the non-time-saving gaming state is newly established. It is comprised so that the information regarding a stop result and the fluctuation | variation mode group may be transmitted to the sub-control board S side as a result of the success or failure concerning holding. Further, when the second main game content determination random number is stored, the special game is being executed, or the time reduction gaming state is performed, and in the case of the result of a new hold-on / off result, the stop pattern, the change mode group Information is transmitted to the sub control board S side. In addition, a small hit may be provided, and in such a configuration, when a small hit is being executed, a new hold related to the first main game content determination random number is acquired. Result of the success or failure, stop symbol, information about the variation mode group is not sent to the secondary control board S side, the result regarding the suspension or failure condition concerning the new suspension when the second main game content decision random number is acquired, information about the variation symbol group Is configured to transmit to the side of the sub control board S, and when the small hit is not executed, the result of a decision regarding the new hold when the first main game content determination random number is obtained, the stop pattern, the variation mode Information on the group is sent to the side of the secondary control board S. The result of a new hold when the second main game content determination random number is obtained is the result of a decision on stoppage and change pattern group on the side of the secondary control board S. Sending It may be configured so that it does not.

  Next, FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the pending information management process according to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. 19 in the third modification example from the second embodiment. First, at step 2102, whether or not the CPUSC of the sub control board S receives a command relating to a new hold occurrence from the main control board M side (pending information pertaining to the first main gaming symbol or the second main gaming symbol) Determine If Yes in step 2102, in step 2104, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a rendering hold counter (in this example, a maximum of four for the first main game and a maximum of four for the second main game). Add 1 ". Next, in step 2106 (second modification 3), the CPUSC of the sub control board S suspends the command related to the new suspension success / failure result and the stop symbol information transmitted from the main control board M side The temporary control information is temporarily stored in the area for temporarily storing the information related to the suspension of the sub control board S side. Next, in step 2107 (the second modification), the CPUSC of the sub control board S uses the hold generation command transmitted from the main control board M side to hold information (in particular, variation mode group, variation mode random number delimiter information , Etc.) are temporarily stored in the pending information temporary storage area. In the case where the main control board M side does not transmit information relating to the acceptance result, the stop pattern, the variation mode group, and the variation mode random number division information, step 2106 (the second modification 3) or step 2107 (the second In 2) and 3), the information is not temporarily stored in the pending information temporary storage area. Next, in step 2117 (second modification 3), the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the new hold is a hold on the second main game side. If Yes in step 2117 (second change 3), in step 2150 (second change 3), the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a winning pre-winning determination process at the time of winning, which will be described later, and step 2118 (second change 3 Move to). Next, in step 2118 (the second modification 3), the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the information indicating that the trigger is suspended is added to the new suspension, in other words, the new suspension is triggered It is determined whether or not it is on hold. In the third modification example from the second embodiment, information indicating that the trigger is on hold is added to the on-hold for which the pre-reading lottery has been won, and is added in the process of step 2170. If Yes in step 2118 (second variant 3), the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes pre-reading effect contents determination processing described later in step 2250 (second variant 3), and step 2116 (second variant 3) Move to). Incidentally, also in the case of No in step 2117 (second change 3) (when the new hold is a hold on the second main game side) or in the case of No in step 2118 (second change 3), step 2116 (the second change 3). Move to the second modification 3).

  On the other hand, if No in step 2102, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the symbol variation display start instruction command has been received from the main control board M side in step 2108. If Yes in step 2108, in step 2110, the CPUSC of the sub control board S subtracts “1” from the counter value of the coating holding counter. Next, in step 2112 (the second modification 3), the CPUSC of the sub control board S holds the suspension information related to the symbol variation (in particular, the result of the pass / fail, stop symbol information, the variation mode group and the variation mode random number delimiter information) While deleting from the drawing hold information temporary storage area, the remaining hold information is shifted. Next, in step 2114, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the symbol content determination permission flag, and proceeds to step 2116 (second modification 3). Also in the case of No in step 2108, the processing shifts to step 2116 (second modification 3).

  Next, in step 2116 (the second modification), the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the drawing hold counter value on the effect display device SG (in particular, on the first hold display unit SG12 and the second hold display unit SG13). The same number of pending display images are displayed on the effect display device SG in the pending display mode (if the pending display mode does not change, the pending display mode turns white), and the next process (step 2300 Transition to processing). Incidentally, the display of the hold on the side of the sub control substrate S may be to display the hold image object on the effect display device SG or to turn on the LED corresponding to the hold.

  Next, FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the winning pre-reading determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2150 (second modification 3) in FIG. 45 in the third modification from the second embodiment. First, in step 2154, the CPUSC of the secondary control board S determines whether or not the current gaming state is in the time-saving game. As described above, in the third modification from the second embodiment, since it is configured to be able to execute the pre-winning lottery at the time of winning in the time reduction gaming state, the probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state and the non-probability fluctuation It will be possible to execute the prefetch lottery in the gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, that is, it is possible to execute the prefetching effect over the probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state from the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state There is. If Yes in step 2154, in step 2155, the CPUSC of the sub control board S holds the new hold at a time before the last pattern change of the final change (short time final change) of the time-saving gaming state. Whether or not there is, in other words, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading effect is finished by the end of the symbol change one time before the time reduction gaming state. That is, in the third modification from the second embodiment, the pre-reading effect is not executed in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the final fluctuation (time reduction final fluctuation) of the time shortening gaming state. If Yes in step 2155, in step 2156, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not there is a big hit pending for the pending to be digested before the new pending. If Yes in step 2156, in step 2158, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not all the pendings to be digested before the new pendings are digested is the pending of the group A. If Yes in step 2158, in step 2162, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether the new hold is a hold of the group C or not. If the result of step 2162 is YES, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a prize prefetch lottery at the time of winning with a predetermined probability A (for example, 1/3) in step 2163 and shifts to step 2168. The predetermined probability A may not be 1/3, and by changing the predetermined probability A, it is possible to adjust the degree of expectation of becoming a big hit by symbol variation serving as a trigger for performing the prefetch effect. On the other hand, if No in step 2162, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines in step 2164 whether the new hold is a hold of the group B or not. If Yes in step 2164, in step 2166, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a pre-winning lottery at the time of winning with a predetermined probability B (a probability lower than the predetermined probability A described above, eg, 1/40). And go to step 2168. Thus, the probability of winning is relatively higher when group C is on hold than when group B is on hold. Further, in the third modification example from the second embodiment, when the newly generated hold is the hold of the group A, the advance look-up lottery at the time of winning is not executed for the newly generated hold. It is configured. The present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible that the winning pre-selection lottery may be executed even for the suspension of the group A, in which case the probability of winning the pre-winning lottery at the time of winning is “group C> group B> You may comprise so that it may become "group A." On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2164 (ie, when the new suspension is suspension of group A), the next process {the process of step 2118 (the second modification 3) is performed without executing the prize pre-selection lottery at the time of winning} Migrate to

  Next, in step 2168, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the winning pre-selection lottery performed in step 2163 or step 2166 is won. In the case of Yes in step 2168, in step 2170, the CPUSC of the sub control board S adds information to the effect that "trigger is on hold" to the new on-hold holding information that has been won in the executed pre-winning lottery. It temporarily stores in the RAM area of the control board S, and shifts to the next processing {processing of step 2118 (second modification 3)}. Even in the case of No at step 2154, step 2155, step 2156, step 2158 or step 2168, the process proceeds to the next processing {processing of step 2118 (second modification 3)}. Here, the trigger hold is a hold on which the winning pre-selection lottery is won and is a hold serving as a trigger for a pre-reading effect described later.

In the present embodiment, the configuration regarding pre-reading may be configured as follows.
(1) Similar to the limited frequency B state in the present embodiment, in the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, the limited frequency is transitioned to three stages {a state where the limited frequency table 1 is referred to (limited frequency B1 ) → When the limited frequency table 2 is referred to (the limited frequency B2) → when the limited frequency table 3 is referred to (the limited frequency B3)}, the symbol in the limited frequency B2 is changed from the final variation to the next symbol The look-ahead effect may be executed over the first symbol variation in the limited frequency B3 which is a variation (in the case where the limited frequency B3 ends with only one variation, this indicates one variation) (limited frequency B2 In such a situation, the prefetch lottery may be executed for the reserve to be digested after transitioning to the limited frequency B3), and the final variation (probability change) in the limited frequency B3 is It is the final change in the gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, and when the limitation frequency B3 ends with only 1 change, it indicates the one change, and the next pattern change is the non-probability change gaming state. And the pre-reading effect is not executed over the symbol fluctuation in non time shortening game state (with respect to the reservation which will be digested after transitioning to non probability changing game state and non time shortening game state in the situation which is limited frequency B3 Look-ahead lottery is not executed). That is, in the final change in the limited frequency B2, the look-ahead effect may be executed over the subsequent symbol changes, but the final change in the limited frequency B3 (if the limited frequency B3 ends with only one change, the one change is Shows that the look-ahead effect is not executed over the subsequent symbol variation.
(2) Similar to the limited frequency B state in the present embodiment, in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, the state of referring to the limited frequency table 1 which makes the limited frequency transition to three stages {(limited frequency B1 and State of referring to the limited frequency table 2 (referred to as a limited frequency B2) → a state of referring to the limited frequency table 3 (referred to as a limited frequency B3)}, from the final fluctuation in the limited frequency B2 to the next The look-ahead effect may be executed over the first symbol variation in the limitation frequency B3 which is the symbol variation (in the case where the limitation frequency B3 ends with only one variation, this indicates one variation) (limit frequency) In the situation that is B2, it is configured to be able to execute a look-ahead lottery for a reserve reserved to be digested after transitioning to the limited frequency B3), and the final variation (probability) in the limited frequency B3 It is the final change in the moving game state and the time shortening game state, and when the limited frequency B3 is ended by only 1 change, it indicates the one change, and the next pattern change is the non-probability change game. Pre-reading effect is not executed over the symbol fluctuation in state and non time shortening game state (with respect to the reservation which will be digested after transitioning to non probability change gaming state and non time shortening game state in the situation which is limited frequency B3 Pre-reading lottery is not executed). That is, in the final change in the limited frequency B2, the look-ahead effect may be executed over the subsequent symbol changes, but the final change in the limited frequency B3 (if the limited frequency B3 ends with only one change, the one change is Shows that the look-ahead effect is not executed over the subsequent symbol variation.

  As described above, in the third modification from the second embodiment, only the hold pertaining to the second main game can be the trigger hold pertaining to the prefetching effect when in the time-saving gaming state, but it is configured to the last For example, the present invention is not limited to this, and the hold on the first main gaming side, which has occurred during the non-time-saving gaming state, may also be a trigger hold. In addition, it is configured to execute the look-ahead lottery at the time of winning when the reserve to be digested prior to the newly created reserve is not a big-hit reserve and all are reserve for group A. The present invention may be configured not to be limited, and even when there is a hold that will be a big hit for a hold to be digested prior to a newly generated hold, it may be configured to execute a look-ahead lottery at the time of winning, in which case the profit is relative to the player. If the jackpot is low (for example, an 8R jackpot and the gaming state after the end of the special game is a non-probability fluctuation gaming state jackpot) or related to a newly generated hold than the jackpot executed earlier If the jackpot is a relatively high-profit jackpot (such as a large number of execution rounds), it may be possible to carry out a look-ahead lottery at the time of winning. In the present embodiment, the arrangement is such that the pre-winning lottery at the time of winning is executed only for the holding of the group B and the group C, but may be performed in all the groups. In that case, the winning probability of the winning prediction lottery of group A may be the lowest probability (for example, 1/80). In addition, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the winning pre-reading lottery is executed when there is no “trigger hold” within the hold which is taken before the new hold.

  Moreover, in the example 3 of a change from 2nd Embodiment, although it comprised so that only the prefetch lottery at the time of a prize could be performed as a prefetch lottery, it is not limited to this, You may be comprised so that a prefetch lottery may be performed also to timing. Specifically, for example, in response to the suspension of group C that did not win the prize look-ahead draw, it is possible to execute a look-ahead draw again (a look-ahead draw at a fluctuation stop) at the time of stopping symbol variation thereafter. Good.

  Next, FIG. 47 is a flowchart of pre-reading effect contents determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2250 (second modification 3) of FIG. 45 in the third modification example from the second embodiment. First, in step 2252, the CPUSC of the sub control board S refers to the pre-reading effect type determination table and determines pre-reading effect type by lottery. Here, the upper right row in the same figure is an example of the look-ahead effect type determination table, and pre-read effects in the third modification example from the second embodiment are divided into three effect types of effect type A, effect type B, and effect type C The pre-reading effect to be executed is determined by the contents of the table. Although each effect type is configured to be drawn equally equally, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, according to the expectation for becoming a big hit by the fluctuation related to the advance effect, the selection rate of the effect type May be configured to change (if the jackpot expectation is high, effect type C is likely to be selected, etc.).

  Next, in step 2254, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines in advance the success or failure of the trigger suspension based on the gaming state and the suspension information (e.g. Next, in step 2256, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines, based on the above-mentioned determination result, whether or not the trigger suspension serving as the trigger for the prefetch effect is a jackpot. In the case of Yes in step 2256, the CPUSC of the sub control board S draws the hold display mode of trigger hold with reference to the table for the big hit time of the hold display mode determination table in step 2258 based on the determined prefetch effect type. And step 2268 is performed. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2256, in other words, when the trigger hold is a hold that causes a loss, at step 2260, the CPUSC of the sub control board S loses the hold display mode determination table based on the determined prefetch effect type. The hold display mode of the trigger hold is determined by drawing with reference to the time table, and the process moves to step 2268.

  Here, the lower right of the same figure is an example of a pending display mode determination table, and in the third modification of the second embodiment, the pending display mode is determined by a random number. Further, when there is no hold change, the hold display mode is displayed in white regardless of the random value. In addition, rainbow color is comprised so that it may be selected only by the hold concerning big hit.

  Next, in step 2268, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the determined pre-reading effect type is the pre-reading effect type (in this example, effect type B and effect type C) for executing the background effect. Do. If Yes in step 2268, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the background rendering execution flag in step 2270, and shifts to the next processing {processing of step 2116 (second modification 3)}. Also in the case of No at step 2268, the process proceeds to the next processing {processing of step 2116 (second modification 3)}. It should be noted that a plurality of hold change effects may be executed during execution of the pre-reading effect (from the timing of winning the pre-reading lottery to the end of fluctuation of the main gaming symbol relating to trigger hold). When configured in this way, for example, when the hold change effect is executed twice during the pre-reading effect, if the display mode of the hold that changes in the first hold change effect is "blue", The display mode of the hold changing in the second hold change effect is set to “green” or “red”, that is, changes to the display mode with a high expectation of the big hit expectancy every time the hold change effect is executed It is desirable to configure to (rank up) (in order not to impair the player's sense of expectation). In addition, the effect relating to the pending display change is not limited to this, and as a result, a presentation mode without accompanying the pending display change may be provided. For example, the pending may shake at the start of fluctuation (or upon pending withdrawal). An effect may be provided, and an effect aspect (so-called, cassette pattern) in which the hold display does not change as it is may be provided, and an effect mode in which the hold display change is subsequently executed.

  Next, FIG. 48 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2300 of FIG. 19 in the third modification example from the second embodiment. The point of change from the second embodiment is step 2350 (the second modification), that is, in step 2306, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the stop pattern and the variation mode of the decorative symbol, and the sub control board S In step 2350 (second modification), the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes effect content determination processing, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2308.

  Next, FIG. 49 is a flowchart of effect content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2350 (second modification 3) in FIG. 48 in the third modification example from the second embodiment. First, in step 2352, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the background rendering execution flag (a flag that is turned on when background rendering is a background only at prefetching as prefetching rendering) is off. If Yes in step 2352, in step 2354, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not trigger hold exists in the hold. If Yes in step 2354, in step 2356, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not it is in the time shortening gaming state. If Yes in step 2356, in step 2358, the CPUSC of the secondary control board S determines whether or not it is not the final change in the time-saving gaming state. If Yes in step 2358, in step 2360, the CPUSC of the sub control board S shortens the contents of the presentation based on the variation pattern of the main gaming symbol. After the end of the 1st to 100th fluctuation), it is decided that the special effect of the 1st variation limitation is executed}, and it shifts to Step 2366. Next, in step 2366, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command to display "background for non-prefetching" as the background effect during the change (in the display command transmission control process of step 2999, the sub sub control unit It is transmitted to the SS side, and the process proceeds to the next process (2308 process of step). Here, “non-prefetching background” means that pre-reading effect is not executed, or pre-reading effect is being executed, but “no background effect” is determined by lottery at step 2252 (ie, When the effect type A is determined as the pre-read effect type, the background effect is displayed. In the third modification example from the second embodiment, when the prefetch lottery is won, the background effect and / or the hold change effect are executed as the advance effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. If you win the pre-reading lottery, as a pre-reading effect, stop the display mode of the decorative symbol will stop at the chance eyes (the decorative symbol shows a loss show, but in all three columns stop display mode such as odd or all even It is an indication to notify that trigger hold may exist in unfinished hold by stopping operation, for example, odd chance chance of trigger hold possibility or jackpot expectation degree of trigger hold Is relatively high). In such a configuration, the chance eye can be stopped even when the trigger hold does not exist, and the trigger hold can not exist when the chance eye stops. By doing this, it is possible to increase the appearance probability of the chance eyes and to make the player have a sense of expectation frequently.

  Here, the lower right of the figure is a background effect display image view. As shown in the image diagram, the background for non-prefetching is the background for daytime, and the background only for prefetching is the background for night (displayed as “prefetching zone”), and the player holds It is comprised so that it can be alert | reported whether the trigger pending | hold exists in the inside. In the present embodiment, when the background rendering execution flag is ON, a background dedicated to prefetching is displayed, and when the background rendering execution flag is OFF, a background for non-prefetching is displayed.

  In the case of No at step 2352, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines at step 2368 whether the change is a change relating to trigger suspension. In the case of Yes in step 2368, in step 2370, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines effect contents (for example, story effect etc.) dedicated to trigger hold and digestion based on the fluctuation mode of the main game symbol. Next, in step 2372, the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns off the background rendering execution flag, and proceeds to step 2376.

  On the other hand, if No in step 2368, the CPUSC of the sub control board S in step 2374 based on the variation mode of the main gaming symbol, dedicated rendering contents prior to trigger suspension (for example, effects for displaying countdown to trigger suspension) ) And proceeds to step 2376 (hereinafter, the effect of displaying a countdown to trigger reserve consumption may be referred to as a countdown effect).

  Next, in step 2376, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command to display "pre-read only background" as the background effect during the change (in the display command transmission control process of step 2999, the sub sub control unit SS Sent to the side, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2308).

  On the other hand, if No in step 2354 or step 2356, in step 2364, the CPUSC of the secondary control board S determines the contents of the effect based on the variation mode of the main game symbol, and shifts to the processing of step 2366. If No in step 2358, the CPUSC of the sub control board S shortens the contents of the presentation in step 2362 based on the variation pattern of the main gaming symbol. At (the 100th change after the end of the big hit), it is decided that the special effect of the one variation limitation is executed}, and the process shifts to the processing of step 2366. As described above, in the third modification from the second embodiment, the pre-reading effect is not executed in the final change in the time saving gaming state, and the final variation dedicated effect for the time shortening gaming state is executed. .

  In the third modification example from the second embodiment, different effect contents are provided by the effect contents for exclusive use at the trigger hold and the effect contents before exclusive for the trigger hold, but the present invention is not limited to this, and similar effects It may be content. Further, in the fluctuation relating to the trigger hold, both of the effect contents for exclusive use before the trigger hold end and the effect contents for exclusive use at the trigger hold end may be executed.

  By configuring as described above, in the gaming machine according to the third modification from the second embodiment, the probability fluctuation gaming state is terminated by execution of a predetermined number of symbol fluctuations, the final fluctuation of the time saving gaming state, ie, In the final variation of the non-probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, by configuring to execute the exclusive effect of one variation limitation, it is possible to improve the interest in the time shortening gaming state.

  In the third modification from the second embodiment, a common effect is obtained between the final fluctuation of the probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state and the next fluctuation (the first fluctuation of the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state). While the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state final fluctuation, the common effect will not be executed. In addition, it is possible to execute across the pre-read effect over the final fluctuation of the probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state and the next fluctuation (the first fluctuation of the non probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state), but the non probability It is configured not to execute across pre-reading effects across the last variation of the non-probable variation gaming state and the time-saving gaming state before the first variation of the final variation of the changing gaming state and the time-saving gaming state.

(Modification 4 from the second embodiment)
In the third modification from the second embodiment, in the gaming machine in which the probability variation gaming state is ended by execution of the predetermined number of symbol variations, the time shortening gaming state in the configuration in which the number of time reductions is greater than the number of probability variations Although an example was demonstrated about the presentation aspect performed, the structure of such a game machine is not limited to the structure of the example 3 of a change from 2nd Embodiment. Therefore, a configuration different from the third modification of the second embodiment is referred to as a fourth modification of the second embodiment, and only the changes from the third modification of the second embodiment will be described in detail.

  First, FIG. 50 is a flowchart of effect content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2350 (second modification 3) of FIG. 48 in the fourth modification example from the second embodiment. First, change points from the third modification example from the second embodiment are step 2378 (second change 4) to step 2382 (second change 4). That is, after determining that the CPUSC of the sub control board S is in the time shortening gaming state in step 2356, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the number of remaining time reductions (time shortening game) in step 2378 (second change 4). It is the remaining number of fluctuations until the state ends, and it is determined whether or not the count value of the time reduction number counter MP52c is equal to or more than a predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times). If Yes in step 2378 (the second change), the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes in the first half of the time-saving gaming state based on the change pattern of the main gaming symbol in the step 2380 (the second change). The content of the effect is determined from a plurality of effect candidates (including at least a cut-in effect and not including the remaining number suggestive effect), and the process moves to step 2366. It should be noted that the processing of step 2380 (second variation 4) and the processing of step 2383 (second variation 4), that is, the case where the remaining time reduction is 30 times or more and the remaining time reduction is less than 30 times, the time shortening gaming state The table referred to in determining the variation mode of the main gaming symbol in the case of not being the final variation of is the same (the selection tendency of the variation time is the same). In addition, in the final change in the time reduction gaming state, as a plurality of effect candidates of the effect contents to be executed, it is a production candidate that performs the remaining frequency suggestive effect but does not perform the cut-in effect, and the main game symbol The table to be referred to when determining the variation mode is different from the case where the time-saving gaming state is not the final variation of the time-saving gaming state (the selection tendency of the variation time is different). In addition, the above-mentioned composition becomes a composition applicable also when it is a loss, also when a lottery result of a main game symbol is a hit.

  On the other hand, if No in step 2378 (the second modification), that is, if the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines that the time saving remaining number is not more than the predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times) (the time saving remaining number is less than 30) If it is determined, in step 2382 (second change 4), the CPUSC of the sub control board S, based on the variation mode of the main gaming symbol, the effect contents to be executed in the second half of the time-saving gaming state It is determined from at least the cut-in effect and the remaining number suggestive effect), and the process moves to step 2366.

  By configuring as described above, in the gaming machine according to the fourth modification from the second embodiment in which the probability variation gaming state is terminated by execution of the predetermined number of symbol variations, the final variation of the time saving gaming state, ie, Although the selection tendency of the variation pattern of the main gaming symbol is different between the final variation of the non-probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state and the one-time variation of the final variation of the time shortening gaming state, common effects are executed It is configured to earn. In addition, the production tendency of the time reduction gaming state is different from 70% after the big hit to the first half of the change, and from 71th to 100th change after the big hit from the second half of the short time (the second half of the short). (For example, while cut-in effects may be performed in the first half of the time but countdown effects are not performed, countdown effects may be performed in the second half of the time but cut-in effects are not performed) Even in the state and time reduction gaming state, the selection tendency (referenced variation mode determination table) of the variation mode is the same between the symbol variation one time before the short final variation and the symbol variation 35 times before the short final variation. Despite the presence of different rendering tendencies being performed, or the presence or absence of a specific rendering (for example, the remaining number of suggested renderings or cut-in renderings) It is configured to differ. In addition, you may be comprised so that the said specific presentation may not be performed in the symbol change of 1 time before the time reduction final change or the time reduction final change.

In addition, in this example, you may comprise as follows as a structure regarding the presentation performed in time shortening gaming state.
(1) Similar to the limited frequency B state in this embodiment, when transitioning to the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state after the special game is over, the limited frequency is shifted to three stages {see the limited frequency table 1 { State (referred to as restricted frequency B1) → state referred to restricted frequency table 2 (referred to as restricted frequency B2) → state referred to the restricted frequency table 3 (referred to as restricted frequency B3)} The cut-in effect may be executed at the time of the symbol change more than a predetermined number of times which is less than the number of stays of the limited frequency B2 (the number of symbol variations from the start to the end of the limited frequency B2) from the final change in B2. It is configured not to execute the remaining number suggestive effect, and the number of stay of the limited frequency B2 from the final change in the limited frequency B2 (from the start to the end of the limited frequency B2 In symbol time fluctuations within the predetermined number is fewer than the pattern change number), may be performed also the remaining number of suggested effect cut-in effect. In addition, in the limited frequency B3, the cut-in effect is not performed, but the remaining number suggestive effect may be performed. In addition, the above-mentioned composition is composition which is applicable also when it is a loss, also when a lottery result of a main game design is a hit.
(2) Similar to the limited frequency B state in this embodiment, when transitioning to the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state after the end of the special game, the limited frequency is shifted to three stages {limit frequency table 1 When configured to refer to the state to be referred (referred to as limited frequency B1) → the state to refer to limited frequency table 2 (referred to as limited frequency B2) → the state to refer to limited frequency table 3 (referred to as limited frequency B3)} The cut-in effect can be executed at the time of the symbol fluctuation more than a predetermined number of times which is less than the number of stays of the limited frequency B2 (the number of symbol variations from the start to the end of the limited frequency B2) from the final change in the frequency B2. Is configured so that the remaining number of times suggestive effect is not executed, the number of times of stay of the limited frequency B2 from the final change in the limited frequency B2 (from the start to the end of the limited frequency B2 In symbol time fluctuations within the predetermined number is fewer than the symbol variation count) may be performed also the remaining number of suggested effect cut-in effect. In addition, in the limited frequency B3, the cut-in effect is not performed, but the remaining number suggestive effect may be performed. In addition, the above-mentioned composition is composition which is applicable also when it is a loss, also when a lottery result of a main game design is a hit.

Third Embodiment
In the present embodiment, an example of the gaming machine configured to shift to the limited frequency state after the big hit is illustrated, but the configuration of such a gaming machine is not limited to the present embodiment. Therefore, a configuration different from that of the third embodiment is taken as a third embodiment, and only differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail.

  First, FIG. 51 is an example of the main game tables 1 to 3 according to the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, the jackpot probability in the probability fluctuation gaming state is designed to be “22/1022”. Although the details will be described later, it is possible to adjust the probability of winning a big hit in the probability variation gaming state by changing the big hit probability. Also, it is not designed to shift to the probability fluctuation gaming state after the big hit end concerning "4A" or "4B", that is, to shift to the probability fluctuation gaming state after all the big hit ends.

  Next, FIG. 52 is a flowchart of the limited frequency B fluctuation mode determination process according to the subroutine of step 1500 of FIG. 9 in the third embodiment. The point of change from the present embodiment is steps 1502 (third) and step 1506 (third). First, in step 1502 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M is controlled by the limited frequency B counter MN 52c-2. The counter value G is within the range of the first step (within the range of the counter value of the limited frequency B counter MN52c-2 which is the first step in the limited frequency state having three steps, 80 ≧ G> 50). Determine if there is. In the case of Yes in step 1502 (third), the variation mode of the main gaming symbol is determined with reference to the limited frequency table 1 in step 1504, and in the case of No, the process moves to step 1506 (third). Next, in step 1506 (third), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the counter value G of the limited frequency B counter MN 52c-2 within the second stage range (two stages in the limited frequency state having three stages). It is determined whether or not it is within the range of the counter value of the limited frequency B counter MN 52c-2 to be an eye, and 50 ≧ G> 10). In the case of Yes in step 1506 (the third), the variation mode of the main gaming symbol is determined with reference to the limited frequency table 2 in step 1508, and in the case of No, the main is performed with reference to the limited frequency table 3 in step 1510 Determine the variation pattern of the game pattern.

  Next, FIG. 53 is an example of the limited frequency tables 1 to 3 according to the third embodiment. The contents of the limited frequency tables 1 to 3 have the same configuration as that of the present embodiment, so the description will be omitted. In the third embodiment, the counter value of the limited frequency B counter MN 52 c-2 when referring to the limited frequency tables 1 to 3 is different from that of the present embodiment.

In the third embodiment, the configuration of the limited frequency may be configured as follows.
(1) In the case of determining the fluctuation time of the first main game symbol in the limited frequency state (limited frequency A state or limited frequency B state) (the first main game symbol fluctuates), the first main game side The content of the limited frequency table 2 related to the first main game symbol is the first main game regardless of the number of holdings, that is, even when determining the variation time of the first main game symbol with reference to the limited frequency table 2 It is configured not to depend on the number of reservations on the side (for example, regardless of the number of reservations on the first main game side, refer to the table in the case where the number of reservations of limited frequency table 2 in FIG. 13 is 0 or 1). Will be
(2) In the limited frequency table 1 as well as the limited frequency table 2, the contents of the table to be referred to may differ depending on the number of reservations (number of reservations on the second main game side).
(3) When shifting to the limit frequency B state, the limit frequency table to be first referred to may be the limit frequency table 2.
(4) For the part where the same time value is obtained in the table referred to in the case of hit and the table referred to in the case of loss in FIG. For example, with regard to the limited frequency table 3, 5 seconds is selected for both the hit case and the loss case, but for the limited frequency table 3, 6 cases are selected for the hit case. It may be configured to be seconds, and in the case of a loss, to be 5 seconds. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to secure time for notifying the player that it is a hit.
(5) The period for referring to the limited frequency table 3 may be a plurality of variations (preferably less than 10 variations). For example, when the limited frequency counter value is 1 to 5, the limited frequency table 3 is referred to You may
(6) Each table in the figure (all tables referred to in the case of limited frequency tables 1 to 3, hit time, lost time, hold 0 to 1, hold 2 to 3, 16 The variation time candidate may be incremented one by one for any of the tables, for example, all the tables may be configured to have two or more variation time candidates. In such a configuration, a time value twice as long as the longest time value of each table may be added as an example of the time value to be added, and the random value range in that case is the longest value. The random value range of the time value which becomes may be halved. For example, when changing the table contents at the time of the loss of the second main game side in the limited frequency table 1, "random number 0 to 799 → 1 second", "random number 800 to 911 → 3 seconds", "random number "912-1023-> 6 seconds" may be configured.

Next, FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1750 (third) of FIG. 16 in the third embodiment. First, at step 1783-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M is a big hit symbol that shifts to a probability variation gaming state and a time shortening gaming state after the big hit end symbol (big hit ends, and in this example, 5A, 7A, 5B, It is determined whether it is after the big hit concerning 7B). If Yes in step 1783-1, in step 1783-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on a main game probability change flag. Next, in step 1783-3, the CPU MC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value (in this example, 80) to the probability variation counter MP51 c, and proceeds to step 1783-4. In the case of No in step 1783-1 (that is, in the case where the stopped big hit symbol is 4A or 4B which is a non-probable variation big hit), the process shifts to step 1783-4. Next, at step 1783-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value (80 in this example) to the time reduction number counter MP52c. Next, at step 1783-5, step 1783-6, and step 1783-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game time short flag, the auxiliary game time short flag, and the limited frequency B flag, respectively. Next, in step 1783-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value (80 in this example) to the limited frequency B counter MN 52c-2 and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1997). . Further, the lower part of the figure is a formula for calculating the jackpot loop rate in the probability variation gaming state. With the big hit loop rate in the probability fluctuation game state, when it shifts to the probability fluctuation game state after the big hit, it wins the big hit without ending the probability fluctuation game state, and after the big hit ends with the probability fluctuation game state The probability of becoming a {first hit (a big hit winning in a non-probable fluctuating gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state is a big hit transitioning to a probability fluctuating gaming state and time shortening gaming state after the big hit is over, probability after the big hitting end It is good also as a probability of winning a big hit again in the period which is a fluctuation gaming state and a time shortening gaming state)). It should be noted that in the probability variation gaming state (and time shortening gaming state), it is configured to change the second main gaming symbol by right-handing to proceed with the game, so only the second main gaming symbol is changed It is illustrated. In this example, the transition rate to the probability fluctuation gaming state after the big hit is “800/1024” (probability that either 5B or 7B is selected among all the big wins on the second main game side) There is also the probability of winning a big hit in the probability variation gaming state (since the number of continuations is 80 in this example, the probability of winning a big hit in any of the 80 chances to win in the probability variation gaming state) is , “1-{(1-22 / 1024) ⁸⁰ } = 0.809” (80.9%). Therefore, the big hit loop rate (%) in the probability fluctuation gaming state, that is, the probability (%) that the probability fluctuation gaming state continues, becomes “800/1024 × 0.809 × 100 = 64.4 (%) Thus, in the third embodiment, the jackpot in the probability fluctuation gaming state by the two factors of the probability of shifting to the probability fluctuation gaming state after the jackpot and the probability of winning the jackpot during the probability fluctuation gaming state The loop rate is configured to be adjustable so as not to be excessively high, and thus, by designing the big hit loop rate in the random change gaming state by a plurality of elements, the random change gaming state after the big hit ends The probability of transitioning to or the probability of winning a jackpot during the probability fluctuation gaming state can be designed to be a value higher than the jackpot loop rate in the probability fluctuation gaming state.

  Next, FIG. 55 is a flowchart of stay stage determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2600 (third) of FIG. First, in step 2624, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the stay stage switching timing {the stay stage switching timing, for example, the timing when the special game is finished (is elected), the timing when the gaming state shifts, It is determined whether the timing at which the variation mode determination table has been switched (even in the same gaming state), the timing at which the number of times of variation has reached a predetermined number, etc.}. In the case of Yes in step 2624, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines in step 2626 whether or not it is in the time shortening gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 2626, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the "space stage" as the stay stage in step 2628, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2999). If NO in step 2626, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets "empty stage" as the stay stage in step 2630, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2999). Also in the case of No at step 2624, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing of step 2999). As described above, also in the case of the probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, and also in the non probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, the "space stage" is similarly set, that is, the probability fluctuation The same effect tends to be produced between the gaming state and the time shortening gaming state and the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state. In addition, when a combination of specific decorative symbols (for example, “777” or “333”) is stopped and displayed as a big hit, even if the stay stage is “space stage”, it shifts to the probability fluctuation gaming state after the big hit ends. If the combination of decorative symbols (for example, “222” etc.) stop and display a big hit, even if the stay stage is “Space stage”, the probability after the big hit ends You may be comprised so that it may not know whether it has transfered to the fluctuation game state. In addition, the number of types of combinations of specific decorative symbols which are "777" and "333" may be configured to be smaller than the number of types of combinations of other decorative symbols such as "222" and the like.

  By configuring as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, in the gaming machine in which the probability variation gaming state is terminated by execution of the predetermined number of symbol variations, transition to the probability variation gaming state after the big hit ends A big hit and a big hit to shift to a non probability change gaming state after the big hit end, probability change by two factors of probability to shift to the probability change gaming state after the big hit end and probability to win the big hit during the probability change gaming state By configuring the jackpot loop rate in the gaming state so as not to be an excessively high value, the probability of shifting to the probability fluctuation gaming state after the jackpot end or the probability of winning the jackpot during the probability fluctuation gaming state, the probability fluctuation It can be designed to a value higher than the jackpot loop rate in the gaming state.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment may be designed as follows.
(1) The big hit probability in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state is 1 / 319.7
(2) Probability fluctuation The big hit probability in the game state is 1 / 60.96
(3) The transition rate to the probability fluctuation gaming state and time shortening gaming state after the big hit end is 80%, the number (ST number of times) of symbol fluctuation that is the probability fluctuation gaming state and time shortening gaming state is 100 times (4 ) Probability fluctuation game state after the big hit end Transition ratio to time shortening game state × probability fluctuation game state and probability of winning in the big hit within the time shortening game state = 1-(1-1 / 60.96) ¹⁰⁰ × 80/100 = 0.647
(5) A transition rate to the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and time shortening gaming state after the big hit end × non-probability fluctuation gaming state and probability of winning a big hit in the time shortening gaming state = 1− (1-1 / 319. 7) ¹⁰⁰ x 20/100 = 0.054
(6) “(4) + (5)” = 0.701 may be configured so as to be a substantial continuous ratio.

(Modification 1 from the third embodiment)
In the third embodiment, the big hit loop rate in the probability change gaming state is excessively high by the two factors of the probability of shifting to the probability change gaming state after the big hit and the probability of winning the big hit during the probability change gaming state Although an example of the gaming machine configured to be adjustable so as not to have a value has been illustrated, the configuration of such a gaming machine is not limited to the configuration of the third embodiment. Therefore, a configuration different from the third embodiment is taken as a first modification of the third embodiment, and only the changes from the third embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 56 shows an example of the main game tables 1 to 3 according to the first modification from the third embodiment. In the first modification from the third embodiment, as illustrated in the present embodiment, the game ball enters the specific area C22 provided in the big winning opening during the big hit and probability fluctuation game after the big hit ends by entering the ball It is configured to shift to the state (sometimes referred to as ball machine), long open big hit of the first main game side is "5A · 7A", long open big hit of the first main game side The probability of being selected is "524/1024", and the long opening jackpot for the second main gaming side is "5B, 7B", and the probability that the long opening jackpot for the second main gaming side is selected is "800 / 1024 ”, and the big hit on the 2nd main game side has a larger percentage of long open big hit than the big hit on the 1st main game side, that is, the 2nd main win than the big hit on the 1st main game side The game side's big hit is transferred to the probability fluctuation gaming state after the big hit It is configured easily. In addition, the number of execution rounds is 16R in all the big hit, the round where the game ball is easy to enter and the round where the game ball is difficult to enter are provided based on the big hit symbol. Here, the number of times that the game ball in the big hit is easy to enter a round is executed as the actual number of rounds, and the actual number of "2A" and "2B" is "4R", "5A" and "5B" The actual number of rounds of "8R", "7A" and "7B" is "16R".

  Next, FIG. 57 is a flowchart of special game control processing according to the subroutine of step 1700 of FIG. 4 in the first modification from the third embodiment. The changes from the third embodiment are step 1711 (third variation 1), step 17451 (third variation 1) to step 1745-8 (third variation 1), and step 1750 (third variation 1). ), That is, after the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the special game start display instruction command to the secondary control board S at step 1708, or at step 1710, the CPUMC of the main control board M If it is determined that the special game execution flag is on, in step 1711 (third modification 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the round to be executed is a round related to the opening of the second big winning opening C20. Determine if In the case of Yes in step 1711 (third modification 1), the process moves to step 1800, and in the case of No, the process moves to step 1712.

  In addition, after the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the round continuation flag in step 1718, the CPUMC of the main control board M stops the big hit symbol in the step 17451 (third modification 1). It is determined whether or not it is one long opening symbol (the first big winning opening C10 is a big hit symbol long opening, 5B, 7B, 7A). If Yes in step 17451 (third change 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the long open pattern (relative) as the open pattern of the first big winning opening C10 in step 1745-2 (third change 1) (Opening pattern) to be opened for a long time is set, and the process shifts to step 1745-4 (third modification 1). On the other hand, if No in step 17451 (third change 1) (if the big hit symbol is 2A, 5A or 2B), CPUMC of main control board M in step 1745-3 (third change 1), As the opening pattern of the first big winning opening C10, set a short opening pattern (an opening pattern that opens relatively relatively briefly, an opening pattern in which the game ball hardly enters the ball), step 1745-4 (third change 1) Migrate to Next, in step 1745-4 (third modification 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the first large winning opening C10 (the first large winning opening C10 is opened in the 14th and 16th rounds) And an open timer is started, and the process proceeds to step 1722. In the first modification from the third embodiment, the big hit symbol (long open big hit symbol) that easily enters the specific area C22 is "5A, 7A, 5B, 7B", while the first large winning opening C10 is long. The jackpot symbol (first long opening symbol) to be opened is "7A, 5B, 7B". Although details will be described later, in the first modification from the third embodiment, when the gaming ball enters the specific area C22, it does not notify that the gaming ball has entered the specific area C22, and thereafter When the game ball enters the first big winning opening C10, it is notified that the game ball has entered the specific area C22. Here, despite the fact that "5A" is a big hit symbol that easily enters the specific area C22, the first big winning opening C10 is short-opened and it is difficult for the game ball to enter the first big winning opening C10 (enter Is configured to not ball). That is, after the big hit concerning "5A", it shifts to the probability fluctuation gaming state (because it is easy to enter the specific area C22), but it is a big hit that the fact that it entered the specific area C22 is not notified, and the hidden probability change symbol It may be called.

  Further, in this example, when the game ball passes through the specific area C22, it may be configured to notify that there is a ball entry into the specific area C22. When configured as such, furthermore, in the distribution game execution round in the long open jackpot (a jackpot that makes it relatively easy to enter the specific area C22), the effect display device SG "Aim for V!" It may be configured to execute an effect (sometimes referred to as a specific area emission effect) instructing the player to shoot the game ball toward the big winning opening (sorting game execution round at all jackpots) May be performed at Also, in the first round of the distribution game execution round, an effect is issued to instruct the player to shoot the game ball toward the big winning opening like "Aim for V in the next round". It may be configured as follows. In addition, when it is configured to be able to execute the specific area launch effect in the round before the sorting game running round or the sorting game running round, the first hit (non-probability fluctuation gaming state and non-time shortening game It may be configured to make the effect mode different between the specific area emission effect in the jackpot winning in the state and the specific area emission effect in the jackpot (during the jackpot in the time-saving gaming state) or different You may comprise so that a specific area | region discharge presentation may not be performed. As an example, the specific area emission effect at the time of the first hit may be configured such that the display area of “Aim for V!” Is larger than the specific area emission effect at the time of consecutive units. In addition, ending effect {predetermined condition (for example, the condition that becomes one or a plurality of combinations of the number of consecutive acquisitions during the specific game, the total number of winning balls obtained at the time of consecutive accommodation, a plurality of types of specific effects, etc.) Even when configured to be able to execute the special game during the special game or the specific game which is displayed only when satisfied, it may be configured to be able to execute the specific area firing effect, and the ending effect is executed It may be configured to make the effect mode of the specific area emission effect performed during the big hit different from the effect mode of the specific area emission effect performed during the big hit where the ending effect is not performed, or the ending effect It may be configured not to execute the specific area launch effect during the jackpot that is being executed. As an example, the specific area emission production in the big hit where the ending production is not performed is configured such that the display area of "Aim for V!" Is larger than the specific area emission production in the big hit where the ending production is performed. You may

  After the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a game state information command (command to the effect that a special game is being played as a game state) during the special game to the side of the sub control board S in step 1722, step 1745 -5 (third change 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M is turned on by the game ball entering the specific area C22 which is turned on in the specific area entering ball flag {step 1832 (third change 1) It is determined whether or not the flag} is on. If Yes in step 1745-5 (third change 1), whether or not the CPUMC of the main control board M has detected entry into the first big winning opening C10 in step 1745-6 (third change 1) Determine if In the case of Yes in step 1745-6 (third modification 1), the CPUMC of the main control substrate M receives a specific area entry command (a command to the side of the sub control substrate S) in step 1745-7 (third modification 1). Yes, a command to the effect that the gaming ball has entered the specific area C22) is set. Next, at step 1745-8 (third modification 1), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the specific area entering flag, and proceeds to step 1724. If the result of step 1745-5 (third modification 1) or step 1745-6 (third modification 1) is No, the process proceeds to step 1724. Further, after the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the special game end display instruction command to the side of the sub control board S in step 1738, the CPUMC of the main control board M will be described later in step 1750 (third modification 1). The game state determination process after the end of the special game to be executed is executed, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1997).

  Next, FIG. 58 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process according to the subroutine of step 1800 of FIG. 57 in the first modification from the third embodiment. The changes from the third embodiment are step 1830 (third variation 1), step 1831 (third variation 1), step 1900 (third variation 1) and step 1832 (third variation 1), that is, If the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1802 that the sorting game in progress flag is off, the CPUMC of the main control board M has a specific area C22 in step 1830 (third modification 1) The release pattern of the second big winning opening C20 is set, and the process proceeds to step 1810. In addition, the configuration of the special winning opening is not limited to this, and only one large winning opening is provided, and a shielding member capable of shielding entry to the specific area C22 and capable of driving is provided, and sorting game execution round In rounds other than the above, the shielding member may remain closed, and in the sorting game execution round, the shielding member may be opened upon detection of entry of the gaming ball into the big winning opening. After the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the distribution game in progress flag in step 1812, the CPUMC of the main control board M is set to the set open pattern in step 1831 (third change 1). The second large winning opening C20 is opened (in the sorting game execution round, the second large winning opening C20 will be opened for a long time), and the opening timer is started, and step 1900 (third change 1) Transition. If the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1802 that the distribution game in progress flag is on, then the process shifts to step 1900 (third change 1). Next, in step 1900 (third modification 1), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes shielding member drive control processing described later, and shifts to step 1816. Also, after the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability change transition reservation flag at step 1826, the CPUMC of the main control board M at step 1832 (third change 1) Turn on and shift to step 1828.

  Next, FIG. 59 is a flowchart of shielding member drive control processing according to a subroutine of step 1900 (third modification 1) in FIG. 58 in the first modification from the third embodiment. First, in step 1901, the CPUMC of the main control board M is currently executing a round of sorting game execution round (the shielding member C 28 may be open, and in the present example, the fourth, sixth, and eighth rs). It is determined whether or not If Yes in step 1901, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1902 whether or not the first game ball in the special game being executed has been detected. In the case of Yes in step 1902, in step 1904, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the short opening (in the specific area C22 when the game ball continues to be emitted toward the second large winning opening C20 during the special game execution). The driving of the shielding member C28 is started at the opening time where the game ball is hard to enter the ball, and the process moves to step 1906. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1902, the processing shifts to step 1906.

  Next, at step 1906, the CPUMC of the main control board M is in the process of stopping the big hit symbol which is the second main game length opening big hit symbol (on the sorting game execution round among the big hits of the second main game side) It is determined whether or not the shielding member C28 is a big hit symbol that can be a long opening, and in this example, it is 5B · 7B. In the case of Yes in step 1906, in step 1908, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the round being executed is the 6th R. If Yes in step 1908, in step 1910, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the second game ball in the running round (in the present example, the sixth R) has been detected. . In the case of Yes in step 1910, in step 1912, the CPUMC of the main control board M is in the specific area C22 when the long open (when continuing to shoot the game ball toward the second big winning opening C20 during the execution of the special game) The driving of the shielding member C 28 is started when the opening time for the game ball to enter the ball is substantially determined or the opening time is made easy to enter the ball, and the process moves to step 1914. Also in the case of No at step 1906, step 1908 or step 1910, the process moves to step 1914.

  Next, in step 1914, the CPUMC of the main control board M is stopped while the big hit symbol is the first main game shielding member length open big hit symbol (on the first main game side of the big hit, any sorting game execution round It is determined whether or not the shielding member C28 is a big hit symbol that can be long open, and in this example, it is 5A · 7A. If Yes in step 1914, in step 1916, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the round being executed is the eighth R. If Yes in step 1916, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1918 whether or not the entry of the sixth game ball in the running round (in this example, the 8R) is detected. . If Yes in step 1918, in step 1920, the CPUMC of the main control board M starts driving the shielding member C28 by long opening, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1816). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 1901, step 1914, step 1916 or step 1918, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1816). The opening time of the shielding member C28 is 50 ms in the case of a short opening, and is 29000 ms in the case of a long opening. When the opening period of the second big winning opening C20 ends while the shielding member C28 is being driven (opened), the driving of the shielding member C28 is forcibly terminated (closed).

  Here, the right part of the same figure is a list of count numbers which the shielding member C28 in the distribution game execution round opens. First, in the case of the first main game shielding member short opening big hit symbol (2A), the shielding member C28 opens only at the first count of all of the fourth R, the sixth R, and the eighth R. In addition, the 1st count means entering the 1st ball in the running round. In addition, when the shielding member C28 opens at the first count, the shielding member C28 is short open, and when the shielding member C28 opens at the second or sixth count, the shielding member C28 is open long There is. Next, in the case of the first main game shielding member length open big hit symbol (5A · 7A), the fourth R and the sixth R are only the first count, and the eighth R is the first count and the sixth count . In other words, if you continue to shoot the game ball toward the second large winning opening C20 during the execution of the special game pertaining to the first main game shielding member length open big hit symbol (5A · 7A), the 8th R six balls The game ball that has become the eye entry will enter the specific area C22. Next, in the case of the second main game short opening big hit symbol (2B), similarly to the first main game shielding member short opening big hit symbol, all of the fourth R, the sixth R, and the eighth R are blocked only by the first count. The member C28 opens. Next, in the case of the second main game long opening big hit symbol (5B, 7B), the fourth R and the eighth R are only the first count, and the sixth R is the first count and the second count. That is, when the game ball continues to be launched toward the second large winning opening C20 during the execution of the special game relating to the second main game big hit symbol (5B · 7B), the second ball of the sixth R enters the ball The gaming ball that has become is to enter the specific area C22. In addition, in the distribution game execution round, even if it is a special game pertaining to any big hit symbol, in all the distribution game execution rounds (4R, 6R and 8R), the first count of the game balls entered Thus, the shielding member C28 is configured to be opened (in the present example, opened with a short opening). In addition, the configuration of the round and the count in which the shielding member C28 for each big hit symbol will be long opened is not limited to this, for example, it is configured to be divided into three groups only with the big hit symbol on the first main game side Specifically, at the time of the big hit concerning "7A", the shielding member C28 is opened long by the entry of the game ball of the 2nd count of the sixth round, and at the time of big hit concerning "5A", The shield member C28 may be opened long by the entry of the sixth count game balls in the eighth round, and the shield member C28 may not be opened long when a big hit according to "2A" is performed.

  In addition, in the first modification from the third embodiment, as the sorting game execution round, a combination of one or more of the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, the eighth round, the tenth round, and the even round of the twelfth round. Alternatively, the sorting game execution round may be a combination of one or more odd-numbered rounds. In addition, in rounds other than the distribution game execution round, the shielding member C28 is not driven. Furthermore, the round and count number which shielding member C28 opens long (or opens short) are not limited to composition of this example, for example, (1) 1st main game shielding member length opening big hit symbol (5A, 7A) (2) In the case of a large hit according to 5A, the shielding member C28 opens long and relates to 7A. In the case of the big hit, the shielding member C28 opens long at the 6th count of the 6R, (3) the 8th R at the 6th count in the big hit concerning the 2nd main game big hit symbol (5B, 7B), the shielding member C28 (4) 3B is newly provided as a big hit symbol on the second main game side, and in the case of a big hit according to 3B, the shielding member C28 is long opened at the 2nd count of the 4th R, 5B In the case of such a big hit, Shielding member C28 to sixth count of 6R is long opened, when the jackpot according to 7B, the shielding member C28 two count th first 8R may be long open.

  Moreover, in the first modification of the third embodiment, the configuration may be as follows. (1) The first main game shield member short opening big hit symbol, the first main game shielding member length open big hit symbol, the second main game short opening big hit symbol, and the second main game long opening symbol exist, (( 2) A plurality of types of first main game shielding member length open big hit symbols are divided into A group and B group, and during the big hit concerning A group, the 6th R is the shielding member at the first count and the sixth count C28 opens, and during the big hit pertaining to the B group, the shielding member C28 opens at the 1st and 6th counts in the 4th R, (3) 1st main game shielding member during the big hit pertaining to the short opening big hit symbol Although it may have a round in which the shielding member C28 opens at the first count and the sixth count, in such a case, it is preferable that the opening of any shielding member C28 also be a short opening. (4) 1st Lord Technique shielding member length open big hit design is divided into A group, B group and C group, during the big hit which relates to A group, the shielding member C28 opens at the 1st count and the 6th count in the 6th R, B During the big hit pertaining to the group, the shielding member C28 opens at the first and sixth counts at the 4th R, and during the big hit pertaining to the C group, the shielding member C28 at the first and second counts at the 6th R (5) A big hit where the shielding member C28 opens at the first count and the sixth count at the first count and the sixth count in the big hit of the first main game side and the big hit of the first main game side (same round and same size Block may be provided by opening the shielding member C28), and in such a configuration, the same round and the same card for all the jackpots on the first main game side may be provided. The ratio in which the jackpot on the first main game side where the shielding member C28 opens is selected is the same round for all jackpots on the second main game side, and the shielding member C28 is opened at the same count It is preferable to configure the second main game player's jackpot to be lower than the rate at which it is selected. Specifically, in the case of a big hit pertaining to 7A, the shielding member C28 opens at the first and second counts of the 6R, which is the same as the big hit pertaining to the second main game length opening big hit symbol, pertaining to 5A In the case of a big hit, the shielding member C28 opens at the first and sixth counts of the eighth R. In addition, during the jackpot pertaining to 7A, the effect of notifying that it is easy to enter the game ball to the specific area C22 from the time of the big hit, or the battle victory effect (the player can easily enter the ball to the specific area C22 After being hit against the game, the effect of notifying that it is easy to enter the game ball to the specific area C22 is executed, and during the big hit concerning 5B, the battle defeat effect (the ball to the specific area C22 is entered) Performs the effect of not notifying the player that the game ball is easy to enter the specific area C22 after the player has heard the easiness to the player (a battle defeat effect is executed during a big hit pertaining to 5B) However, in fact, the game ball may be easily entered into the specific area C22).

  With this configuration, it becomes difficult for the player to predict at what timing the shield member C28 opens long, that is, it is difficult to predict at what timing the game ball enters the specific area C22. As a result, during the special game, the player can continue to have an expectation for the probability variation gaming state, and the interest of the game will be enhanced. In addition, in the first modification from the third embodiment, in all the distribution game execution rounds in the big hit related to all the big hit symbols, the shielding member C28 opens short in the entering of the first count game ball Although it was constituted, it is not limited to this, the composition of the said short opening does not need to apply, and, specifically, at the time of big hit concerning the 1st main game shielding member short opening big hit symbol, the 4th R and the 6 R And the shield member C28 does not open in 8R, and the execution of the big hit concerning the 1st main game shield member length open big hit symbol, the shield member C28 does not open in 4R and 6R, and 6 counts in 8R The shielding member C28 opens long due to the entering of the game ball of the eye, and the shielding member C28 does not open in the 4th R and the 8R at the time of the big hit concerning the 2nd main game length opening big hit symbol The shielding member C28 by ball entrance of 2 counts th game ball may be configured to long opening in the first 6R. In addition, in the first modification from the third embodiment, even if it is a big hit with the big hit concerning the first main game shielding member short opening big hit symbol and the big hit concerning the first main game shielding member length opening big hit symbol It may be configured to have one or more distribution game execution rounds in which the shielding member C28 is opened by entering the game balls into the first count and the sixth count big winning opening. In such a configuration, the first main game shielding member short opening big hit symbol related to the first main game shielding member length open big hit symbol related to the first main game shielding member length open big hit symbol, the first count and the sixth count of the sixth R When the shielding member C28 is configured to be opened by entering the game ball into the big winning opening, the first main game shielding member short opening In the big hit concerning the big hit symbol, entering the game ball into the 6th big winning opening While the shielding member C28 opens short in the ball, in the big hit pertaining to the first main game shielding member length opening big hit symbol, the shielding member C28 opens long in the ball entry of the game ball to the 6th big winning opening It may be configured as follows. In this case, the number of distribution game execution rounds in which the shielding member C28 is to be opened by the entry of the game ball to the first count and the sixth count big winning opening is 1st. The main game shielding member short opening big hit concerning the big hit symbol and the 1st main game shielding member long opening big hit concerning the big hit symbol, it is good also as same frequency, it is good also as different frequency. In addition, the sorting game execution round in which the shielding member C28 will be opened by entering the game ball into the first count and the sixth count big winning opening, the big hit according to the first main game shielding member short opening big hit symbol Then, it may be the 4th R, and it may be constituted so that it becomes the 6th R in the big hit concerning the 1st main game shielding member length opening big hit symbol.

  Next, FIG. 60 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1750 (third modification 1) of FIG. 57 in the first modification from the third embodiment. First, at step 1784-1, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main game probability change shift reservation flag is on. If Yes in step 1784-1, in step 1784-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game probability variation transition reservation flag. Next, in step 1784-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on a main game probability change flag. Next, at step 1784-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a certain value (80 in this example) to the probability variation number counter MP51c.

Next, in step 1784-11, the CPUMC of the main control board M makes a hidden probability change symbol (it is a big hit easy to enter the specific area C22, but does not notify that it entered the ball at the specific area C22) It is a jackpot symbol pertaining to the jackpot, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is after the jackpot end according to 5A). If Yes in step 1784-11, in step 1784-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the limited frequency B flag. Next, at step 1784-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value (80 in this example) to the limited frequency B counter MN 52c-2. Next, in step 1784-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a space stage command (a command to the side of the sub control board S and a command to set the background as the “space stage”), and step 1784 Shift to -8. In this example, the main control board M side transmits the command regarding the stay stage to the sub control board S side, so that the stay stage on the sub control board S side can be determined. There is no limitation on the command regarding the gaming state transmitted from the main control board M side (the command concerning which hit is the corresponding symbol change transmitted at the start timing of the symbol change, or the game state after the big hit ends The secondary control board S receives an end demonstration command or the like that transmits the transition or the like, and determines which stage the secondary control board S should use as the stay stage based on the command related to the game state. May be In addition, the said structure is applicable to the structure regarding all the stay stages in this example. Also, in the case of No at step 1784-1 or at step 1784-11, the process proceeds to step 1784-8. Next, in step 1784-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a predetermined value (80 in this example) in the time reduction counter MP52c. Next, in step 1784-9, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game time short flag, and in step 1784-10 turns on the auxiliary game time short flag, and proceeds to step 1997. Here, the lower part of the figure is a formula for calculating the big hit loop rate in the probability variation gaming state. Similar to the third embodiment described above, also in the first modification from the third embodiment, the case is shown where only the second main game symbol is varied. The transition rate to the probability variation gaming state after the big hit is "800/1024" (all big hit symbols pertaining to the long opening symbol are to enter the specific area C22), and during the probability variation gaming state (number of continuations The probability of winning a jackpot in the present example is 80) is “1 − {(1−22 / 1024) ⁸⁰ } = 0.809”. Therefore, the big hit loop rate (%) in the probability fluctuation gaming state, that is, the probability (%) that the probability fluctuation gaming state continues, becomes “800/1024 × 0.809 × 100 = 64.4 (%) There is.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment may be configured as follows.
(1) If it shifts to the probability fluctuation gaming state and time shortening gaming state after the big hit ends, 200 times will be granted as ST number (2) If it shifts to the non probability fluctuation gaming state and time shortening gaming state after the big hit end 100 times is given to time as the number of time-savings (3) Big hit probability in non-probability fluctuation gaming state = 1 / 318.1
(4) Big hit probability in the probability fluctuation gaming state = 1 / 121.8
(5) Substantial probability fluctuation game state transition rate after the big hit end of the first main game side = 50%, that is, the first open main game side long open big hit: short open big hit = 5: 5
(6) Substantial probability fluctuation game state transition rate after the big hit end of the 2nd main game side = 80%, that is, the long open big hit on the 2nd main game side: short open big hit = 8: 2
By configuring in this way, the number of time-savings when transitioning to the probability variation gaming state after the big hit ends is greater than the number of time shortenings when shifting to the non-probability variation gaming state after the big hit ends.

  Next, FIG. 61 is a flowchart of special game related display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. 19 in the first modification from the third embodiment. The change from the third embodiment is step 2530-1 (third change 1) to step 2530-9 (third change 1), that is, it is determined in step 2502 that the special game flag is on. If, or after turning on the special game flag in step 2506, in step 2530-1 (third change 1), in the CPUSC of the sub control board S, the jackpot in progress is the second main game length open notification Big hit symbol (The second main game side is a big hit on the specific area C22 and easy to enter, and it is a big hit symbol to notify at that time when entering the specific area C22, in this example, 5B, 7B Determine whether or not the jackpot pertaining to. In the case of Yes in step 2530-1 (third variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub control board S performs continuous effects (probability fluctuation after the big hit end as the effect during the big hit in step 2530-2 (third variation 1) A command for displaying on the effect display device SG the effect of notifying transition to the gaming state is set, and the process proceeds to step 2530-6 (third modification 1). On the other hand, if No in step 2530-1, in step 2530-3 (third modification 1), the main control CPU S of the sub control board S is executing the first main game length open notification big hit symbol (specific area C22 It is a big hit on the first main game side where it is easy to enter the ball, and it is a big hit symbol to notify at that time when entering the specific area C22, and in this example, it is determined whether it is a big hit related to 7A). Do. In the case of Yes in step 2530-3 (third variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub control board S performs battle victory effect (probability after the big hit end) as an effect during the big hit in step 2530-4 (third variation 1) A command for displaying on the effect display device SG the effect of notifying transition to the change gaming state is set, and the process proceeds to step 2530-6 (third modification 1). In the case of No in step 2530-3 (third modification 1), the CPUSC of the sub-control board S produces battle defeat production (big hit end) as the effect during the big hit in step 2530-5 (third variation 1) A command for displaying on the effect display device SG the effect of not notifying the subsequent gaming state in a definite manner is set, and the process shifts to step 2530-6 (third modification 1). Next, in step 2530-6 (third modification 1), the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command for sequentially displaying the winning number. Next, in step 2530-7 (third modification 1), the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the specific area entering command is received from the main control board M side. If Yes in step 2530-7 (third change 1), the CPUSC of the sub control board S is in step 2530-8 (third change 1), and the big hit in progress is a long open notification big hit symbol (first main game It is a big hit symbol which is the sum of the long opening notification symbol and the second main game length opening notification symbol, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit according to 7A, 5B, 7B). In the case of Yes in step 2530-8 (third variation 1), the CPUSC of the sub control board S produces a specific region entering sphere effect (specific region C22 has entered the sphere in step 2530-9 (third variation 1). The command to execute the effect of notifying the effect is set, and the process proceeds to step 2520. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2530-7 (third modification 1) (the big hit in execution is 2A.5A.2B in this example) or in the case of No in step 2530-8 (third modification 1) Also, the process proceeds to step 2520. As described above, in the first modification from the third embodiment, even when there is a ball entry in the specific area C22, no notification is given at that time, and the identification is performed when the ball enters the first big winning opening C10 thereafter. It is comprised so that the specific area ball-in-game effect which is the effect | action which alert | reports that area | region C22 had the ball entering can be performed.

  Next, FIG. 62 is a flowchart of stay stage determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2600 (third modification 1) in FIG. 19 in the first modification from the third embodiment. First, in step 2632, the CPUSC of the sub control board S visits the stay stage switching timing {where, with the stay stage switching timing, for example, the timing at which the special game has ended (is won), the timing at which the gaming state has shifted, Whether the timing at which the variation mode determination table has been switched (even in the same gaming state), the timing at which the number of times of variation has reached a predetermined number, etc. may be reached judge. In the case of Yes in step 2632, in step 2634, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the current gaming state is the time-saving gaming state. If Yes in step 2634, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the space stage command (the command set in step 1784-7) from the main control board M side is received in step 2635. . If Yes in step 2635, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is a stay stage {type of effect contents in step 2636, and effects (background effect, advance notice effect, etc.) that can be executed if the stay stages are different are different. It sets "the space stage" as it becomes, and it transfers to the following process (process of step 2999).

  If NO in step 2634, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the "empty stage" as the stay stage in step 2638, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2999). In the case of No at step 2635, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the "evening stage" as the stay stage at step 2637, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2999). Also in the case of No at step 2632, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2999). As described above, in the first modification from the third embodiment, the space stage command is received from the main control board M side, that is, in the time-saving gaming state, the symbol which is not the hidden probability variation symbol (5A in this example) In the case of entering the specific area C22 (transition to probability fluctuation gaming state after the big hit ends) in the big hit pertaining to the "space stage" is set as a stay stage, while on the big hit in the specific area C22 If you did not enter the ball (do not shift to the probability variation gaming state after the big hit end), or after the big hit pertaining to the hidden probability variation symbol (in this example 5A), the "evening stage" is set as the stay stage . That is, the stay stage basically set is different between when the probability fluctuation gaming state and time shortening gaming state are reached after the big hit ends and when the non probability fluctuation gaming state and time shortening gaming state is reached after the big hit ends. Although it will be, after the end of the big hit pertaining to the hidden probability variation symbol (in this example, 5A), even when transitioning to the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state after the big hit termination, the non probability variation game as a stay stage The same "evening stage" as in the case of transitioning to the state and time saving gaming state will be set. It should be noted that if a jackpot is won in the probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, it is determined which stay stage after the jackpot will be by the type of the effect during the symbol fluctuation related to the jackpot It may be configured. As an example, when a winning effect in a battle effect during symbol change or an effect where a character is activated during a symbol change and an effect in which a big hit is notified is executed, the stay stage after the big hit is the “space stage” (When it becomes deterministic that it is a probability fluctuation gaming state and a time shortening gaming state), and the defeat in the battle effect during the symbol fluctuation is executed, the stay stage after the big hit end is “the evening stage” ( It may be configured to be difficult to determine from the stay stage whether it is the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state or the non-probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state.

  By configuring as described above, in the gaming machine according to the first modification from the third embodiment, the gaming ball that triggered the opening of the shielding member C28 can enter the specific area C22 as it is. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the gaming ball does not enter the specific area C22 despite the long opening of the shielding member C28, which is disadvantageous for the player.

  Also, by configuring like the first modified example from the third embodiment, the special winning opening having the specific area C22 in which it is determined whether or not to shift to the probability variation gaming state after the end of the special game is the second special winning opening By taking C20 as an opportunity to execute effects related to entering the specific area C22 (effects indicating the game state after the end of the special game) by entering the game ball into the first big winning opening C10 (Ie, by changing the winning opening having the specific area C22 relating to the transition to the probability variation gaming state, and the winning opening relating to the effect indicating the transition to the probability variation gaming state triggered by entering the ball), the specific region Even when the player actually enters C22, it can be configured not to execute the effect that the gaming ball has entered the specific area C22, and such a large-hit effect (in this example, according to 5A) Create a big hit The player sees the effects during the special game triggered by entering the first big winning opening C10, recognizes that the game does not shift to the probability variation gaming state, and is actually disappointed. The game state after the end of the game is the probability fluctuation game state (because the shielding member C28 inside the second large winning opening C20 is long open, the game ball has entered), and then it is the probability fluctuation game state It will be possible to be excited at the moment when it is recognized (the effect to that effect is carried out), and the interest of the game will be enhanced. In addition, even if there is no ball entry in the specific area C22 of the second big winning prize port C20, the effect suggesting the transition to the probability variation gaming state, or continuation, triggered by the entry of the first big prize port. Will be able to Further, when the game ball enters the specific area C22 in the second big winning opening C20, the same effect as the effect mode as if notifying that the game ball entered the specific area C22 described above Under a predetermined condition (if there is an ascension effect which is a specific effect during a big hit, the first hit of the first main game side but not the second hit of the second main game side) If the jackpot after the majesty, etc.), the notification mode of the effect may be different compared to when it is not under the predetermined condition (the effect of the predetermined condition is smaller and the display area is less noticeable , Etc.) and under the predetermined conditions, the same effect as the effect mode as if notifying that the game ball has entered the specific area C22 described above may not be executed. In addition, with the ascension effect, specific conditions (the consecutive number of times reaches a predetermined number of times, the specific effect is generated, the consecutive conditions occur during the continuous operation (the state in which the big hit symbol continues to stop in the time reduction gaming state). The number of game balls that can be acquired is relatively large (specifically, the number of rounds to be executed is 16 rounds, etc.) executed after the total number of winning balls in the villa reaches a predetermined number, etc.) It is an effect that occurs in a big hit etc.).

  In the first modification from the third embodiment, when transitioning to the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state after the big hit ends, effect display format A (stay stage A) and effect display format B (stay stage While it can be set to any of B), when transitioning to a non-probability fluctuation gaming state and time shortening gaming state after the big hit, it is not set to effect display form A (stay stage A), but effect display form B It may be configured to be settable on (stay stage B). In such a configuration, stop symbol combination α in which it is determined that effect display format A (stay stage A) is set after the big hit ends as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed when the big hit symbol stops. (For example, "777") and it will not be definite that the effect display form A (stay stage A) will be set after the big hit is finished {or the effect display form B (stay stage B) will be set To be the target} stop symbol combination β {eg, "222" and "2 ★ 2" (★ is any number)} and the number of types of stop symbol combination α is less than the number of types of stop symbol combination β It may be configured as follows.

Fourth Embodiment
In the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the specific area C22 during the special game, it is configured to shift to the probability variation gaming state after the end of the special game, but it is applied to the game machine of this example The possible configurations are not limited to this. Therefore, the fourth embodiment is a configuration that is different from the present embodiment in terms of playability, and only differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 63 is a front view of the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. The differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail. In the fourth embodiment, the second large winning opening C20 stops at the first main gaming symbol (special symbol) or the second main gaming symbol (special symbol) at a small hitting symbol (the type of symbol will be described later). It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, which is located on the upper right of the out slot D36 and above the first big winning slot C10. As a specific configuration, the second large winning opening C20, the second large winning opening winning detection device C21s for detecting the entry of the game ball, and the second large winning opening electric combination C21d (and the second large winning And a V prize opening C22 (V prize winning in the fourth embodiment) serving as an execution trigger of the special game (in the fourth embodiment, the game in which the first big winning aperture C10 is opened) in the mouth solenoid C24). The mouth has become the V winning opening C22), V winning opening entrance ball detection device C22s which is a sensor that detects the entry of the gaming ball to the V winning opening C22, and entered the second big winning opening C20 A distribution combination C23 for distributing whether the game ball is to be discharged directly to the outside of the second big winning opening C20 or to be temporarily induced to the V winning opening C22. Here, the second large winning opening winning combination detection device C21s is a sensor that detects the entering of the gaming ball to the second large winning opening C20, the second large winning opening entering ball information showing the entering at the time of entering the ball Generate The gaming ball having entered the second large winning opening C20 is configured to be detected by the second large winning opening winning detection device C21s. Next, the second big winning opening electric winning combination C21d, in the second big winning opening C20 the game ball can not be winning or difficult to win the normal state and the opening state where the gaming ball is easy to win the second big winning opening C20 It is made variable (the second big winning opening solenoid C24 is excited and made variable). In the fourth embodiment, the second big winning opening electric combination C21d is a flat member like the first large winning opening electric combination C11d, but the first large winning opening electric combination C11d is variable. Unlike the embodiment, the embodiment is variable in the vertical direction with respect to the game board (game area D30). That is, the second big winning opening motorized role C21d is almost completely buried in the game board (the game area D30) (hereinafter, may be referred to as retracted state) and transparent from the game board (the game area D30) A state of projecting toward the player side (hereinafter referred to as an advanced state) is taken until the board D16 approaches. Then, the second winning opening electric character C21d is a box-like member C20-1 (a game in which the box-like member can enter the box-like member capable of receiving the game ball which protrudes from the game board (game area D30) and flows down the game area D30. The ball plays a role of a lid of the second big winning opening C20), that is, when the second big winning opening electric combination C21d takes a retreating state, the box-like member C20-1 Is the case where the game ball can enter into the second large winning opening C20), while the second large winning opening electric combination C21d takes the advanced state, the box-like member C20-1 (and thus the second The game ball can not enter into the special winning opening C20) (this box-like member is substantially sealed). Then, whether the gaming ball having entered the second large winning opening C20 is discharged directly out of the second large winning opening C20 or is temporarily guided to the V winning opening C22 by the distribution part C23. It is configured to be distributed.

  Next, the V lamp V10 is installed around the V winning opening C22, and plays a role of effect (effect of notifying the player that the game ball has entered the V winning opening C22) by lighting or the like.

  The above is the basic structure on the front side of the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment, but prior to the description of the characteristic parts of the fourth embodiment, the game contents developed on the game board will be outlined. First, the game ball fired toward the game area D30 flows down a flow-down route (hereinafter, may be referred to as a left-handed route) formed on the left side (based on the center of the game area) of the game area D30, The flow-down route (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a right-handed route) formed on the right side (based on the center of the game area) of the game area D30 may be divided into two or more. Here, while the game ball which has flowed down on the left-handed route has an opportunity to enter the first main game starting port A10 or the first large winning opening C10, the game ball which has flowed down the right-handed route is assisted The opportunity to enter the game start port H10, the second large winning opening C20, the second main game starting port B10, and the first large winning opening C10 can be obtained. Further, in the fourth embodiment, the gaming ball that has flowed down the right-handed route is configured to be more likely to enter the first big winning hole C10 than the gaming ball that has flowed down the left-handed route (" “It is easy to do” and “hard to enter” are determined, for example, by the size of the number of balls when 10000 balls are emitted to the right-handed route and the left-handed route respectively.

  In addition, on the left-handed route (although not shown), the game ball is induced or not induced toward the first main game start port A10 by a large number of game nails and a windmill. Takes a variety of flow modes, while on the right-handed route (although not shown), the number of game nails and windmills is small compared to the left-handed route, and the game balls have a substantially uniform flow-down mode. take.

  More specifically, with regard to the right-handed route, first, a game ball (for example, the case where the launch strength of the game ball by the launcher is maximum and is also called right) is Drops by its own weight by flying in the game area D30 along the outer rail D32 and colliding with a stopper member (a member formed of rubber or the like) provided at the upper right end (based on the center of the game area) of the game area D30. Get started. Next, after the falling game ball enters the auxiliary game start opening H10 directly below it with high probability, the flow passage width exceeds one game ball and is less than two game balls. The ball is collected to D50 (the ball is collected regardless of whether or not the player enters the auxiliary game start port H10). Next, the gaming ball which has flowed down along the straightening passage D50 is discharged from the outlet of the straightening passage D50, and then slightly inclined left with respect to the horizontal direction, and the first stage passage D51-which is in three stages. After rolling on the first, second-stage passage D51-2, and the third-stage passage D51-3, the air is discharged toward the out port D36.

  Here, the first stage passage D51-1 is formed by the second winning opening motor electric part C21d in the advanced state, while the second stage passage D51-2 and the third stage passage D51-3 are The game ball passage formed of synthetic resin or the like is formed in advance by being fixed to the game board. That is, when the second large winning opening electric motor combination C21d is in the normal state (advanced state) and the first large winning opening electric combination C11d is in the normal state (closed state), the outlet of the rectification passage D50 The game ball released from the roll rolls on the first stage passage D51-1. The game ball released from the first stage passage D51-1 rolls on the second stage passage D51-2. The game ball released from the two-step passage D51-2 rolls on the third step passage D51-3 → The game ball released from the third step passage D51-3 is released toward the out port D36 , And so as to adopt a substantially uniform flow-down mode.

  As described above, in order for the game ball which has flowed down the right-handed route to take a substantially uniform flow-down mode, when the game balls are continuously fired toward the right-handed route (one shot at intervals of about 0.6 seconds) When the game start opening H10 is stably entered and the second big winning opening electric combination C21d is in the open state (retracted state), the box-like member C20-1 (in other words, the second large winning opening) It is possible to stably enter the first large winning opening C10 when the first large winning opening electric symbol C11d is in the open state by stably entering the inside of C20). It should be noted that the second main game start opening electric combination that can take the retracted state and the advanced state in the space until the gaming ball discharged from the second stage passage D51-2 reaches the third stage passage D51-3. The object B11d is provided, and when the second main game start opening electric role thing B11d is in the advance state, the game ball can be guided toward the second main game start opening B10. However, this point will be described later.

  In this case, the gaming ball discharged from the outlet of the straightening passage D50 strongly collides with the first stage passage D51-1, that is, the second winning hole electric power winning object C21d in the advanced state. If this happens, there is a risk that the second big winning opening motor electric combination C21d will be damaged. Therefore, at least at the exit of the straightening passage D50, it is essential to have a configuration for removing the momentum of the gaming ball that has flowed down (substantially dropped) in the straightening passage D50. In the fourth embodiment, as shown in the vicinity of the outlet of the flow straightening passage D50, the flow passage wall surface of the flow straightening passage D50 has a shape projecting toward the inside of the flow straightening passage D50. When the ball falls in a zigzag manner, the momentum of the game ball is reduced. In the fourth embodiment, in the same theory, the configuration for removing the momentum (rolling speed) of the gaming ball rolling on the first stage passage D51-1 is also provided. The points will be described later.

  Next, a configuration for scraping the momentum (rolling speed) of the gaming ball rolling on the first stage passage D51-1 will be described with reference to FIG. First, as described above, the first stage passage D51-1 is slightly inclined to the left with respect to the horizontal direction, and is formed by the second winning prize port electric winning combination C21d in the advanced state, The special winning opening motorized role C21d itself is a flat member. Therefore, the momentum (rolling speed) of the gaming ball rolling on the first stage passage D51-1 tends to accelerate as it is, unless some measures are taken to reduce the momentum of the gaming ball, Even if the second large winning opening electric symbol C21d in the advanced state is displaced to the retracted state {especially, a series of displacement from the advanced state → retracted state → advanced state is instantaneously (for example, about 0.1 seconds) ) When it is performed, there is a possibility that the game ball can not be successfully guided to the box-like member C20-1 (in the second, the second big winning opening C20). Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, as in the flow path shape provided near the outlet of the straightening passage D50, a device for advancing the gaming ball rolling on the first stage passage D51-1 in a zigzag manner is applied. is there.

  More specifically, in the range where the game ball rolls on the first stage passage D51-1, a plurality of projections D51-1-1 are provided on the game board surface side, and a plurality of projections are also provided on the transparent plate D16 side. The projection D51-1-2 is provided, and the plurality of projections D51-1-1 and the plurality of projections D51-1-2 are alternately arranged. Here, the plurality of protrusions D51-1-1 may be configured to be directly fixed to the game board surface, but the plurality of protrusions D51-1-2 may be directly attached to the back surface of the transparent plate D16. If fixed, temporarily, when the transparent plate D16 is opened for the purpose of maintenance of the gaming machine, the plurality of projections D51-1-2 will be exposed to the outside, so maintenance There is a possibility that a person may come in contact with the plurality of projections D51-1-2 (worst, peeling off) (Also, it becomes difficult to use the transparent plate D16 as a member of another game machine) . Therefore, in order to avoid such a situation, in the fourth embodiment, the wall surface on the transparent plate D16 side among the wall surfaces of the box-like member C20-1 is the second winning prize port electric role in an advanced state The plurality of projections D51-1-2 are fixed to the wall surface of the extended box-like member C20-1 while being stretched upward from the object C21d.

  In this manner, by providing the plurality of protrusions D51-1-1 and the plurality of protrusions D51-1-2 within the range where the gaming ball rolls on the first stage passage D51-1, the first stage Since the gaming balls rolling on the passage D51-1 advance in a zigzag manner, the momentum (rolling speed) of the gaming balls rolling on the first stage passage D51-1 tends to be decelerated. Here, when the gaming ball is continuously fired toward the right-handed route (one shot at intervals of about 0.6 seconds), the momentum of the gaming ball released from the exit of the straightening passage D50 is removed. The momentum of the gaming ball reaching the first stage passage D51-1 and rolling on the first stage passage D51-1 is further decelerated, so it is rolling on the first stage passage D51-1. As a result of the long period, even if the second big winning opening electric motor winning combination C21d (ie, the first stage passage D51-1) is instantaneously displaced to the retracted state, the box-like member C20-1 (extended Makes it possible to guide the gaming ball to the second large winning opening C20). In addition, the fact that the momentum of the gaming balls rolling on the first stage passage D51-1 is decelerated means that, in the case where the gaming balls are continuously fired toward the right-handed route, the positional interval between those gaming balls Means a narrowing of the ball (congestion of gaming balls rolling on the first stage passage D51-1 occurs). Therefore, it is possible to create a situation in which a plurality of game balls are present on the second winning opening electric symbol C21d (that is, the first stage passage D51-1), in this case, the second winning Even if the mouth electric part C21d (that is, the first stage passage D51-1) is instantaneously displaced to the retracted state, the plurality of box members C20-1 (and thus the second large winning opening C20) It is also possible to guide individual game balls together (the lower part of the figure illustrates an image).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 65, an operation aspect of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d will be described. First, as described above, the second main can take the retracted state and the advanced state in the space until the gaming ball released from the second stage passage D51-2 reaches the third stage passage D51-3. A game start opening electric combination B11d is provided (the same applies to the second large winning opening electric combination C21d as to the retracted state and the advanced state, but as described below, the second main game start) In the case of the mouth electric role B11d, in the case of taking the advance state, the game ball is in an open state where it is easy for the game ball to enter the second main game start opening B10, and when the retreat state is taken, the second main game start opening B10 is played The ball is in a closed state where it is difficult to enter the ball). Here, in the fourth embodiment, the second main game start port electric role B11d in the retracted state (closed state) is momentarily displaced to the advanced state (opened state) for special game characteristics to be described later. Even if {a series of displacements from the evacuation state → advance state → evacuation state is made instantaneously (for example, in about 0.1 seconds)}, the second main game start opening B10 is entered. It is configured to be able to physically secure that it does not flash.

  More specifically, the gaming ball rolling on the second stage passage D51-2 slightly inclined leftward with respect to the horizontal direction once collides with the locking portion D51-2a, and the third stage passage D51 Start to fall to -3 by its own weight. Here, when the second main game start opening electric combination B11d is in the retracted state, it falls as it is and reaches the third stage passage D51-3 (the second stage in the figure). On the other hand, when the second main game start port electric role B11d is in the advanced state, the shape of the second main game start port electric role B11d itself can receive the dropped game ball and the second main game In addition to being extended to reach the starting opening B10, since it is installed so as to be slightly inclined to the right with respect to the horizontal direction, this dropped game ball is the second main game starting opening B10 It starts rolling toward the end (as shown in the third row of the figure, the traveling direction of the gaming ball is switched from left to right). And, when the second main game start opening electric role thing B11d maintains the advanced state until the game ball which has started rolling toward the second main game start opening B10 reaches the second main game start opening B10 , While entering the second main game start slot B10 as it is, while the game ball rolling toward the second main game start slot B10 reaches the second main game start slot B10 2 When the main game start opening electric role B11d is displaced to the retracted state, it will fall toward the third stage passage D51-3 without entering the second main game start opening B10 (FIG. The next game ball in the 4th stage corresponds.

  When configured in this way, the time required for the game ball, which has begun rolling toward the second main game start opening B10, to reach the second main game start opening B10 is approximately 0.2 to 0.3 seconds Even if the second main game start opening electric combination B11d in the retracted state is momentarily displaced to the advanced state by designing so as to become {Especially, the retracted state → the advanced state → the retracted state It is possible to physically secure that the second main game starting opening B10 does not enter the ball when the series of displacements of {circle over (1)} are performed instantaneously (for example, in about 0.1 seconds).

  Next, FIG. 66 is a main flowchart showing a general flow of processing performed by the CPU MC of the main control board M in the fourth embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is step 3050 (fourth), step 3100 (fourth) and step 1950 (fourth), that is, in step 1700, the CPUMC of the main control board M performs special game control After executing the process, in step 3050 (fourth), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes a small hit game control process described later. Next, in step 3100 (fourth), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a distribution combination object control process described later. Next, in step 1950 (fourth), the CPU MC of the main control board M executes a V-type winning a prize ball determination process described later, and shifts to step 1997.

  Next, FIG. 67 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing according to the subroutine of step 1300 (second modification 3) of FIG. 4 in the fourth embodiment. About the explanation of the same figure, it shall decide in detail about the change point from the example 3 of change from a similar 2nd embodiment. First, the change from the second embodiment to the third modification is the step 1332 (fourth), that is, the CPUMC of the main control board M enters the second main game start opening B10 in the step 1331 (second If it is determined that the second main game start slot ball entry information has been received from the main game start slot ball detection device B11s), then in step 1332 (fourth), the CPUMC of the main control board M is for the second main game It is determined whether the holding ball is within the upper limit (in this example, the upper limit of the second main game holding is one). If Yes in step 1332 (fourth), the process proceeds to step 1333. If No in step 1332 (fourth), the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 3450). As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the maximum number of holdings on the second main game side is one.

  Next, FIG. 68 shows the first main game symbol display process (second main game symbol display process) according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} in FIG. 8 in the fourth embodiment. Flowchart of FIG. The difference with this embodiment is step 1403 (fourth), step 1441-1 (fourth), step 1441-2 (fourth) and step 1441-3 (fourth), that is, step 1403 (fourth). In the fourth), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. In the case of Yes in step 1403 (fourth), the process proceeds to step 1405, and in the case of No, the process proceeds to step 1426. In the fourth embodiment, a small hit is provided on the first main game side and the second main game side, and therefore, it is added to the condition that the small hit is not in progress as the change start condition. . In step 1410, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the stop symbol related to the main gaming symbol based on the main gaming side random number and the result of the lottery result (refer to the main gaming table 2), and then step 1441-1 (first In 4), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the variation mode (variation time) regarding the main gaming symbol based on the main gaming side random number, the result of the lottery, and the gaming state (refer to the main gaming table 3), step 1418 Migrate to In addition, if the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1436 that the stop symbol is not a big hit symbol, the CPUMC of the main control board M in step 1444-2 (fourth) has a small hit symbol in the stop symbol. Determine if there is. If Yes in step 1444-2 (fourth), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the small hit flag in step 1444-3 (fourth), and proceeds to step 1550. Also in the case of No in step 1444-2 (fourth), the process moves to step 1550.

In this example, the following configuration may be made.
(1) The second main game side's small hit selection rate is higher than the first main game side's small hit selection rate (2) The second main game side who won the small hit is the first main game It is easy to execute a small hit that is an opening pattern of a large winning opening that is easier to enter the V winning opening than a small hitting on the side (3) a small hitting symbol as a small hitting symbol of the first main game A and small hit symbol B is provided, the winning ratio of small hit symbol B is higher than that of small hit symbol A, and small hit symbol A is relatively more V winning opening than small hit symbol B It is easy to execute the small hit which becomes the opening pattern of the big winning opening which is easy to enter the ball

  Next, FIG. 69 shows an example of the main game tables 1 and 2 in the fourth embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, regardless of the gaming state, the table contents to be referred to are different only depending on whether it is the symbol variation related to the first main game side or the symbol variation related to the second main game side There is. In addition, it is configured to be able to win a small hit with the first main game side and the second main game side, and the lottery result on the second main game side is high probability (with a probability of 639/1024) a small hit and Become. The winning probability is merely an example, and is not limited to this. The random number value and the type of stop symbol are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the lost symbol is not limited to one type of symbol, and a plurality of types of symbols may be provided. If a specific symbol is stopped and displayed, the type and / or selection rate of the variation mode of the main gaming symbol may be different from that before the specific symbol is stopped and displayed (limited frequency state). May be configured to migrate}. In the fourth embodiment, the number of execution rounds at the big hit triggered by the stop of the big hit symbol is 6 rounds or 12 rounds, and the number of running rounds of the big hit triggered by the small hit is There are seven rounds or thirteen rounds in total, with one small hit. In addition, the lighting pattern of the round lamp (not shown) which displays the number of rounds is provided with four types of lighting patterns of said 6, 7, 12, 13 rounds. In addition, as the big hit design, it is described as 4A and 5A etc, but it is not limited to 1 type with 4A and 1 type with 5A, for example, 4A-1, 4A-2 · · in the big hit group of 4A.・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・It is also good. Also, with regard to the distribution of random numbers, while maintaining the same ratio, for example, 300 types of big hits belonging to the big hit group 4A are distributed to 300 random numbers of 0 to 299, 200 of 300 to 499 In the random number of 200, 200 types of big hit belonging to the big hit group 5A may be distributed. Moreover, the said structure is applicable to all the structures which concern on this example.

  Next, FIG. 70 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game according to step 1750 (fourth) of FIG. 16 in the fourth embodiment. First, in step 1785-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not it is after the end of the special game triggered by the entry into the V winning opening C27. In the fourth embodiment, the game ball enters the V winning opening C 27 during execution of the small hit game so that the big hit is executed after the small hit ends. In the case of Yes in step 1785-1, in step 1785-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M, the stop symbol is a big hit symbol that shifts to a time-saving gaming state after a big hit end (in this example, 4B in this example) It is determined whether or not 5A, 5B, 7A, 7B. If Yes in step 1785-2, then the process moves to step 1758-5. If No in step 1785-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1785-3 whether or not the special game triggered by the small hit symbol on the first main game side is over. . In the case of Yes in step 1785-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M in step 1785-4 changes the time-saving gaming state after the big-hit completion when the big-hit is executed with the small-short hit symbol (the small hit symbol It is a small hit symbol that is to be transferred, and in this example, it is determined whether or not the special game is over based on 7AK), and the process moves to step 1785-5. Also in the case of No in step 1785-3, the process proceeds to step 1785-5. Next, at step 1785-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the stop symbol is the first main gaming symbol (the first main gaming side big hit symbol or the first main gaming side small hit symbol) Determine If Yes in step 1785-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets 100 as a predetermined number A, which is a relatively large number, to the counter value of the time reduction number counter MP52c in step 1785-6, and step 1785 Shift to -8. In the case of No at step 1785-5, at step 1785-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the counter value of the time reduction number counter MP52c to one as the predetermined number B which is a relatively small number, Go to step 1785-8. Next, in steps 1785-8 and 1785-9, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game time short flag and turns on the auxiliary game time short flag, and performs the next process (the process of step 1997). Transition. In the case of No in step 1785-2, in other words, in the case of "4A" in which the stop symbol is not a short time big hit symbol or in the case of No in step 1785-4, in other words, "2 AK which is a short time hit symbol Also after the end of the special game triggered by "", it shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1997). As described above, in the fourth embodiment, when the game state is shifted to the time reduction game state after the big hit ends, two types of time reductions are performed, the number of times A as a predetermined number A (100 times) and the predetermined number B (one time). It has a number of times, and is configured such that a predetermined number of times A, which is a relatively large number of times, can be a short number of times after the big hit of the first main game side ends. In other words, if you proceed with the game with left hitting in non-time shortening gaming state, win the big hit of the first main gaming side (big hit symbol stops), and shift to time shortening gaming state after the big hit (first hit) In the case (1), a predetermined number of times A (100 times) will be given as the number of time reductions. Further, in the fourth embodiment, (1) The upper limit number of holdings on the second main game side is one, and the second main game side's small hit winning probability (probability of being a small hit when executing a random lottery) ) Is 639/1024, (2) If a big hit is executed triggered by a small hit on the second main game side, after the big hit ends, it shifts to the time-saving gaming state, and (3) the first main game When a big hit is executed triggered by a small hit on the side, after the big hit ends, there may be transition to the time reduction gaming state or transition to the non-time reduction gaming state, (4) the first main gaming side When a big hit is executed triggered by the stop of the big hit symbol, it is configured as if it shifts to a time shortening gaming state or may shift to a non-time shortening gaming state after the big hit ends.

In this example, the following configuration may be made. In addition, the following configuration may apply only a part, and may apply the configuration which is not listed below (for example, the number of types of small hit symbols is the first main game side and the second main game Each side has a plurality of types, etc.).
(1) If there is a ball entry to the V winning opening during a small hit, the game state is shifted to time reduction after the big hit ends with the small hit (2) The small hit symbol is the first main game One type is provided on the side, and one type is provided on the second main game side. (3) The number of execution rounds at the big hit triggered by entering the ball is drawn on the occasion of entering the V winning opening under small hit. (For example, any of 7 or 13 rounds, including the execution round of the small hit)
(4) The number of execution rounds of the big hit is decided based on the big hit symbol triggered by the stop of the big hit symbol, and has multiple types of the first main game side and the second main game side as a big hit symbol (5) the second 1 The maximum number of reservations on the main game side is four, and the maximum number of reservations on the second main game side is one. Thus, the small hit symbol is 1 for each of the first main game and the second main game. We have kind, and there are more than big hit design than kind of small hit design, and it is configured to have multiple kinds in each of the 1st main game and the 2nd main game, and to V prize opening during small hit By configuring to determine the number of execution rounds of the subsequent big hit by entering the ball by lottery, for example, transition to the time shortening gaming state after the big hit ends, and 100 times as a time-saving number (winning in small hit, small hit Shortly when you can almost enter the V winning opening during In the case where) is granted, when the small hit is won, the number of execution rounds of the big hit triggered by the small hit is determined by visually recognizing the small hit symbol, and the number of execution rounds of the big hit is relative If the number is small, the game ball is not shot intentionally toward the large winning opening (V winning opening) during the execution of the small hit, and the small hit pertaining to the big hit involving a relatively large number of execution rounds after next time It is possible to prevent the progress of a game different from the original game property of waiting for winning in (small hit symbol). In addition, about the structure of the number of time-savings after the big hit completion, you may comprise as follows.
(1) After the big hit end related to 5A which is a big hit symbol that the number of execution rounds of the first main game side won in the non-time shortening gaming state becomes 6 rounds (1-1) the first main game symbol and the first Time reduction game state ends when the total number of changes with the 2 main game symbols is 100 times (1-2) The number of change times of only the second main game symbol is 100 times the time reduction game state ends (1-3) V Time saving game state ends with five small hits that do not enter the winning opening in a row for 5 consecutive times (between which the V winning opening enters the small winning hit) (1) The first main winning in the time saving gaming state After the big hit end pertaining to 5A which is a big hit symbol where the number of execution rounds on the game side will be six rounds (2-1) The total number of times of variation of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol is 5 times The shortening gaming state ends (2-2) The number of changes of only the second main gaming symbol is Time saving game state ends in time (2-3) The time saving game state ends in 5 consecutive small hits that do not enter the V winning opening (without holding a small hit entering the V winning opening between) (3) After the big hit end concerning 4A which is the big hit symbol which the number of execution rounds of the 1st main game side which is elected in non time shortening game state becomes 6 round, it moves to non time shortening game state (4) time After the big hit end pertaining to 4A which is a big hit symbol that the number of execution rounds of the first main game side won in the reduced gaming state is 6 rounds, (4-1) the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol The total number of changes is 5 times, and the time saving game state ends (4-2) The number of changes of only the second main gaming symbol is 1 and the time shortening game state ends (4-3) Do not hit small hits 5 times in a row Time saving game state ends with (5) after the big hit end concerning 7A which is the big hit symbol when the number of execution rounds of the 1st main game side which is elected in non time shortening game state becomes 12 rounds (5 -1) The time change is short because the total number of changes of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol is 100 times. The game state ends (5-2). The change number of only the second main game symbol is 100 times. The game state ends (5-3) The time saving game state ends with a small hit that does not enter the V winning opening five times in a row (no small hit entering the V winning opening in between) After the big hit end pertaining to 7A which is a big hit symbol that the number of execution rounds of the first main game side won in the reduced game state is 12 rounds, the (6-1) first main game symbol and the second main game symbol The total number of changes is 5 and the time saving game state ends ( 6-2) The time reduction game state is ended by the number of times of fluctuation of only the second main game symbol The game state is over (6-3) The small hit that does not enter the V winning opening is continuous for 5 consecutive times The time saving game state ends with the small hit) (7) The time reduction after the big hit end triggered by 7 AK which is the small hit symbol of the first main game side won in the non-time shortening game state Do not shift to the game state (8) Time reduction After the big hit ended with the 7AK which is the small hit symbol of the first main game side won in the game state, (8-1) the first main game symbol and the second Time reduction game state ends when the total number of changes with the main gaming symbol is 5 and the gaming state ends (8-2) The number of fluctuation times of only the second main gaming symbol is one and the time shortening gaming state ends (8-3) V winning Small hits that do not enter the mouth for 5 consecutive times (Do not hold small hits to enter the V winning opening between) Time saving game state ends in (9) After the big hit end concerning 7B which is a big hit symbol that the number of execution rounds of the 2nd main game side which is won in non time shortening game state becomes 12 rounds (9-1) Time reduction game state ends by the total number of fluctuations of the first main gaming symbol and the second main gaming symbol being ended (9-2) The number of fluctuation only of the second main gaming symbol is one and the time shortening gaming state is End (9-3) Small winnings that do not enter the V winning opening five times in a row (no intervening small hitting entering the V winning opening in between) The time shortening gaming state ends (10) time shortening gaming state After the big hit end concerning 7B which is the big hit symbol that the number of execution rounds of the 2nd main game side won in 12 is 12 rounds, the total of (10-1) 1st main game symbol and the 2nd main game symbol The number of times of change is 5 and the time reduction game state ends (10-2) The time reduction game state is finished by the number of changes of the main game pattern only once and the game state ends (10-3) The small hit that does not enter the V winning opening is consecutive 5 times (between the small hitting entering the V winning opening between) Time saving game state ends with (11) after the big hit end which is triggered by 7BK which is the small hitting symbol of the 2nd main game side which was elected in non time shortening game state (11-1) 1st main Time reduction game state ends when the total change count of the game symbol and the 2nd main game pattern is 5 times (11-2) The change count of the 2nd main game symbol only ends with 1 time reduction game state ends (11 -3) The time saving game state is ended by five small hits that do not enter the V winning opening in a row for 5 consecutive times (no intervening small hitting entering the V winning opening) After the big hit with 7BK, which is a small hit symbol on the side of the second main game played, 12-1) Time reduction of the total of the first main gaming symbol and the second main gaming symbol is 5 times, and the time-saving gaming state ends (12-2) The variation number of only the second main gaming symbol is one time The reduced gaming state ends (12-3) The small winnings that do not enter the V winning opening are five consecutive times (the small winnings entering the V winning opening are not held between) and the time shortening playing status is more than ending You may configure it.

  Next, FIG. 71 is a flowchart of the small hitting game control process according to the subroutine of step 3050 (fourth) of FIG. 65 in the fourth embodiment. First, in step 3052, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the small hit flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 3052, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the small hit flag in step 3054. Next, in step 3055, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the open pattern of the second large winning opening C20 of the round (in this example, for example, in all small hit symbols, "0.1 second open → 0. It is an open pattern that repeats “5 seconds closed” 10 times, and if the game ball continues to be directed to the second large winning opening C20, a plurality of balls are set to enter the second large winning opening C20. Set). Next, in step 3056, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the small hit execution flag. Next, in step 3058, the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the second large winning opening C20 and starts the small hit gaming timer MP41t, and proceeds to step 3062.

  On the other hand, if No in step 3052, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 3060 whether the small hit execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 3060, the process moves to step 3062.

  Next, in step 3062, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not there is a game ball winning (entering) in the second large winning opening C20. If Yes in step 3062, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 3064 whether or not a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls have been received in the second large winning opening C20. In the case of Yes in step 3064, the process proceeds to step 3068. On the other hand, if No in step 3062 or step 3064, in step 3066, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the small hit game timer MP41t has reached a predetermined time. If Yes in step 3066, then the process proceeds to step 3068.

  Next, in step 3068, the CPU MC of the main control board M stops driving the second large winning opening electric combination C21d and closes the second large winning opening C20. Next, at step 3078, the CPUMC of the main control board M stops and resets the small hit gaming timer MP41t. Next, in step 3080, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns off the small hit execution flag, and shifts to the next processing {processing of step 3100 (fourth)}. Also in the case of No in step 3060 or step 3066, the process proceeds to the next processing {processing of step 3100 (fourth)}.

  Next, FIG. 72 is a flowchart of the distribution combination object control process according to the subroutine of step 3100 in FIG. First, at step 3102, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the distribution combination product operation start permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 3102, in step 3104, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the distribution combination work operation start permission flag. Next, in step 3106, the distribution combination object control means MN60 starts a distribution combination product operation timer MN60t (increment timer). Next, in step 3108, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the distribution-parts-in-operation flag. Next, in step 3110, the CPU MC of the main control board M operates the distribution object C23 to the second position, and shifts to step 3112. Also in the case of No in step 3102, the processing shifts to step 3112. Here, in the present embodiment, the distribution character C23 is a first position as an initial position (a position where the portion where the gaming ball is stored is in the upward direction when viewed from the player, and In some cases, when the game ball enters the second big winning opening C20, it is stopped at the position where the entered game ball is stored in the distribution function C23). In addition, the second position is a position where the portion where the gaming ball is stored is in the right direction when viewed from the player (when the gaming ball enters the second big winning opening C20 when it is in that position, the relevant position It is a position where the game ball which entered the ball is not stored by distribution side thing C23).

  Next, in step 3112, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the distribution / moving thing in operation flag is on. If Yes in step 3112, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the distribution combination thing operation timer MN 60t in step 3114, and the timer value is the first operation value (the distribution thing is the first from the second position) It is a timer value activated to the position, and in this example, it is determined whether or not 2 seconds). If Yes in step 3114, in step 3116, the CPUMC of the main control board M operates the distribution combination C23 to the first position, and shifts to the next processing {processing of step 1950 (fourth)}.

  On the other hand, if No in step 3114, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the distribution work thing operation timer MN 60t in step 3118, and the timer value is the second operation value (the distribution thing is from the first position) It is a timer value activated to the second position, and in this example, it is determined whether or not 4 seconds has been reached. If Yes in step 3118, in step 3120, the CPUMC of the main control board M operates the distribution object C23 to the second position, and shifts to the next processing {processing of step 1950 (fourth)}. In the case where the game ball is stored in the distribution combination C23 at the timing of the process of step 3120, the game ball enters the V winning opening C22 triggered by the process.

  On the other hand, if No in step 3118, the CPUMC of the main control board M refers to the distribution combination thing operation timer MN 60t in step 3122 and the timer value is the third operation value (the distribution thing is from the second position) It is a timer value operated to the first position, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it has become six seconds. In the case of Yes in step 3122, in step 3124, the CPUMC of the main control board M operates the distribution object C 23 to the first position. Next, in step 3126, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the distribution-part-in-operation flag. Next, in step 3128, the CPU MC of the main control board M clears the distribution workpiece operation timer MN 60t to zero, and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 3150). Also in the case of No in step 3112 or step 3122, the processing shifts to the next processing {processing of step 1950 (fourth)}.

  Here, the upper right part of the same figure is an illustration of distribution / parts operation. The initial position of the distribution combination C23 is the first position, and operates to the second position at the same time as the small hit game is started, and based on the distribution combination operation timer value, “second position → first position → It is configured to operate from the second position to the initial position (first position). In addition, the distribution combination thing operation timer value becomes the 1st operation value and becomes the 1st position → the game ball enters the second large winning opening C20 → the game ball reaches the distribution function C23 → The game ball is stored in the distribution function C23 → the distribution function operation timer value becomes the second operation value and becomes the second position → the stored game ball enters the V winning opening C22, A big hit (special game) will be induced by performing a series of motions of.

  Next, FIG. 73 is a flow chart of the V winning a prize inlet determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1950 (fourth) of FIG. 66 in the fourth embodiment. First, in step 1952, the CPUMC of the main control board M is a condition device operation reservation flag (a flag which is turned on in step 1960 described later, that is, the game ball enters the V prize opening C27 in the V prize opening effective period. It is determined whether or not the flag (which turns on when the ball is turned on) is off. In the case of Yes in step 1952, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines in step 1954 whether or not the game ball has entered the V winning opening C27. If Yes in step 1954, in step 1956, whether the CPUMC of the main control board M is within the V winning opening effective period (period from the start timing of the small hit game to the end timing of the small hit game) or not Determine In addition, you may provide discharge waiting time as time to wait until the game ball which entered the 2nd big winning a prize mouth C20 is discharged to the outside of the 2nd big winning a prize mouth C20 in small hitting, and it was constituted like that In this case, the V winning a prize opening effective period may be from the small hit game start to the discharge standby time end. If Yes in step 1956, in step 1958, the CPUMC of the main control board M transmits a V prize detection command (a command for executing a V prize detection effect described later) to the sub main control unit SM side The command transmission buffer MT10 is set (sent to the sub main control unit SM by the control command transmission processing of step 1999). Next, in step 1960, the CPU MC of the main control board M turns on the condition device operation reservation flag, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1997).

  On the other hand, if No in step 1952, in step 1962, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the V winning a prize opening valid period (period from the start timing of the small hit game to the end timing of the small hit game) has ended. It is determined whether or not. If Yes in step 1962, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the condition device activation flag in step 1964, and shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1997). Also in the case of No in step 1954, step 1956 or step 1962, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1997). Also, in the case of No at step 1956, in other words, when the danger of unauthorized ball entry such as game ball entering the V winning opening C27 increases despite the fact that the small hit game is not executed, It is preferable to be configured to execute error processing as appropriate. In addition, the number of rounds of special games pertaining to entering the ball into the V winning opening C27 is "7R" or "15R", and a series of "special games pertaining to entering the ball into the V winning opening C27". The sum of the flows is "8R" or "16R" with "1R" of the round number relating to the small hit game and "7R" or "15R" of the round number relating to the special game.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 74 to 76, control processing executed on the side of the sub main control unit SM according to the fourth embodiment will be described. First, FIG. 74 is a main flowchart of the sub control board S side (particularly, the sub main control unit SM side) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. Here, the process of FIG. 6A is a process on the side of the sub main control unit SM which is executed after resetting such as when the power is turned on to the gaming machine. The difference from the present embodiment is step 2001 (fourth), step 2003 (fourth) and step 2450 (fourth). That is, when power is supplied to the gaming machine, in step 2001 (fourth), the CPUSC of the sub control board S resets and starts the power supply timer SM24t. The power on timer SM24t is provided to grasp the opening timing of the lower shielding member C25. Next, in step 2002, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes an initial process based on the information received from the main side (the main control board M side) (for example, when the RAM clear information is received → sub side When the RAM is initialized and various information commands are received → Reproduction related information at power-off is reset to the sub side RAM). Next, in step 2003 (fourth), the CPUSC of the sub control board S restores the number of reservations (for example, the drawing hold counter value) based on the information received from the main side (the main control board M side). In addition, the effect under execution, the information concerning the special symbol, etc. are not restored, and the "under preparation" screen is displayed until the start of the next change. Thereafter, the process shifts to loop processing in which (b), which is a repetitive processing routine of the CPUSC of the sub control board S, is repeatedly executed. The difference between this embodiment and the present embodiment in (b) is that the stay stage determination process of step 2450 (fourth) and step 2600 is deleted. That is, in step 2300, the CPUSC of sub control board S is processed. However, after executing the decorative symbol display control process described above, in step 2450 (fourth), the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a V prize detection effect display control process described later, and shifts to the process of step 2500. .

  Next, FIG. 75 is a flowchart of the V winning detection effect display control process according to the subroutine of step 2450 (fourth) in FIG. 74 in the fourth embodiment. First, at step 2456, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is an effect for notifying the player that the game ball has entered the V prize detection command (V prize opening C27 from the main side (main control board M side) It is determined whether or not a command to execute V prize detection effect is received. In the case of Yes at step 2456, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command relating to the V winning detection effect at step 2458 (sent to the sub sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control processing of step 2999). , Shift to the next processing (processing of step 2500). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2456, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2500). In addition, since the V prize detection effect is an effect for notifying the player that the game ball enters the V prize opening C 27 and then the special game is executed, an effect for blessing the player as an effect content The contents and presentation contents and the like for notifying that the player has a high profit are desirable. For example, it is a presentation for displaying "V" on the full display area SG10 on the presentation display device SG.

  Next, FIG. 76 is a flowchart of special game effect execution processing according to the subroutine of step 2550 (fourth) in FIG. 23 in the fourth embodiment. First, in step 2585-1, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command for sequentially displaying the number of rounds and the number of winnings in numbers. Next, in step 2585-2, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads out information on hold (e.g., a lottery random number, a stop symbol determination random number, etc.). Next, in step 2585-3, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not there is a hold scheduled to be won for a small hit in the hold. In the case of Yes in step 2585-3, in step 2585-4, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a small hit reservation lottery to be won with a predetermined probability (for example, 1⁄4). Next, in step 2585-5, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the executed small hitting hold notification lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 2585-5, in step 2585-6, the CPUSC of the sub control board S displays a notification of small hit hold notification effect (a notification that there is a hold scheduled to be won in a small hit within the hold condition) Is set (sent to the sub-sub control unit SS in the display command transmission control process of step 2999), and the process proceeds to step 2585-7. Incidentally, even in the case of No at Step 2585-3 or Step 2585-5, the processing shifts to Step 2585-7. In addition, by the small hit hold notification production being executed, you will be informed that there is a hold that will be a small hit in the hold, but a big hit when a big hit is performed triggered by the small hit The number of rounds according to is configured not to notify, that is, it is configured not to notify which of the small hit symbols related to the hold targeted for the small hit hold notification effect. In addition, about the execution timing of small hit reservation information production, it may be decided to execute in any round below the maximum round in the big hit which is executed, it is decided uniquely with the execution round number of the big hit (( For example, when the number of execution rounds is 16R, the number 12R may be configured, and when the number of execution rounds is 8R, the number 4R may be configured.

  Next, in step 2585-7, the CPUSC of the sub control board S starts the division round start timing (the start timing of the round which is a branch whether or not the number of execution rounds of the big hit is 16 rounds, and in this example, It is determined whether or not the start timing of the eighth round has been reached. In this example, since 8R and 16R exist as the number of execution rounds (including small hits), the start timing of the eighth round is the delimiting round start timing. In the case of Yes in Step 2585-7, in Step 2585-8, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines that the running big hit is the big round big hit (the big hit in which the number of rounds executed during the big hit is the largest In the example, it is determined whether or not 16R is a big hit to be performed. If Yes in step 2585-8, in step 2585-9, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S indicates that the round-up success effect (the round in progress is not the final round of the special game but the special game continues to be executed after the next time) It is an effect to notify that it is to be done, and for example, a command to execute “+ 8RGET !!” is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2520). In the case of No at step 2585-8, in other words, it is a big hit where the number of rounds to be executed is relatively small, and in this example it is a big hit where the number of rounds to be executed is "8". In step 2585-10, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S indicates that the round-up failure effect (informing that the current round is the final round of the special game, for example, displays "Sorry ..." Is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2520). Also in the case of No at step 2585-7, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing of step 2520). As described above, in the fourth embodiment, as the effect to be executed during the special game, there is a small hit hold notification effect for notifying whether or not there is a hold that is a small hit in the hold, and a big hit in progress It is comprised so that two production | presentation with the round-up success production | presentation (failure production | production) alerting | reporting that the number of execution rounds of is relatively large can be performed. In the fourth embodiment, since the number of execution rounds of the special game is only 8R and 16R, the big hit does not end in the 8R, that is, it is determined that the 9R is executed, It becomes definite that the number of execution rounds of the special game in the inside is 16R, but it is not limited to this, and the type of the number of execution rounds may be increased, or round up production (round up success production and round A generic term “up failure effect” may be configured to be executed a plurality of times during one special game. Specifically, as the number of execution rounds, four rounds of 4R, 6R, 8R, 10R, and 16R are provided, and the special game except the maximum round number may end rounds (4R, 6R, 8R, 10R) It may be configured to execute an effect (for example, to execute a battle effect and continue if not defeated) asking whether or not the special game is to be continued. In addition, as an execution timing of round up production, it may be constituted so that it may be performed in a round before a division round start timing. Also, apart from the small hit hold notification effect and the round-up effect described above, a play that indicates the number of big hit hold rounds that are or are running in the hold condition, that is, a small hit hold notification It may be configured to be able to execute one effect combining the effect and the round-up effect, and the combined effect may be executed in a predetermined round of the big hit.

  By configuring as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, a plurality of jackpot execution round numbers to be executed triggered by a small hit on the second main game side are provided, and the big hit continues A round-up effect informing that it is a big hit that is executed and the number of execution rounds is relatively large can be carried out during the big hit, and a small hit informing that there is a hold that will be a small hit within the hold. By making it possible to perform during the on-hold notification effect big hit, it is possible to enhance the interest in the big hit.

The following configuration may be applied in this example.
(1) The first main gaming symbol fluctuation time associated with a loss in the time reduction gaming state when the number of time reductions is 100 times, the first main game symbol pertaining to the loss in the time reduction gaming state when the number of time reductions is one Fluctuation time is also relatively short time (for example, 1 second, and advance notice effect is not executed), the first main pertaining to big hit or small hit in the time reduction gaming state in the case of 100 times of time reduction The variation time of the game symbol, the time reduction number of times is one time reduction The variation time of the first main game symbol related to the big hit or small hit in the gaming state is also relatively long (for example, 30 seconds, and As the advance notice effect, the success or failure turn effect A is executed and succeeds, and the above tendency tends to occur regardless of the number of reservations on the first main game side (both lost, big hit and small hit).
(2) Time reduction when the number of time reductions is 100 times The fluctuation time of the second main game symbol pertaining to a loss in the time-saving gaming state is relatively short (for example, one second and no advance notice effect is executed) There is a time reduction number of 100 times The variation time of the second main game symbol related to the big hit or small hit in the time reduction gaming state is relatively long time (for example, 30 seconds, and as a notice effect, it is a pass / fail The fluctuation effect time of the second main game symbol relating to a loss in the time reduction gaming state in which the beat effect A is executed and succeeds and the number of time reductions is one is relatively long (for example, 60 seconds) And, as a notice effect, a hit or abscission effect A is executed and fails, and an effect is suggested to cause a hold on the second main game side, and the hold on the second main game side is the second main game side Occurs when the pending limit is reached The second main game symbol fluctuation time related to the big hit or the small hit in the time reduction game state when the time reduction is 100 times is relatively long time (for example, 30 seconds, And, as a notice effect, success or rejection effect A is executed and succeeds, and the above-mentioned tendency (both loss, big hit and small hit) does not depend on the number of reservations on the second main game side.
(3) The fluctuation time of the second main game symbol related to the loss in the non-time shortening gaming state is relatively long (for example, 45 seconds, and, as a preliminary effect, it is a failure to execute the yes or no effect B ), And the fluctuation time of the second main game symbol pertaining to the big hit or small hit in the non-time shortening gaming state is relatively long time (for example, 45 seconds, and the effect is success or failure B → success) Yes, with the above trend (both lost, big hit and small hit) regardless of the number of reservations on the 2nd main game side
In addition, production modes are different between success or failure production A and success or failure production B (for example, success or failure production A is a battle production and success or failure production B is a mission production). In addition, as fluctuation time of the 1st main game design in non time shortening game state, in case of the design fluctuation which relates to the loss, 4 seconds of 3 seconds, 10 seconds, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, the design which relates to big hit or small hit In the case of fluctuation, there are three types of 15 seconds, 35 seconds, and 65 seconds, and the fluctuation time concerning loss is easy to be selected as the shorter time value out of 4 types, and the fluctuation time concerning big hit or small hit is 3 out of 3 types The longer the time value is, the easier it is to be selected, and for the fluctuation time related to the loss, when the number of reservations on the first main game side is 0 to 1, three types other than 3 seconds are selected as the fluctuation time. Even if the number of reservations is 2 to 3, all four types are selected, and the variation time relating to the big hit or small hit is configured to be selected regardless of the number of reservations on the first main game side. Good.

In the fourth embodiment, only one time reduction counter is provided, and the counter value is subtracted by the change of the first main game symbol and the change of the second main game symbol, that is, with the first main game symbol Although the time shortening gaming state is configured to end when the total number of times of change with the second main gaming symbol reaches a predetermined value, the present invention is not limited to this, the time reduction counter α and the time reduction counter as time reduction counters. It has two counters with β, and the time reduction counter α subtracts the counter value according to the change of the first main game symbol and the change of the second main game symbol, and the time reduction counter β is for the second main game side The counter value may be subtracted only by the fluctuation, and the time reduction gaming state may be ended when any of the counter values of the time reduction counter α and the time reduction counter β becomes 0. That is, to satisfy either the total number of fluctuations of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol reaches a predetermined value or the number of fluctuations of only the second main game symbol reaches a specific value The time shortening game state may be configured to end by the. In addition, time reduction may be called the end number, and it is configured to have the first end number and the second end number as the end number, and when the big hit is executed because the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. If the number of closing times is the number of closing times and the small hitting symbol is stopped and displayed, a small hit will be executed, and if the big hit is executed by entering the V winning opening during the small hitting, the second closing number of times If you configure to
(1) Let X be the probability of winning a big hit (big hit symbol) before the symbol variation of the first final number is executed.
If the probability of winning a big hit (big hit symbol) by the time the symbol variation of the second final number is executed is Y, then “X ≦ Y”,
(2) Let X be the probability of winning a small hit before the symbol variation of the first final number is executed,
If it is assumed that the probability that a small hit can be won before the symbol variation of the second final number of times is executed is “X ≦ Y”,
(3) Let X be the probability of winning in a small hit in which entry to the V winning opening becomes relatively easy until the symbol variation of the first final number is executed.
“X ≦ Y”, where Y is the probability of winning in a small hit where entry to the V winning opening is relatively easy before the symbol variation of the second final period is executed. You may
In the above configuration, X and Y may be compared with the symbol variation as the symbol variation only on the first main game side and the big hit and small hit as the big hit and small hit only on the first main game side, or symbol variation It is possible to compare X and Y with only the symbol variation of the second main game side and the big hit and the small hit as the big hit and the small hit of the second main game side only.

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, when winning the first main game side's big hit (big hit symbol) in the non-time shortening gaming state, the ratio of shifting to the time shortening gaming state after the big hit is 60%. The second main game side has a limit of 4 on hold, and the second main game side has a small hit selection rate (probability of winning a small hit in one symbol change) is 20% It is also good, that is, the small hit selection rate of the second main game side is less than the rate of transition to the time reduction gaming state after the big hit when winning in the first main game side big hit in the non-time shortening gaming state If the jackpot on the second main game side wins the jackpot on the first main game side in the non-time shortening gaming state, it shifts to the time shortening gaming state after the big hit ends It may be configured to be equal to or higher than In addition, the number of closing times after the big hit end which won in time shortening game state or after the big hit with the small hit is the first number of closing times, after the big hit end or small hit which was won in the non-time shortening game state The number of closing times after the end of the big hit may be configured to be the number of second closing times, or may be applied as appropriate combining the above-described configuration regarding the number of time reductions.

(Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment)
In the fourth embodiment, the special game is executed in response to the game ball entering the V winning opening C 27 during the small hit game, and the upper limit number of the second main game holding balls is set to “1 Although the configuration of “is described in detail, it is not limited thereto. In the case where the upper limit number of the second main game holding balls is set to a value larger than "1", only the changes from the fourth embodiment will be described in detail as a first modification from the fourth embodiment.

  Next, FIG. 77 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing according to the subroutine of step 1300 (second modification 3) in FIG. 65 in the first modification from the fourth embodiment. In the same figure, the points of change from the third modification to the second embodiment will be described in detail. The change point from the fourth embodiment is step 1332 (fourth modification 1), that is, the CPUMC of the main control board M enters the second main game start opening B10 in step 1331 (second main game start opening If it is determined that the second main game start opening ball insertion information has been received from the ball insertion detection device B11s), the CPUMC of the main control board M holds the holding ball on the second main game side in step 1332 (fourth modification 1). It is determined whether or not the upper limit is within the upper limit (in this example, the upper limit of the hold on the second main game side is two). In the case of Yes in step 1332 (fourth modification), the process proceeds to step 1333. In the case of No in step 1332 (fourth modification), the process proceeds to step 1333.

  Next, FIG. 78 shows an example of the main game tables 1 and 2 in the first modification from the fourth embodiment. First, in the fourth embodiment to the first modification, the probability of winning a small hit on the second main game side is lower (the probability of 411/1024) than in the fourth embodiment. Also, as a small hit symbol on the first main game side, it is easier to win the "2AK" than the fourth embodiment, and it is difficult to win the "7AK". In addition, the number of execution rounds of the big hit when the big hit is executed triggered by the small hit of the second main game side is only one kind of 13R (the total number of execution rounds when the small hit is 1 R) There is. Here, in the first modification from the fourth embodiment, when the big hit symbol on the first main game side is stopped and the big hit is executed, the big hit symbol to shift to the time-saving gaming state after the big hit ends is “5A・ 7A. Therefore, the ratio of shifting to the time shortening gaming state after the big hit end when the big hit symbol on the first main game side is stopped is "524/1024". On the other hand, when the big hit is executed triggered by the small hit of the first main game side, the small hit symbol that will shift to the time shortening gaming state after the big hit is “7 AK”, and the small of the first main game side The ratio to shift to the time-saving gaming state after the big hit ending with the hit becomes “824/1024”, and on the 1st main game side, the big hit symbol is more than the big hit symbol is stopped and the big hit is executed If the big hit is stopped triggered by the small hit related to the small hit symbol, the ratio of shifting to the time-saving gaming state after the big hit is relatively high. The number of execution rounds at the time of the big hit execution triggered by the stop of the big hit symbol on the second main game side may be all 12 rounds (any of 4B, 5B and 7B).

  By configuring as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fourth embodiment, as in the fourth embodiment, it is informed that there is a suspension that becomes a small hit in the suspension. By making the small hit hold notification effect executable during the big hit, it is possible to enhance the interest during the big hit, and on the first main game side, it is smaller than the big hit executed by the big hit symbol being stopped. Since the big hit is structured so that the transition rate to the time shortening gaming state after the big hit ends becomes high when the hit takes place, for example, the big hit symbol of the first main game side is stopped in the non-time shortening gaming state Even when there is a hold that is a small hit of the first main game side in the hold during the big hit being performed by the player, the small hit hold notification effect is executed, and the player has a high profit. Become Recognize, interest of the game becomes more enhanced it.

(Modification 2 from the fourth embodiment)
In the fourth embodiment, the special game is executed in response to the game ball entering the V winning opening C 27 during the small hit game, and the upper limit number of the second main game holding balls is set to “1 Although the configuration of “is described in detail, it is not limited thereto. In the case where the upper limit number of the second main game holding balls is set to a value larger than "1", only the changes from the fourth embodiment will be described in detail as a second modification from the fourth embodiment.

  First, FIG. 79 is a flowchart of gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game, according to the subroutine of step 1750 (fourth) of FIG. 16 in the second modification from the fourth embodiment. The change from the fourth embodiment is step 1785-7 (fourth modification), that is, after the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the stop symbol is not the first main game symbol at step 1785-5. At step 1785-7 (fourth modification), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the counter value of the time reduction counter MP52c a predetermined number of times C (two times in this example), and proceeds to step 1785-8. Do. In the second modification of the fourth embodiment, the upper limit number of holdings on the second main game side is two equal to the predetermined number C of times.

  Next, FIG. 80 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2300 of FIG. 74 in Modification 2 of the fourth embodiment. The changes from the fourth embodiment are step 2320 (fourth modification) and step 2650 (fourth modification), that is, in step 2304, the CPUSC of the sub control board S has the symbol content determination permission flag After turning off, in step 2320 (fourth modification), the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the current gaming state is the normal gaming state (non-time-saving gaming state). In the case of Yes in step 2320 (fourth modification), the CPUSC of the sub control board S proceeds to step 2306. In the case of No at step 2320 (fourth modification 2), the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes the processing contents determination processing during time-shortening, which will be described later, at step 2650 (fourth modification 2). Do.

  Next, FIG. 81 is a flowchart of the process of determining the contents of effect during time-sourcing according to the subroutine of step 2650 (fourth modification) of FIG. 80 in the second modification from the fourth embodiment. First, at step 2654, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol related to the symbol variation based on the information on the stop symbol of the main game symbol. Next, in step 2656, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the symbol variation is a short-term variation (in this example, a symbol variation of a variation time of 10 seconds). Here, in the second modification from the fourth embodiment, as the fluctuation time of the main gaming symbol in the time reduction gaming state, a short time fluctuation which is a fluctuation time of 10 seconds and a medium time fluctuation which is a fluctuation time of 30 seconds It is configured that three types of fluctuation time, that is, a long time fluctuation that is a fluctuation time of 60 seconds, can be selected. In addition, the configuration of the fluctuation time in the time reduction gaming state may be changed, for example, only one type of 10 seconds may be used, or the average value of the fluctuation time may be a short time (for example, 7 seconds).

  In the case of Yes in step 2656, in step 2658, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S changes the variation pattern of the decorative symbol according to the symbol variation, the first half: "5 seconds variation → temporary stop", the second half: "5 seconds variation → stop It will be decided on 2 times of pseudo ream. Here, in the modification example 2 from the fourth embodiment, when the variation of the decorative symbol which is a short-term variation is executed, the symbol variation which is actually executed once in 10 seconds is a pseudo-variation of 5 seconds By performing 2 times (the stop symbol in the symbol change in the second half is the fixed stop symbol), it is as if the player sees the pattern change of the change time of 5 seconds as if it is executed twice. It is a method (see the image on the bottom of the figure). Next, in step 2660, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the first half as the effect content relating to the symbol variation: "effect content suggesting the fluctuation time of the symbol variation according to the second half of the variation"; It is determined that the effect contents suggesting the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation related to the fluctuation, and the process proceeds to the next processing (processing of step 2308). In addition, the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation concerning the latter half of the fluctuation is the fluctuation time of the latter half of the fluctuation or the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation after the next fluctuation. Thus, at the time of execution of the short-time fluctuation in the case of the time reduction gaming state, the success or failure result concerning the fluctuation state currently executed (which symbol fluctuation and which one of the first half and the second half) Is not executed, that is, the effect (for example, reach) whether to indicate the fluctuation time of the symbol variation (including the second half of the symbol variation if it is the first half of the present period) after the present An effect to make a fight is to be executed.

  Returning to the description of the flowchart, in the case of No at step 2656, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines at step 2662 whether or not the symbol variation is medium time variation (symbol variation of 30 seconds variation time) Do. In the case of Yes in step 2662, the CPUSC of the sub control board S in step 2664 changes the variation pattern of the decorative symbol according to the symbol variation in the first half: "5 seconds variation → temporary stop", the second half: "(5 seconds variation → It is determined that the pseudo-follow-up development failure is “stop after multiple executions of the temporary stop) (determination stop)”. In this way, when the symbol variation of the medium time variation in the case of being in the time shortening gaming state is executed, after executing the variation mode similar to the symbol variation of the short time variation described above, the symbol of the short time variation Special symbols (temporary stop symbols for which subsequent pseudo change will be executed) are temporarily stopped at stop timings related to changes, and then the lost symbols are fixedly stopped without reaching with multiple reach after repeated pseudo change It is comprised so that it may become such a fluctuation | variation aspect. Next, in step 2666, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the first half as "representation content indicating the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation related to the second half of the fluctuation" and the second half as "representation content related to the symbol fluctuation". It is determined that the content of presentation that indicates the result of the change's success or failure, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2308). Further, in the case of No at step 2662, in other words, when the symbol variation is a long-term variation (symbol variation of a variation time of 60 seconds), the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines the symbol at step 2668. The first half: "5 seconds fluctuation → temporary stop", and the second half: "(5 seconds fluctuation → temporary stop) run multiple times and execute reach change and stop (decisive stop)". It will be determined to be a successful post-training success. In this way, when the symbol variation of the medium time variation in the case of being in the time shortening gaming state is executed, after executing the variation mode similar to the symbol variation of the short time variation described above, the symbol of the short time variation Special symbols (temporary stop symbols for which subsequent pseudo change will be executed) are temporarily stopped at stop timings related to changes, and then the lost symbols are fixedly stopped without reaching with multiple reach after repeated pseudo change It is comprised so that it may become such a fluctuation | variation aspect. Next, in step 2670, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S sets the first half as "representation content indicating the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation related to the second half of the fluctuation" and the second half as "representation content related to the symbol fluctuation". It is determined that the content of presentation that indicates the result of the change's success or failure, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2308). In this way, when the symbol variation of the medium time variation or the long variation time in the time reduction gaming state is executed, the symbol variation after the present in the first half as well as the short period variation (in the first half If there is, the effect that suggests the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation including the latter half of the symbol fluctuation (for example, the effect of asking whether or not reach) will be executed, but in the second half, the fluctuation of the said fluctuation It is configured to execute an effect that suggests a result (for example, an effect that indicates the expected jackpot of the symbol variation). In this way, during the symbol variation in the short variation and in the first half of the symbol variation in the middle variation or the long variation, the symbol variation after the present (including the second half of the symbol variation if it is the first half of the present) In the second half of the symbol variation in medium variation or long variation, it is configured to indicate the result of the success or failure of the variation, ie, prefetching An effect that is not an effect will be executed. In this example, although it is configured to execute “demonstrative content that indicates the result of the change,” in the second half of the medium-time fluctuation and the long-term fluctuation, “demonstrative that indicates the result of the change” The period in which the content is executed is not limited to this. For example, the timing at which the short fluctuation time ends, that is, the timing after 10 seconds after the start of fluctuation in the symbol fluctuation of the middle fluctuation time or the long fluctuation time It may be configured to execute the “content of presentation that suggests the result of the success or failure of the game”. In addition, the "content of presentation that suggests the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation related to the latter half of the fluctuation", which is executed in the first half of the symbol fluctuation of the short fluctuation time, is configured to be executed whenever the pseudo fluctuation is executed. It is not necessary to do so, and it may be configured such that there may be cases where "effect contents suggesting a variation time of symbol variation related to the latter half of the variation" or not may be performed depending on the pseudo variation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to always execute an effect targeting symbol fluctuation (symbol fluctuation for a long time, symbol fluctuation in which reach effect is executed) with a relatively high hit probability, and a plurality of notices By combining effects and the like, it is possible to prevent a situation in which it is difficult to determine which effect that indicates the degree of expectation for symbol variation is being executed. In addition, in this embodiment, when symbol variation other than short variation is executed during the time-saving gaming state, “simulation variation (5 seconds) → simulation variation (5 seconds) → simulation variation is executed 4 times ( 5 seconds × 4 times → fixed stop in the case of medium fluctuation, reach in the case of long fluctuation but it is not limited to this, “pseudo fluctuation (5 seconds) → pseudo fluctuation (5 Second) → reach → reach the symbol becomes a temporary stop four times the simulation of the symbol that has become a temporary stop (5 seconds × 4 times) ", in the pattern variation other than short variation more than after reaching reach after 10 seconds multiple It may be configured to execute a series of pseudo-variations (temporary stop). When configured in this manner, it may be configured such that the jackpot expectation of the symbol variation becomes higher as the number of times of the pseudo variation (temporary stop) after reaching the reach increases. In addition, the super reach may be performed after a plurality of simulated changes after the reach are performed.

  By configuring as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the fourth embodiment, a plurality of (two) upper limit numbers of holdings on the second main game side, and the second main game side By configuring the number of time saving times when transitioning to the time saving gaming state after the big hit ends as 2 times, when transitioning to the time shortening gaming state after the big hit ends, it wins the small hitting again in the time shortening gaming state ( It is possible to increase the possibility that the symbol variation related to the suspension occurring in the time saving gaming state may be executed in the non-time shortening gaming state). In addition, although the number of time saving times when shifting to the time shortening gaming state after the big hit of the 2nd main game end is only 2 times, by configuring to execute the pseudo change a plurality of times, it is 1 time of the symbol change It is possible to make it appear that a plurality of symbol variations are being executed, and the player has a feeling that a plurality of (for example, 10) success or failure lotterys have been executed in the time reduction gaming state. It can be felt that it is easy to win the jackpot in the gaming state.

  In the second modification of the fourth embodiment, after the end of the big hit on the second main game side (including both the big hit triggered by the stop of the big hit symbol and the big hit triggered by the small hit) Although it is configured to shift to all time saving gaming state, it is not limited thereto, and there is provided a case of shifting to non-time shortening gaming state and a case of shifting to time shortening gaming state after the big hit of the second main game side It may be configured, and by adjusting the ratio of shifting to the time shortening gaming state after the big hit of the second main game side, it is possible to adjust the probability of being able to win a small hit or a big hit in the time shortening gaming state For example, the ratio of shifting to the time-saving gaming state after the end of the big hit triggered by the small hit may be different depending on the gaming state in which the small hit on the second main game side is won.

The following is a list of configurations applicable to gaming machines including a modification 2 from the fourth embodiment, in which a big hit will be executed when the gaming ball enters the V winning opening during a small hit. Do.
(1) The ratio of shifting to the time shortening gaming state after the big hit ending with the small hit of the second main gaming side won in the time shortening gaming state, and the second main gaming side won in the non-time shortening gaming state It may be different from the ratio to shift to the time shortening gaming state after the big hit with the small hit as a trigger, the time shortening after the big hit ended with the small hit of the second main game side elected in the time shortening gaming state Even if the ratio of transitioning to the time reduction gaming state after the big hit ending with the small hit of the second main game side won in the non-time shortening gaming state is higher than the ratio of transitioning to the gaming state Good. By configuring in such a manner, it is not possible for the second main game side to win a small hit after the time-saving gaming state is over, even if the chance that it is easier to shift to the time-saving gaming state decreases. It can be a game that can not be made.
(2) The ratio of transitioning to the time shortening gaming state after the big hit that is triggered by the small hit of the second main gaming side won in the time shortening gaming state, and the second main gaming side won in the non-time shortening gaming state It may be different from the ratio to shift to the time shortening gaming state after the big hit with the small hit as a trigger, the time shortening after the big hit ended with the small hit of the second main game side elected in the time shortening gaming state Even if the ratio of transitioning to the time shortening gaming state after the big hit ending with the small hit of the second main game side won in the non-time shortening gaming state is configured to be lower than the ratio transitioning to the gaming state Good. By configuring in this way, it is more advantageous to win the small hit at an early stage, such as transitioning to the time saving gaming state is easy if the player wins the second main game side's small hit simply in the time saving gaming state. It can be playable.
(3) Time saving The probability of being able to win a big hit triggered by a small hit within the gaming state, and after the time shortening gaming state has ended, and with the remaining reserve of the second main gaming side When designing the probability of being able to win a big hit triggered by a small hit to a certain probability close to a certain probability, the probability of winning a big hit triggered by a small hit within the time-saving gaming state is better, If the time saving game state is over, and if it is higher than the probability that you can win a big hit triggered by a small hit in the remaining reserve of the second main game side, It is preferable that the number of times is less than the upper limit of the number held on the second main game side, and the time shortening gaming state is more likely to be won in the big hit triggered by the small hitting in the time shortening gaming state. After the end of the second main In order to lower the probability of winning a big hit triggered by a small hit in the remaining reserve of the skill side, it may be set as "time saving number> upper limit number of holdings on the second main game side". It is suitable.

(Modification 3 from the fourth embodiment)
In the fourth embodiment, the special game is executed in response to the game ball entering the V winning opening C 27 during the small hit game, and the configuration such as the upper limit number of holdings on the second main game side Was described in detail. Here, as an example of the configuration related to the effect of the side of the sub control substrate S that can be executed by the gaming machine having such a configuration, as a third modification from the fourth embodiment, the following changes from the fourth embodiment Only the points will be described in detail.

  Next, FIG. 82 is a flowchart of a motorized product drive drive determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 of FIG. 65 in the third modification example of the fourth embodiment. First, changes from the fourth embodiment are step 1237-1 (fourth modification), step 1237-2 (fourth modification), and step 1241 (fourth modification), ie, step After the CPUMC of the main control board M opens the second main game start opening motorized part B11d at 1236, the CPUMC of the main control board M has a main game time short flag at step 1237-1 (fourth modification 3). It is determined whether the is on. In the case of Yes in step 1237-1 (fourth modification 3), the CPUMC of the main control board M in step 1237-2 (fourth modification 3) is an electric combination opening start command (second main game start opening electric combination) It is a command to the effect that opening of object B11d has started, and a command to the side of the sub control board S is set (sent to the side of the sub main control unit SM by the control command transmission process of step 1999) Do. On the other hand, if the result of the step 1237-1 (the fourth modification 3) is No, then the process proceeds to the next process (the process of the step 1300). Further, after the CPUMC of the main control board M closes the second main game start opening motorized part B11d in step 1240, the CPUMC of the main control board M is an electric part in step 1241 (fourth modification). An opening end command (a command to the effect that opening of the second main game start opening electric combination B11d is ended, a command to the side of the sub control board S) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1242. In the third modification from the fourth embodiment, the opening period from the start of opening of the second main game start opening electric combination B11d to the end of opening is 5 seconds, and the specific second example The opening mode of the main game start opening electric character B11d is "1.0 second open → 1.0 second closed → 1.0 second open → 1.0 second closed → 1.0 second open → closed". . In the third modification from the fourth embodiment, the number of the upper limit number of holdings on the second main game side is one, and the number of time saving times when transitioning to the time shortening gaming state after the big hit of the second main game side is one. It has become. In addition, the open mode of the second main game start opening electric character B11d is not limited to this, and in order to further secure the ball entry ease, “1.0 second open → 6.0 seconds closed → 1. 0 seconds open → 6.0 seconds closed → 1.0 seconds open release → 6.0 seconds closed → 1.0 seconds open release → 6.0 seconds closed → 1.0 seconds open → closed etc. It may be an open mode in which the closed period is longer than the closed period.

  Next, FIG. 83 is an example of the block diagram of the main game table 3 in the third modification from the fourth embodiment. First, the point of change from the fourth embodiment is to change the selection tendency of the variation time of the main gaming symbol in the time reduction gaming state, and in the third modification from the fourth embodiment, in the time reduction gaming state The fluctuation time of the second main game symbol is configured to be relatively long time than that of the fourth embodiment, specifically, to be a long time fluctuation of 30 seconds at both hitting and losing times. The fluctuation time of the first main game symbol related to the loss is configured to be a short time fluctuation of one second. In addition, in the second main game pattern, regardless of whether or not hit hit, time reduction gaming state, all 30 seconds of fluctuation time, ie, because it is all fluctuation time of a long time, time reduction game Even when the second main game symbol has fluctuated in the state, the second main game symbol also fluctuates due to the termination of the hold on the second main game side in the non-time shortening gaming state thereafter, as a long fluctuation time, It is configured to be able to secure time for executing the presentation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to show the player the effects pertaining to the consecutive villas carefully as the fluctuation time of the second main game symbol important in the case of the consecutive villas for a long time. In addition, when it is configured to have the case of 100 times and the case of 1 time as the number of time reductions, the variation time of the second main game symbol at the time of losing in the time reduction gaming state in the case of 1 time reduction is 30 seconds. The time variation of the second main game symbol at the time of losing in the time reduction gaming state in the case of 100 hours saving may be configured to be 1 second (in the case of 100 hours saving, the small hit during the time saving gaming state) There is no problem even if the fluctuation time is short because it is easy to win the

  Next, FIG. 84 is a flowchart of V winning detection effect display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2450 (fourth) of FIG. 74 in the third modification example from the fourth embodiment. The changes from the fourth embodiment are steps 2460 (fourth modification) to 2465 (fourth modification), that is, in step 2460 (fourth modification), the CPUSC of the sub control board S is It is determined whether or not the right-handling instruction flag (a flag which is turned on when the second main game start opening electric combination B11d starts opening in the time-saving gaming state) is off. In the case of Yes in step 2460 (fourth modification), the CPUMC of the sub control board S receives a motorized jack release start command from the main control board M side in step 2461 (fourth modification) {step 1237-2 ( It is determined whether the command {circle over (4)} set and transmitted to the side of the sub control board S has been received. If YES in step 2461 (fourth modification), the CPUMC of the sub control board S turns on the right-turning instruction flag in step 2462 (fourth modification), and shifts to step 2463 (fourth modification). . Also in the case of No in step 2460 (fourth modification 3), the process shifts to step 2463 (fourth modification 3). Next, in step 2463 (fourth modification 3), the CPUMC of the sub control board S is a timing (e.g., 5 seconds before the symbol variation stop) before the symbol variation stop timing of the symbol variation in the time shortening gaming state It is determined whether or not the timing of In the case of Yes in step 2463 (fourth modification), the CPUMC of the sub control board S performs rightward execution instruction effect (second game release to the second main game start opening B10 in step 2464 (fourth modification) Command to urge the player to be displayed, for example, "a right to hit right now" is displayed on the effect display device SG (in the display command transmission control process of step 2999, the sub-sub control unit SS side) Sent to step 2466 (4th variant 3). Further, in the case of No in step 2463 (fourth modification 3), the CPUMC of the sub control board S performs right-turning prohibition instruction effect (prompts the player to stop the launch of the game ball in step 2465 (fourth modification 3) It is an effect, and for example, a command relating to an effect of displaying “Don't launch now” is set on the effect display device SG (sent to the sub-sub control unit SS in the display command transmission control process of step 2999) And the process shifts to step 2466 (fourth modification 3).

  Next, in step 2466 (fourth modification), the CPUMC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the motor control unit open end command has been received from the main control board M side. If Yes in step 2466 (fourth modification), the CPUMC of the sub control board S determines whether or not it is in the time shortening gaming state in step 2467 (fourth modification). In the case of Yes in step 2467 (fourth modification 3), the CPUMC of the sub control board S in step 2468 (fourth modification 3) is the production being executed among the rightward execution instruction effect and the rightward prohibition instruction effect Set the command to clear the display related to. Next, in step 2469 (fourth modification), the CPUMC of the sub control board S turns off the right strike instruction flag, and proceeds to step 2456. Also in the case of No in step 2461 (fourth modification), step 2466 (fourth modification), or step 2467 (fourth modification), the processing shifts to step 2456.

  By configuring as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the fourth embodiment, in the time-saving gaming state, it is considered that holding of the second main gaming side is considered to be occurring. A situation in which it is considered that there may be cases where the second main game side is not suspended by executing a hit prohibition instruction effect, that is, the fluctuation time of the second main game symbol in the time reduction gaming state is a long time fluctuation of 30 seconds Therefore, there is a risk that the auxiliary gaming side will not be suspended during the fluctuation time, so that the right hitting execution instruction effect is executed at a timing 5 seconds before the fluctuation stop of the second main game symbol of the long time By configuring, the reserve of the auxiliary game side will occur, and the second main game start port electric role B11d will be opened by the occurrence of the reserve of the auxiliary game side, so the time saving game state The second main game start opening electric role B11d continues to open even after the variation of the second main game symbol is over and the non-time shortening gaming state is entered, the second main game side hold Can be configured to secure the time to bring it up again.

(Modification 4 from the fourth embodiment)
In the fourth embodiment, the special game is executed in response to the game ball entering the V winning opening C 27 during the small hit game, and the configuration such as the upper limit number of holdings on the second main game side Was described in detail. Here, an example of the other configuration applicable to the gaming machine having such a configuration will be described in detail as a fourth modification from the fourth embodiment, with respect to only the change from the fourth embodiment.

  First, FIG. 85 is a flowchart of a motorized product drive drive determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 of FIG. 65 in the fourth modification of the fourth embodiment. The point of change from the fourth embodiment is the opening mode of the second main game start opening electric role B11d, that is, when the game state is a time reduction game state (the auxiliary game time short flag is on), The opening mode of the second main game start opening electric role thing B11d due to the stop as the stop pattern of the auxiliary game pattern and the stop of the symbol “D1” is “1.0 second open → 1.0 second close → 2.0 second open → It is "closed", and the opening period from the opening start of the second main game start opening electric combination B11d to the opening end is 4 seconds.

  Next, FIG. 86 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of steps 1400 (1) and (2) in FIG. 8 in the fourth modification from the fourth embodiment. . The changes from the fourth embodiment are step 1447-1 (fourth modification) and step 1450 (fourth modification), that is, in step 1410, the CPUMC of the main control board M is on the main game side After determining the stop symbol related to the main gaming symbol based on the random number and the lottery result (refer to the main gaming table 2), the CPUMC of the main control board M has a limited frequency flag in step 1447-1 (fourth modification 4) (Since there is only one type of limitation frequency state in the fourth modification from the fourth embodiment, it is determined whether the flag that is turned on in the limitation frequency state is the limitation frequency flag) is off or not Do. In the case of Yes in step 1447-1 (fourth modification), the CPUMC of the main control board M shifts to step 1444-1 (fourth). On the other hand, if No in step 1447-1 (fourth modification), in step 1450 (fourth modification), the CPUMC of the main control board M executes limited frequency variation mode determination processing described later, step 1418. Migrate to

  Next, FIG. 87 is an example of the block diagram of the main game table 3 in the fourth modification from the fourth embodiment. In the fourth modification from the fourth embodiment, the variation time of the main gaming symbol at the time of losing in the time shortening gaming state is configured to be determined to one type of only 5 seconds. In addition, in the time reduction gaming state, the fluctuation time at the time of hitting is configured to be determined from two types of 10 seconds and 60 seconds. Here, the fluctuation time of the second main game symbol at the time of losing in the time reduction gaming state is 5 seconds, and it is longer than the 4 seconds which is the open period of the second main game start opening electric role object B11d described above ing. Moreover, the fluctuation time of the shortest time is 10 seconds as a fluctuation time of the first main gaming symbol at the time of losing in the time shortening gaming state, and it is 4 seconds which is an open period of the above-mentioned second main game start opening electric role thing B11d. It is longer than that. In addition, the variation time of the main game symbol in the fourth modification from the fourth embodiment may be the same as the configuration of the third modification from the fourth embodiment described above. Also in the following embodiments, the configuration of the variation time of the main gaming symbol may be the same as the configuration of the third modification example from the fourth embodiment described above.

  Next, FIG. 88 is a flowchart of limited frequency variation mode determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1450 (fourth modification) of FIG. 86 in the fourth modification from the fourth embodiment. First, in step 1470, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines a variation mode (variation time) relating to the main gaming symbol based on the main gaming side random number and the result of the lottery result (refer to the limited frequency table). Next, at step 1471, the CPU MC of the main control board M subtracts one from the counter value of the limit frequency counter MN 52 c, and the process goes to step 1472. Next, in step 1472, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether the count value of the limit frequency counter MN 52 c is 0 or not. If Yes in step 1472, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the limitation frequency flag in step 1473 and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1418). Also in the case of No at step 1472, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing at step 1418).

  Next, FIG. 89 is an example of a configuration diagram of a limited frequency table in the fourth modification of the fourth embodiment. In the fourth modification from the fourth embodiment, when the variation mode of the main gaming symbol is determined with reference to the limited frequency table, the variation time of the second main gaming symbol at the time of losing is relatively short. It is configured to be determined in only one kind of one second.

  Next, FIG. 90 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game according to Step 1750 (fourth) of FIG. 16 in the fourth modification from the fourth embodiment. The changes from the fourth embodiment are step 1786-1 (fourth modification) and step 1786-2 (fourth modification), that is, at step 1785-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M is After setting the predetermined number A (100 in this example) to the counter value of the time reduction number counter MP52c, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines the counter of the limited frequency counter MN52c in step 1786-1 (fourth modification). The value is set a predetermined number of times (in this example, 100 times). Next, at step 1786-2 (fourth modification), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the limited frequency flag, and proceeds to step 1785-8. As described above, in the fourth modification from the fourth embodiment, when transitioning to the time shortening gaming state after the end of the big hit pertaining to the first main game side, the state is shifted to the limited frequency state.

  By configuring as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth modification from the fourth embodiment, the variation time of the second main gaming symbol at the time of losing in the time shortening gaming state, the second main game starting opening electric motor By being configured to be longer than the opening period of the bonus B11d, "shift to the time reduction gaming state after the big hit of the second main game side is finished, and the second main game side is suspended 0 → → 2 main game start opening electric role B11d is released → 1 second main game hold occurs after 0.5 seconds → hold of the 2nd main game side is digested and the 2nd main game symbol starts fluctuation → 3. Opening of the second main game start opening electric combination B11d is finished after 5 seconds → 0.5 second later the second main game start opening electric combination B11d is opened again → 1 second later the variation of the second main game symbol is ended Time saving game state ends → second main game hold is 1 after 1 second By the time it changes to the time shortening gaming state and the variation of the 2nd main game symbol is finished as "occurring", the opening of the 2nd 2nd main game start opening electric role thing B11d is calculated after the big hit end after the big hit end By doing this, the second main game symbol can be changed three times even when the number of time reductions is one, and the degree of expectation after the big hit can be increased. In addition, the second main game is configured by configuring the variation time of the first main game symbol at the time of losing in the time reduction gaming state to be shorter than the open period of the second main game start opening electric combination B11d. Unlike the configuration of the symbol, even if the first main game symbol is changed when transitioning to the time shortening gaming state after the big hit of the second main game side, until the change of the first main game symbol is completed It is not possible to open the second main game start-up motorized part B11d again, and the player intentionally changes the first main game symbol and causes the second main game side to be suspended. It can be configured such that it is not possible to obtain a benefit against the flow. In addition, when it shifts to the time shortening game state after the big hit which relates to the 1st main game side, with the time saving frequency becoming 100 times, it moves to the limited frequency state, the fluctuation time of the 2nd main game symbol It will be a relatively short time of 1 second. If the number of times of time reduction is 100 times and the fluctuation time of the second main game symbol is long, it is possible to win a small hit on the second main game side in the time reduction gaming state, though it is almost definite, but the second It takes a long time to win the small game on the main game side, and the tempo of the game gets worse, but with this configuration, if the number of time-savings is 100 times, the second main The variation time of the game symbol can be made in a short time, and it is possible to have a good tempo tempo progression of the game according to the situation of the game.

  In the fourth modification from the fourth embodiment, the player wins a small hit on the second main gaming side in the non-time shortening gaming state, and enters the V winning opening during execution of the small hit. When the time reduction gaming state is entered after the end of the big hit that is executed, the symbol related to the loss of the first main game symbol for the first change of the time reduction gaming state (the first symbol change after the big hit is over) The variation time may be relatively longer in the case of the symbol variation relating to the loss of the second main game symbol than in the case of the variation.

(Modification example 5 from the fourth embodiment)
In the fourth embodiment, the special game is executed in response to the game ball entering the V winning opening C 27 during the small hit game, and the configuration such as the upper limit number of holdings on the second main game side Was described in detail. Here, an example of the configuration related to the effect on the side of the sub control board S that can be executed by the gaming machine having such a configuration is referred to as a fifth modification from the fourth embodiment, and the modification from the fourth embodiment below. Only the points will be described in detail.

  Next, FIG. 91 is an example of the block diagram of the main game table 1 and the main game table 2 in the fifth modification of the fourth embodiment. In the fifth modification from the fourth embodiment, the small hit symbol on the second main game side has “3BK” and “7BK”, and the second main game side wins the small hit. Is configured to easily win "3 BK" (950/1024). Here, the number of execution rounds of the big hit triggered by the small hit on the second main game side is 16 rounds (small hit, regardless of whether the small hit symbol that is the trigger is “3BK” or “7BK”. The number of rounds to be executed in a single round is equal to the number of execution rounds), but the number of time reductions after the end of the big hit was a big hit triggered by either “3BK” or “7BK” Are configured to be different.

  Next, FIG. 92 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game according to Step 1750 (fourth) of FIG. 16 in the fifth modification from the fourth embodiment. First, the change from the fourth embodiment is from step 1785-5 (fourth variation 5) to step 1786-5 (fourth variation 5), that is, at step 1785-2, CPUMC of main control board M However, after it is determined that the stop symbol is a short-time big hit symbol (a big hit symbol that shifts to a time-saving gaming state after the big hit ends, and in this example, "4B, 5A, 5B, 7A, 7B"), or If, in step 1785-4, it is determined that the CPUMC of the main control board M is after the end of the special game triggered by the short time hitting symbol (in this example, 7AK), step 1785-5 (fourth modification 5) , And the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether the stop symbol is the first main game symbol. If Yes in step 1785-5 (fourth modification 5), is it after the big hit that the CPUMC of the main control board M is won in the non-time shortening gaming state in step 1786-1 (fourth modification 5)? It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1786-1 (fourth modification 5), in step 1786-2 (fourth modification 5), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the counter value of the time reduction number counter MP52c a predetermined number A (in this example) , Set 100), and shift to step 1785-8. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1786-1 (fourth modification 5), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the counter value of the time reduction number counter MP52c a predetermined number of times B (this number) at step 1786-3 (fourth modification 5). In the example, 1) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1785-8. If No in step 1785-5 (fourth modification 5), in other words, if the stop symbol is the second main game symbol, CPUMC of main control board M in step 1786-4 (fourth modification 5) The second main game long time short hit symbol (after the end of the execution of the special game, while transitioning to the time reduction gaming state and relatively long number of times (100 in this example) will be awarded, the said It is a small hit symbol of the second main game side that is a trigger for transition to a special game, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is after the end of the special game triggered by "7BK"). In the case of Yes in step 1786-4 (fourth modification 5), in step 1786-5 (fourth modification 5), the CPUMC of the main control board M performs a predetermined number A (in this example) on the counter value of the time reduction counter MP52c. , Set 100), and shift to step 1785-8. Thus, in the fifth modification from the fourth embodiment, after the big hit on the first main game side, the big hit or non-time shortening gaming state triggered by a small hit won in the non-time shortening gaming state If the player wins a big hit at the end of the big hit and shifts to the time-saving gaming state after the big hit (when the first main game side hits first), the number of time saving becomes 100 times. In addition, on the 2nd main game side, after the big hit which is executed triggered by the 2nd main game long time small hit symbol (in this example “7BK”) time saving becomes 100 times after the big hit end, in other cases (big hit After the big hit end which is triggered by the stop of the symbol and after the big hit which is triggered by the small hit), the time saving number becomes one. That is, the second main game player time short and hit symbol ("7BK" in this example) is the most profitable small hit symbol. It should be noted that the big hit with the big hit or small hit triggered by the stop of the big hit symbol of the first main game side, and the big hit triggered by the big hit or small hit triggered by the stop of the big hit symbol of the second main game side Compared to the second main game side, the first main game side has more time reductions after the big hit than the second main game side, but the first main game side is the second main game side Rather, the expected value (the number of execution rounds) of the number of winning game balls in the big hit is smaller.

  Next, FIG. 93 is a flowchart of special game effect execution processing according to the subroutine of step 2550 (fourth modification 5) of FIG. 23 in the fifth modification of the fourth embodiment. First, in step 2586-1, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command for sequentially displaying the number of rounds and the number of winnings in numbers (sent to the sub sub control unit SS in the display command transmission control process of step 2999). Be done). Next, in step 2586-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is in the process of being a large hit in the second main game long time short hit symbol (a small hit symbol on the second main game side, which triggers the small hit It is determined whether it is a big hit that is the most profitable small hit symbol to which the time saving number which is relatively long after the big hit end is given and which is a high profit small hit symbol in this example and is 7BK in this example. In the case of Yes in step 2586-2, in step 2586-3, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is an effect of notifying that a long time short effect is provided (relatively long duration time is given, The command to execute the effect of blessing the person is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2520). Further, in the case of No at step 2586-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S does not normally notify at step 2586-4 that the effect is given that the number of time saving is relatively long, normally The command to execute the special game playing time) is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2520). As described above, in the fifth modification from the fourth embodiment, the jackpot triggered by the second main game length at the same time as the main jackpot symbol of the highest profit to the player (in this example, 7BK). During the execution, the player is arranged to perform a long time short effect presentation to bless the player.

  By configuring as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth modification example from the fourth embodiment, two types, one time and 100 times, are used as time-saving numbers when transitioning to the time shortening gaming state after the big hit ends. It is configured to be awarded, and the second main game-master time short-time hit symbol (in this example, 7 BK), which is the highest profit small hit symbol for the player, becomes 100 times of time reduction after the big hit It was configured as follows. In addition, the second main game long time short hit symbol is configured to be selected by "74/1024" when the second main game is won in the small hit, and it is not selected very much even during a series Since the game is configured as described above, when the second main game play time short hit symbol is won and the big hit is executed triggered by the small hit symbol, the game is offered by providing a long time short to bless the player. Are configured so that they can feel a sense of accomplishment.

  In addition, in the example 5 of a change from a 4th embodiment, although it comprised so that a player might be blessed by performing long time short presentation effects during a big hit, it is not limited to this, (1) 2nd main Perform a long time short grant effect in the big hit start demonstration time (or, big hit end demo time) triggered by the game long time short hit symbol, (2) the reservation with the plan to be elected to the second main game long time short hit symbol Informs that there is a planned suspension to be won in the second main game director's short time small winning symbol by the effect during the change of loss in the situation existing in the suspension to notify that there is a suspension in the suspension (notified as a prefetch effect) , (3) During the symbol change after the big hit end triggered by the second main game long time short hit symbol (If the time reduction is once or 100 times, it will be executed in the first symbol change after the big hit end Time is 100 times in the production of Informing that there is a (4) during the symbol change related to the second main game long time short hit symbol that the number of time reduction after the big hit is 100 times triggered by the second main game long time short hit symbol May be configured as informing the user.

(Modification 6 from the fourth embodiment)
In the fourth embodiment, the special game is executed in response to the game ball entering the V winning opening C 27 during the small hit game, and the configuration such as the upper limit number of holdings on the second main game side Was described in detail. Here, an example of the configuration related to the effect on the side of the sub control board S that can be executed by the gaming machine having such a configuration is referred to as a sixth modification from the fourth embodiment, which is a modification from the fourth embodiment below. Only the points will be described in detail.

  First, FIG. 94 is an example of a configuration diagram of the main game table 1 and the main game table 2 in the sixth modification example from the fourth embodiment. In the sixth modification of the fourth embodiment, the first main game side is more easily elected to the small hit than the fourth embodiment. By configuring in this way, the details will be described later, but when the player wins a small hit on the first main game side in the non-time shortening gaming state, the game ball enters the V winning opening C27. We have realized the gameplay that you aim for. Incidentally, even when the player wins a small hit on the second main game side, it may be configured to be able to execute an effect instructing aiming at entering of the game ball to the V winning opening C27.

  Next, FIG. 95 is a flowchart of the small hitting game control process according to the subroutine of step 3050 (fourth) of FIG. 65 in the sixth modification of the fourth embodiment. The changes from the fourth embodiment are from step 3082-1 (fourth modification 6) to step 3082-6 (fourth modification), that is, at step 3055, the CPUMC of the main control board M is in the round concerned. The opening pattern of the second large winning opening C20 (in this example, for example, in the case of 2AK, "0.2 second opening → closing", and it is difficult for the gaming ball to enter the second large winning opening C20, Even when entering the second big winning opening C20, it does not enter the V winning opening C27, and in all other small hit symbols, "2 seconds open → 4 seconds closed → 2 seconds open → closed" If the game ball continues to be launched toward the second large winning opening C20, after the game ball is configured to enter a plurality of balls into the second large winning opening C20), step 3082-1 In the (fourth modification 6), the CPUMC of the main control board M is Turn on (an on flag when a Koatari start demo time) per start Demofuragu. Next, in step 3082-2 (fourth modification 6), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a small hit start demonstration time timer KKt to a predetermined time (10 seconds in this example) and starts it, step 3082 Shift to -3 (4th variant 6). Next, in step 3082-3 (fourth modification 6), the CPUMC of the main control board M displays the first main game length open small hit symbol (the second large winning opening C20 of the first main game side is long open It is a small hit design, and in this example, it is determined whether it is a small hit according to 7AK). If Yes in step 3082-3 (fourth modification 6), in step 3082-4 (fourth modification 6), the CPUMC of the main control substrate M generates a small hit start demonstration start command (by a command to the sub control substrate side) Yes, and the small hit start demonstration time is set to a command indicating that the start has been set), and the processing shifts to step 3082-5 (the fourth modification 6). In the case of No at step 3082-3 (fourth modification 6) or when the CPUMC of the main control board M determines that the small hit execution flag is off at step 3060, step 3082-5 (fourth). Shift to 6). Next, in step 3082-5 (fourth modification), the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the timer value of the small hitting start demonstration time timer KKt is zero. If Yes in step 3082-5 (fourth modification), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the small hitting start demonstration flag in step 3082-6 (fourth modification), and shifts to step 3056. In the case of No in step 3082-5 (fourth modification 6), the processing shifts to the next processing {processing of step 3100 (fourth processing). As described above, in the sixth modification from the fourth embodiment, as the small hit symbol on the first main game side, the small hit symbol (2AK that makes it difficult to enter the second large winning opening C20 when the small hit is executed). And a small hit symbol (7AK) that makes it easy to enter the second large winning opening C20.

  Next, FIG. 96 is a flowchart of V winning detection effect display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2450 (fourth) of FIG. 74 in the sixth modification example of the fourth embodiment. First, the change from the fourth embodiment is step 2466-1 (fourth modification 6) to step 2466-10 (fourth modification 6), that is, step 2466-1 (fourth modification 6), The CPUMC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the emission instruction effect flag (a flag that is turned on when the emission instruction effect timer HSt is counting) is off. In the case of Yes in step 2466-1 (fourth modification 6), in step 2466-2 (fourth modification 6), the CPUMC of the sub control board S receives the small hit start demonstration start command from the main control board M side. It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2466-2 (fourth modification 6), the CPUMC of the sub control board S displays a right-handed preparation display (for example, “audio” on the effect display device SG in step 2466-3 (fourth modification 6). Set a command to execute "right-handed". Next, in step 2466-4 (fourth modification), the CPUMC of the sub control board S sets and starts a predetermined time (15 seconds in this example) in the emission instruction effect timer (decrement timer). Here, the predetermined time set in the launch instruction effect timer HSt is a period from the start timing of the small hit start demonstration time to 1 second before the second open timing of the small hit excluding “2AK”, "Small hit start demonstration time (10 seconds) + first open time of the second large winning opening C20 in small hit (2 seconds) + small open from the first open end timing of the second large winning opening C20 in small hit The closing time (1 second) up to the timing 3 seconds before the second opening start of the second large winning opening C20 in is 15 seconds.

  Next, in step 2466-5 (fourth modification 6), the CPUSC of the sub control board S turns on the small hitting demonstration effect flag, and shifts to step 2466-6 (fourth modification 6). Also in the case of No in step 2466-1 (fourth modification 6), the process shifts to step 2466-6 (fourth modification 6). Next, in step 2466-6 (fourth modification 6), the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the timer value of the emission instruction effect timer HSt to the first effect execution value (the first emission instruction effect is executed and It is determined whether or not the timer value is 6 seconds in this example. If Yes in step 2466-6 (fourth modification 6), in step 2466-7 (fourth modification 6), the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command for executing the launch instruction effect, and step 2466-8. Shift to (4th variant 6). Here, when the launch instruction effect is executed, a voice of "Go" is output from the speaker D24, and "GO" is displayed on the effect display device SG. That is, while the right-handed preparation display described above is only the display on the effect display device SG, the emission instruction effect is configured to execute the display on the effect display device SG and the audio output on the speaker D24. In addition, the game ball launched simultaneously with the timing when the launch instruction effect is executed, reaches the second large winning opening C20 at the timing before the second large winning opening C20 opens, and the second large winning opening C20 is configured not to enter the ball (If the game ball is continuously fired from the timing when the launch instruction effect is executed, the game ball after the second ball may enter the second big winning hole C20) That is, the game ball launched simultaneously with the timing at which the launch instruction effect is executed is greater than the time from the timing at which the launch instruction effect is executed to the time at which the second large winning opening C20 starts to open. The flow path to the second big winning opening C20 is designed so that the time to reach is a short time. Also in the case of No in step 2466-6 (fourth modification 6), the process shifts to step 2466-8 (fourth modification 6). Next, in step 2466-8 (fourth modification 6), the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the timer value of the launch instruction effect HSt timer to a second effect execution value (a second launch instruction effect is executed and It is determined whether or not the timer value is 0 in this example. In the case of Yes in step 2466-8 (fourth modification 6), the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command for executing the emission instruction effect in step 2466-9 (fourth modification 6). Next, in step 2466-10 (fourth modification), the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the emission instruction effect flag, and shifts to step 2456. Also, in the case of No in step 2466-2 (fourth modification 6) or step 2466-8 (fourth modification 6), the processing shifts to step 2456. As described above, in the sixth modification example from the fourth embodiment, when the player wins a small hit symbol other than "2AK", it is configured to be able to execute the right-handed preparation effect and the emission instruction effect. The instruction effect is configured to be executed twice with one small hit. In this example, although it is configured to be able to execute the right-handed preparation effect and the launch instruction effect in all the small hits other than “2AK”, the present invention is not limited thereto. It may be configured to execute only when it is won (or to execute only when it is won in the small hit of the second main game side), or only in the non-time shortening gaming state (only in the time shortening gaming state ) May be configured to execute. In the sixth modification from the fourth embodiment, the second large winning opening C20 is difficult for the gaming ball to enter the second large winning opening C20 even if the gaming ball is fired toward the second large winning opening C20. "2 AK" is provided as a small hit symbol that will be executed a small hit that will be open mode of, and if you win the "2 AK", right-handed preparation effect and launch instruction effect will not be performed It is configured. By configuring in this way, even if the game ball is fired, the game ball does not have to be fired for small hits where the holding ball will only decrease without entering the second large winning opening C20, which is user-friendly Game machine.

  By configuring as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth modification from the fourth embodiment, when a small hit is won on the first main game side in the non-time shortening gaming state, the game is directed to the second large winning opening C20. By configuring to be able to execute effects (right strike preparation effect and launch instruction effect) instructing to launch the game ball, under the situation where the game is progressing with the left strike in the non-time shortening game state, the first (1) Even when the main game side wins a small hit, it is smooth without any disadvantage by notifying that it will switch to the right and an appropriate firing timing for entering the second large winning opening C20. It is possible to make the user-friendly gaming machine capable of proceeding with the game.

  In addition, the execution timing of the right-handed preparation effect and the launch instruction effect may be configured to be executed at a timing other than the opening of the second large winning opening C20 during the small hit execution, for example, pertaining to the small hit It may be configured to execute during the closing of the second big winning opening C20 during small hit execution during the symbol variation, during the small hit start demonstration time. In addition, even if the configuration is appropriately combined for the configuration in which the big hit is executed by entering the V winning opening during the small hit described above (the fourth embodiment from the fourth embodiment to the fourth embodiment), there is a problem Absent.

Fifth Embodiment
In the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the specific area C22 during the special game, it is configured to shift to the probability variation gaming state after the end of the special game, but it is applied to the game machine of this example The possible configurations are not limited to this. Therefore, a configuration that provides game characteristics different from the present embodiment is taken as the fifth embodiment, and only differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  In the fifth embodiment, as illustrated in the present embodiment, the game ball enters the specific area C22 provided in the big winning opening during the big hit and the game ball enters the probability fluctuation gaming state after the big hit end by entering the ball Is configured to

  Next, FIG. 97 is a flowchart of first (second) main game symbol display processing according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} in FIG. 8 in the fifth embodiment. In the same figure, the difference with the modification 4 from a similar 4th embodiment is explained in full detail. The difference from the fourth modification from the fourth embodiment is that the configuration related to the small hit is deleted because the small hit is not provided. The other description is the same as that of the fourth modification of the fourth embodiment, and thus the description will be omitted.

  Next, FIG. 98 shows an example of the main game tables 1 to 3 in the fifth embodiment. In the fifth embodiment, the jackpot symbol of the second main game side is only one kind of "7B", and the number of big game rounds related to "7B" is "16R". In addition, long open big hit (big hit which becomes easy to enter the specific area C22) is "3A, 5A, 7A, 7B", and short open big hit (big hit which makes it difficult to enter the specific area C22) is "2A That is, since the second main game side has only a long open big hit, the ratio of the long open big hit in the big hit of the second main game side (sum of the long open big hit and the short open big hit) is 1 It is higher than the ratio of the long opening big hit in the main game side's big hit (sum of the long open big hit and the short open big hit).

  Next, FIG. 99 is a flowchart of limited frequency variation mode determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1450 (fourth modification) of FIG. 97 in the fifth embodiment. The processing of the figure is the same as the limited frequency variation mode determination processing of step 1450 (fourth modification 4) in the fourth modification from the fourth embodiment, and therefore the description will be omitted, but in the fifth embodiment Has one kind of limited frequency state.

  Next, FIG. 100 is an example of a limited frequency table according to the fifth embodiment. In the fifth embodiment, there is one kind of limited frequency state, and the limited frequency table is configured to be referred to in the time shortening gaming state. Moreover, when compared with the main gaming table 3 referred to in the time saving gaming state, the average value of the fluctuation time is relatively larger in the case of referring to the limited frequency table than in the case of referring to the main gaming table 3 It has been a short time. That is, the selection tendency of the fluctuation time is configured to be different between the case of referring to the limited frequency table and the case of referring to the main gaming table 3.

  Next, FIG. 101 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1550 (fifth) of FIG. 97 in the fifth embodiment. Since the process of the figure is the structure similar to the specific game end determination process of step 1550 in 2nd Embodiment, description is omitted.

  Next, FIG. 102 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1750 (fifth) of FIG. 16 in the fifth embodiment. First, at step 1787-1, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the main game probability change shift reservation flag is on. If Yes in step 1787-1, in step 1787-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns off the main game probability change transfer reservation flag. Next, in step 1787-3, the CPUMC of the main control board M is a probability variation continuous counter MP51c-2 (continuing the special game in the probability variation gaming state after winning the special game in the non-probability variation gaming state 1 is added to the counter value of the counter that counts the number of times of winning. Next, in step 1787-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M does not change the gaming state after the end of the special game by making the counter value of the probability variation continuous counter MP51c-2 reach a specified value (in this example, the probability change game It is a counter value to be in the state, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is 4). In the case of Yes in step 1787-4, in step 1787-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the counter value of the probability variation continuous counter MP51 c-2 to zero. On the other hand, if No in step 1787-1, the process goes to step 1787-5.

  Next, at step 1787-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the counter value of the time reduction number counter MP52c a predetermined number of times (100 in this example). Next, in step 1787-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not it is after the big hit end in the non-time shortening gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 1787-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the counter value of the limited frequency counter MN 52c a predetermined number of times (100 in this example) in steps 1787-8 and 1787-9. Turn on the limit frequency flag. Next, in step 1788-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets an evening stage command (command to the side of the sub control board S), and shifts to step 1788-7. If NO in step 1787-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a space stage command (command to the side of the sub control board S) in step 1788-2, and shifts to step 1788-7.

  If NO in step 1787-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game probability change flag in step 1788-3. Next, in steps 1788-4 and 1788-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the counter value of the probability variation counter MP51c a predetermined number of times (100 in this example), and the counter of the hour reduction counter MP52c. The value is set a predetermined number of times (in this example, 100). Next, in step 1788-6, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a space stage command (command to the side of the sub control board S), and shifts to step 1788-7. Next, in step 1788-7 and step 1788-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game time short flag and turns on the auxiliary game time short flag, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1997). Transition. As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the number of times the special game is continuously won in the probability fluctuation gaming state after being won in the special game in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state, that is, the first hit is once, After that, after the special game is over, the number of times when it has been measured twice and three times every time you win the special game in the probability fluctuation gaming state becomes a predetermined number of times (in this example, 4 times) It is configured to shift to the gaming state (sometimes referred to as a limiter machine). In addition, it is after the big hit which is won in non time shortening game state, when it moves to non probability fluctuation game state, it moves to limited frequency state, and “evening stage” is set as stay stage It is configured. Also, in the case where the "Space stage" is set as the stay stage in the probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, and after transition to the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state after the big hit ended in the time shortening gaming state. Is configured such that the same "space stage" is set as a stay stage. That is, in the non-time shortening gaming state when winning a big hit, and after transition to a non-probability variation gaming state and time shortening gaming state after the big hit, and in the probability variation gaming state and time shortening gaming state, stay stage The selection tendency of (rendering tendency) and the fluctuation time is configured to be different. In addition, the stay stage (in the case of transition to the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state after winning the big hit in the time shortening gaming state, and in the case of the probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state The selection tendency of the presentation tendency) and the fluctuation time is configured to be the same. In addition, when the counter value of the probability variation continuous counter MP51c-2 reaches the specified value (reaches the limiter count) and shifts to the non-probability variation gaming state after the big hit end, the non-probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state It is configured to (be sure to shift to the time-saving gaming state). In addition, the "Space stage" is set as the stay stage even when winning in the first main gaming side in the time saving gaming state and transitioning to the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state after the big hit ends The same stay stage as the stay stage in the probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state is set. Note that the presentation tendency to be executed is different between the case where the stay stage is the "space stage" and the case where the stay stage is the "evening stage". That is, it has an effect that occurs only in the "space stage", an effect that occurs only in the "evening stage", and an effect that occurs in both the "space stage" and the "evening stage".

  Next, FIG. 103 is a flowchart of stay stage determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2600 (fifth) of FIG. 19 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 2639, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines that the stay stage switching timing {the stay stage switching timing is, for example, the timing at which the special game has ended (is won), the timing at which the gaming state has shifted, It is determined whether the timing at which the variation mode determination table has been switched or the timing at which the number of times of variation has reached a predetermined number of times may be reached (even in the gaming state). If Yes in step 2639, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the space stage command from the main control board M side has been received in step 2640. If Yes in step 2640, in step 2641, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the "space stage" as the stay stage, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2999). If No in step 2640, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines in step 2642 whether the evening stage command from the main control board M side has been received. If YES in step 2642, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets "evening stage" as a stay stage in step 2643, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2999). If NO in step 2642, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines in step 2644 whether or not transition to the non-time shortening gaming state has occurred. If Yes in step 2644, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets "empty stage" as a stay stage in step 2645, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2999). Also in the case of No in step 2639 or step 2644, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2999).

  By configuring as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment, the number of jackpots won in the probability variation gaming state becomes a predetermined number so that it shifts to the non-probability variation gaming state after the big hit ends If it shifts to a non-probability fluctuation gaming state and time shortening gaming state after the big hit by constituting and the predetermined number of times, or in the probability fluctuation gaming state and time shortening gaming state erroneously in the big hit of the first main game side Even if it is won, and it shifts to the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and time shortening gaming state after the big hit ends, selection of the same staying stage and the same fluctuation time as in the case of probability fluctuation gaming state and time shortening gaming state By being configured to be a trend, it is possible to provide a user-friendly gaming machine that allows a player to proceed with a game without discomfort. Kill.

Sixth Embodiment
In the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the specific area C22 during the special game, it is configured to shift to the probability variation gaming state after the end of the special game, but it is applied to the game machine of this example The possible configurations are not limited to this. Therefore, a configuration that provides game characteristics different from the present embodiment is taken as a sixth embodiment, and only differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below. In the sixth embodiment, it is not necessary to use the ball machine such as shifting to the probability variation gaming state after the big hit by entering the specific area C22 during the big hit as in the fifth embodiment, for example, The game condition after the big hit may be determined by the type of the big hit symbol. Also, when configured as such, the transition rate to the probability fluctuation gaming state after the big hit end on the first main game side and the transition rate to the probability fluctuation gaming state after the big hit end on the second main game side Is the same (for example, 95% of all), and the tendency of the number of execution rounds is different.

  First, FIG. 104 is an example of a first (second) main game table in the sixth embodiment. In the sixth embodiment, compared to the present embodiment, the jackpot probability in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state on the first main gaming side and the second main gaming side is higher, and the jackpot probability in the probability fluctuation gaming state is lower. It has become. That is, the difference in the big hit probability between the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the probability fluctuation gaming state is reduced. In the case of a big hit on the second main game side, the big hit symbol “7B”, which is a big hit symbol that shifts to a probability variation gaming state after a big hit, is a big hit symbol that shifts to a non probability variation gaming state after a big hit. It is easier to win than 2B. In the case of a big hit on the second main game side, the big hit symbol that can be selected may be configured to be only "7B".

  Next, FIG. 105 is a flowchart of special game operating condition determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 of FIG. 4 in the sixth embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is the sixth step in step 1630. That is, after the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the count value of the hour reduction counter MP52c to zero in step 1606, step 1630 (the sixth step). In 6), the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a game state command at the time of winning (a command relating to the gaming state when winning a special game, a command to the sub control board S side), and proceeds to step 1612 .

  Next, FIG. 106 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1750 (sixth) of FIG. 16 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 1790-1, the CPUMC of the main control board M is a big hit symbol that the stop symbol relating to the current main gaming symbol is the probability variation big hit symbol (the special fluctuation game state can be shifted to after the special game is over. It is determined whether or not 7A, 7B). In the case of Yes in step 1790-1, in step 1790-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M adds 1 to the counter value of the positive variation continuous counter MP51c-2 (which is the same counter as the fifth embodiment described above). And go to step 1790-3. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment, as in the fifth embodiment described above, the number of jackpots won in the probability fluctuation gaming state is a predetermined number of times and the jackpot is in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state after the big hit ends. It is configured to shift (sometimes referred to as limiter machine).

  Next, in step 1790-3, the CPU MC of the main control board M determines whether or not the counter value of the probability variation continuous counter MP51 c-2 is a specified value (5 in this example). If Yes in step 1790-3, in step 1790-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the counter value of the probability variation continuous counter MP51c-2 to zero, and shifts to step 1790-5. Next, at step 1790-5, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets the counter value of the time reduction counter MP52c to a predetermined number of times A. Now set 100). Next, in steps 1790-6 and 1790-7, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game time short flag and turns on the auxiliary game time short flag, and shifts to step 1791-4. If No in step 1790-3, in step 1790-8, the CPUMC of the main control board M determines whether or not the big hit ended in the time-saving gaming state. If No in step 1790-8, the process goes to step 1790-5, and the main game probability change flag remains off. On the other hand, if Yes in step 1790-8, in step 1790-9, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on a main game probability change flag. Next, at step 1790-10, the CPUMC of the main control board M causes the time reduction counter MP52c to have a predetermined number of times B (it is substantially fixed to continue until the next big hit win, and in this example, it is 65536 Note that you may set ∞ times). Next, in step 1791-1 and step 1791-2, the CPUMC of the main control board M turns on the main game time short flag and turns on the auxiliary game time short flag, and shifts to step 1791-4. On the other hand, if No in step 1790-1, in other words, if the stop symbol is 2A or 2B, the CPUMC of the main control board M clears the count value of the positive variation continuous counter MP51c-2 to zero in step 1791-3. It transfers to step 1791-4. Next, in step 1791-4, the CPUMC of the main control board M sets a definite variation continuous counter value command (a command related to the count value of the definite variation continuous counter MP51c-2, which is a command to the sub control substrate S side), Transfer to step 1997. As described above, in the sixth embodiment, after the big hit of 7A or 7B, the time-saving gaming state is entered, but the counter value of the probability variation continuous counter MP51c-2 is a prescribed value (in this example, , 5), that is, when reaching the limiter, 100 times is set as the time reduction number, while when not reaching the limiter, it may be continued as the time reduction number until the next big hit winning It is configured that 65536 times, which is a substantially definite number, is set. In addition, you may set ∞ times. In addition, after the big hit end which is won in non-time shortening game state, namely, after the first hit, non-probability fluctuation gaming state and time shortening game state will be, it is configured to be set 100 times of time reduction.

The game state transition of the sixth embodiment may be configured as follows.
After the big hit of the first main game side in the non-probability fluctuating gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state, there are cases where it shifts to the probability fluctuating gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state. For example, after the big hit that is won in the non-probability variation gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state, non-probability variation gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state, non-probability variation gaming state and time shortening gaming state, probability variation gaming state and It may be configured to be able to shift to all the four gaming states of the non-time shortening gaming state and the probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state. In addition, part of the big hit (sometimes referred to as probability variation big hit) which shifts to probability fluctuation game state after the big hit end in non probability fluctuation game state and non time shortening game state, or non probability fluctuation game state and non time shortening game It may be configured to shift to the time shortening gaming state only in part or all of the big hit transitioning to the non-probability fluctuation gaming state after the big hit end in the state (how big hit ends in the jackpot winning in the non time shortening gaming state The playability of being able to shift to the time shortening gaming state later). When configured in this way, you win a probability change jackpot in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state or probability fluctuation gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state, and shift to the time shortening gaming state after the big hit ends In this case, the number of times is not up to the next big hit (for example, 65536 times, and may be set ∞ times), and may be 100 times (always 100 times may be granted, or 100 times at a predetermined rate) It is good also as grant, and it is good as a next big hit winning other than 100 times). Also, if you win a probability change jackpot in probability fluctuation gaming state and time shortening gaming state or non-probability fluctuation gaming state and time shortening gaming state, and shift to time shortening gaming state after the big hit end, the number of time saving is the next big hit It may be up to. In addition, when winning a big hit in probability fluctuation gaming state and time shortening gaming state or non probability fluctuation gaming state and time shortening gaming state, probability fluctuation gaming state and time shortening gaming state after the big hit end (before the limiter is reached It may be configured to transition to a probability variation big hit) or a non-probability fluctuation gaming state and a time shortening gaming state (winning on all big hits after reaching the limiter or non-probability big hits before reaching the limiter).

  Next, FIG. 107 is a main flowchart of the sub control board S side (in particular, the sub main control unit SM side) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment. The difference with this embodiment is step 2600 (sixth) and step 2700 (sixth), that is, after the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes the special game related display control processing in step 2500, the step is performed. At 2600 (sixth), the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a stay stage determination process described later. Next, in step 2700 (sixth), the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a winning game state display control process described later, and shifts to a process of step 2999.

  Next, FIG. 108 is a flowchart of special game effect execution processing according to the subroutine of step 2550 (sixth) of FIG. 23 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 2590-1, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command for sequentially displaying the number of rounds and the number of winnings in numbers. Next, in step 2590-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is the second main game probability variation big hit (The second main game side is a big hit symbol that can shift to the probability variation gaming state after the big hit end) In this example, it is determined whether 5B or 7B). If Yes in step 2590-2, in step 2590-3, the CPUSC of the secondary control board S determines whether or not a big hit is won in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state. In the case of Yes at step 2590-3, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a short draw back effect execution lottery at a step 2590-4 when it is won with a predetermined probability (1/5 in this example). Next, in step 2590-5, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the executed time draw back effect execution lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 2590-5, the CPUSC of the sub control board S wins a big hit in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state in step 2590-6 in step 2590-6, and the probability fluctuation gaming state after the big hit ends And it is an effect to notify that transition to the time-saving gaming state, and a command to execute an effect to notify that the number of limiters has been reset is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2520). Here, to reach the limiter number means that the definite variation continuous counter value reaches the specified value, and to reset the limiter number is to clear the definite variation continuous counter value to zero. The player visually recognizes the short-time return effect and recognizes that the probability variation continuous counter MP51c-2 has been reset, that is, the number of big hits until reaching the limiter has been reset, and has a sense of expectation for the continuation of further big hits. be able to. If No in step 2590-3 or step 2590-5, in step 2590-7, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the jackpot in progress is the jackpot won in the time-saving gaming state. judge. If Yes in step 2590-7, in step 2590-8, the CPUSC of the sub control board S reads the number of definite variation continuous times (count value of definite variation continuous counter MP51c-2) based on the received definite variation continuous counter value command. Do. Next, in step 2590-9, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the counter value of the probability variation continuity counter MP51c to shift to the non-probability variation gaming state after termination of the read value It is a value which does not reach even after the big hit end which is under execution to the specified value (in this example, 5 times), and it is determined whether it is 3) or less in this example. In this process, when the special game being executed is ended, the counter value of the probability variation continuous counter MP51c-2 reaches a specified value, whether or not it shifts to the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state Is determined. If Yes in step 2590-9, in step 2590-10, the CPUSC of the sub control board S executes a continuous play effect execution lottery winning with a predetermined probability (1/5 in this example). Next, in step 2591-1, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the executed consecutive home effect execution lottery has been won. If Yes in step 2591-1, in step 2592-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is an effect of notifying that it shifts to the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state after the big hit, A command to execute the effect of notifying that the big hit is a definite variation big hit before reaching the limiter number is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2520). In addition, in the case of No at step 2590-7, step 2590-9 or step 2591-1, at step 2592-3, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is normally rendered (is it shifted to the probability fluctuation gaming state after the special game is over? It is an effect that does not notify of whether or not it is an effect, and sets a command to execute an effect during the special game at the normal time, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2520). As described above, in the sixth embodiment, as the jackpot effect, transition to the probability variation gaming state after the big hit ends, and a notification that the probability variation continuous number is reset is a time-shorting pullback effect and the big hit end It is configured to be able to execute a series of effects to notify that it shifts to the probability variation gaming state later. In addition, there is no effect to notify transition to the non-probability fluctuation gaming state after the big hit is finished, and the player is in the middle of a big hit also when transitioning to the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state after the big hit. It can not be judged by the effect of (because it is a game feature that enjoys predicting the current gaming state on the stay stage after the big hit is over).

  Next, FIG. 109 is a flowchart of stay stage determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2600 (sixth) of FIG. 107 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 2646-1, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the stay stage switching timing {with the stay stage switching timing, for example, the timing when the special game is over (winning), the gaming state has shifted Whether the timing, the timing at which the variation mode determination table has been switched (even in the same gaming state), the timing at which the number of times of variation has reached a predetermined number, etc. may be reached or not Determine if In the sixth embodiment, in the time-saving game state, the stay stage can be switched every time the symbol changes. If Yes in step 2646-1, in step 2646-2, the CPUSC of the secondary control board S determines whether or not it is in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state. In the case of Yes at step 2646-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines at step 2646-3 whether or not it is in the probability variation gaming state. If Yes in step 2646-3, in step 2646-4, the CPUSC of the sub-control board S reads the number of definite variation continuous times (count value of definite variation continuous counter MP51c-2) based on the received probability continuous counter value command. Do. Next, in step 2646-5, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines that the probability variation continuous count is the next termination value (when the next big hit is selected the counter value of the probability variation continuity counter MP51c-2 reaches a specified value, and the next big hit It is a value which will shift to a non-probability fluctuation gaming state after the end, and in this example, it is determined whether or not 4). If Yes in step 2646-5, then the process moves to step 2646-6. On the other hand, if No in step 2646-3, the process moves to step 2646-6. Next, in step 2646-6, the CPUSC of the sub control substrate S refers to the stay stage determination table A to determine and set the stay stage, and shifts to the next process {step 2700 (sixth)}. If No in step 2646-5, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines in step 2646-7 that the probability variation continuous count is the next successive end value (the counter value of the probability variation continuity counter MP51c-2 has a specified value by the next big hit) , And is a value that will shift to the non-probability fluctuation gaming state after the next big hit ends, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is 3). If Yes in step 2646-7, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines and sets the stay stage in step 2646-8 with reference to the stay stage determination table B, and the next process {step 2700 (sixth) Move to}. If No in step 2646-7, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines and sets the stay stage in step 2646-9 with reference to the stay stage determination table C, and the next process {step 2700 (No. 2700) 6) Move to}. If No in step 2646-2, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets the "empty stage" as the stay stage in step 2646-10, and shifts to the next process {step 2700 (sixth)}. . As described above, in the sixth embodiment, in the time-saving gaming state, the staying stage determination table to be referred to in determining the staying stage is different depending on how many times the jackpot reaches the limiter by winning. The table is referred to in the case of a large number of jackpots that can be won before reaching the limiter (which is advantageous for the player), and sequentially referred to as "stay stage determination table C → stay stage determination table B → stay It is a stage determination table A ".

Next, FIG. 110 is an example of a stay stage determination table according to the sixth embodiment. In the sixth embodiment, in the probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state and the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, it is configured to be able to execute a lottery whether or not to change the stay stage at every symbol fluctuation. As described above, the table referred to in the case where the number of jackpots that can be won before reaching the limiter is large, that is, when the counter value of the probability variation continuous counter MP51c-2 is small, sequentially from the table referred to → Stay stage determination table B → Stay stage determination table A ”. In addition, "Space stage" is most easily selected when referring to stay stage determination table C, "Night stage" is most easily selected when reference is to stay stage determination table B, and "Evening stage" is determination of stay stage Since the table A is most easily selected when referring to Table A, the expectation value with the smaller counter value of the probability variation continuous counter MP51c-2 for each stay stage is "space stage → night stage → evening stage" in descending order . In addition, when "no transition" is selected, the stay stage is not changed. The configuration of the stay stage may be configured as follows.
(1) The “Space stage” is a stay stage where it is determined that staying in the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state is decided, and after the time-shorting pullback effect and the twin-stole effect are executed as effects during symbol variation About the big hit performed, you may comprise so that it may transfer to a "space stage" after the said big hit completion.
(2) It is preferable that the stay stage is basically set after the big hit is finished, but if it is the probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state to continue until the next big hit, it will be 100 after the previous big hit After the pattern change of the round, even if staying in the "evening stage" or the "night stage", it may be configured to shift to the "space stage" without fail.

  Next, FIG. 111 is a flowchart of winning-time game state display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2700 (sixth) of FIG. 107 in the sixth embodiment. First, in step 2702, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the at-win game state command from the main control board M has been received. If Yes in step 2702, in step 2704, the CPUSC of the sub control board S stores information regarding the gaming state and the jackpot symbol at the time of big hit, based on the received command, and proceeds to step 2706. On the other hand, also in the case of No at step 2702, the process moves to step 2706. Next, in step 2706, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the game has not been executed for a predetermined period. Here, if the game is not being executed, (1) the game to the various winning openings (first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10, general winning opening, big winning opening C10, etc.) There are no ball entry, to various entrances (1st main game start port A10, 2nd main game start port B10, general winning port, big winning port C10, out port D80, auxiliary game start port H10, etc.) (3) the game ball has not been launched (the player has not touched the launch handle D44, the game ball has not flowed into the game area D30, etc.), In this case, it may be determined that the game is not executed. In the case of Yes in step 2706, the CPUSC of the sub control board S is a standby demonstration screen (a screen displayed on the effect display device SG when the game is not progressing for a predetermined period, for example, character introduction, story introduction, etc. Set a command to display a moving image), and shift to step 2710. The display of the standby demonstration screen ends when the execution of the game is resumed. In addition, that the execution of the game is resumed, (1) the game ball to various winning a prize mouths (the 1st main game starting mouth A10, the 2nd main game starting mouth B10, the general winning a prize mouth, the large winning a prize mouth C10 etc) Detection of various ball entrances (to the first main game start port A10, second main game start port B10, general winning port, large winning port C10, out port D80, auxiliary game start port H10, etc.) Detection of entering the game ball, (3) detection of the launch of the game ball (a player touches the launch handle D44, the game ball is flowing into the game area D30, etc.), and the game is executed It may be determined that has been resumed. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2706, the processing shifts to step 2710.

  Next, in step 2710, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines whether or not the standby demo screen is being displayed. If YES in step 2710, the CPUSC of the sub control board S determines in step 2712 whether or not a predetermined operation (for example, long press operation) of the sub input button SB has been performed. In the case of Yes in step 2712, the CPUSC of the sub control board S sets a command for displaying information on the gaming state and jackpot symbol at the time of jackpot selection on the effect display device SG in step 2714, and proceeds to step 2999. Incidentally, even in the case of No in step 2710 or step 2712, the processing shifts to step 2999. As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the player can operate the sub input button SB while displaying the standby demonstration screen to display information on the gaming state and the jackpot symbol at the time of the big hit on the effect display device SG. It has become.

  By configuring as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment, the number of jackpots won in the probability variation gaming state becomes a predetermined number, so that it shifts to the non-probability variation gaming state after the big hit ends. It is possible to indicate whether the counter value of the probability variation continuous counter MP51c-2 is large or not depending on the stay stage, that is, the number of jackpots that can be won by reaching the limiter, and the player inputs sub By operating the button SB, it is possible to display information on the gaming state and jackpot symbol at the time of the big hit on the effect display device SG, and whether the big hit is won in the non probability changing gaming state and time shortening gaming state Etc., the number of remaining big hits until reaching the limiter can be estimated, and the interest of the game is enhanced. And thus. In addition, by executing a specific operation (for example, pressing a button operation for performing a button operation serving as a trigger for generating effects during a symbol change, etc. for a predetermined time), the sub input button is executed while the symbol changes. The current gaming state (for example, whether it is a probability variation gaming state and a time shortening gaming state or a non-probability variation gaming state and a time shortening gaming state) may be notified or the number of remaining limiters may be notified. Also, when a big hit, by performing a specific operation (for example, long press for a predetermined time or more) of the sub-input button during the big hit (during the big hit start demonstration time or during round execution, during the big hit end demonstration time) The gaming state (probability fluctuation gaming state and time shortening gaming state or non-probability fluctuation gaming state and time shortening gaming state) may be notified when the player is elected.

  In the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, it is awarded after the big hit when winning the big hit in the time shortening gaming state from the number of time reductions granted after the big hitting end when winning the big hit in the non-time shortening gaming state It may be configured that the number of time savings is relatively large. When configured as such, depending on whether or not the jackpot was won in the time-saving gaming state, even in the same jackpot symbol (eg, "7A") in the time-saving gaming state after the big hit end It may be configured such that the selection tendency of the fluctuation time (the limited frequency table to be referred to is different, the transition mode of the limited frequency state, etc.) and the presentation tendency are different. It should be noted that the transition mode of the limited frequency state is different, for example, after the big hit end in the non-time shortening gaming state is finished “refer to 20 variation reference table A → change 79 limit frequency table B → reference frequency The table C may be referred to as “1 variation reference”, and may be configured as “100 variation reference referring to the limited frequency table D” after the big hit completion in the time-saving gaming state. In addition, when configured as such, when the group A is provided as a group of jackpot symbols and the jackpot symbol of group A is won in the non-time shortening gaming state, transition to the non-time shortening gaming state after the big hit ends If you win the jackpot symbol of Group A in the time saving gaming state, it will shift to the time shortening gaming state after the big hit, and it will be configured so that there are multiple types of time-shortening times to be granted It is also good. In addition, after the big hit completion in the non-time shortening gaming state, the time reduction number is set to 20 times, "limit frequency table A is 5 variations reference → limitation frequency table B is 4 variations reference → limitation frequency table C is 1 variation reference The time reduction count is set to 100 times, and the limited frequency table D is referred to as 100 changes (or the limited frequency table D is referred to as 99 changes → limited frequency table E is changed 1 time) See also).

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment has the above-described configuration of the ST machine, and is configured to shift to the probability fluctuation gaming state after the big hit and to shift to the non-probability fluctuation gaming state. The probability of winning a jackpot by the end of the condition may be 65% or less. In addition, when the jackpot of the second main game side is won in the probability variation gaming state, it may be configured to shift to the probability variation gaming state after the big hit is completed. Also, the configuration of the ball machine described above may be used, and in such a configuration, the number of shortings after the big hit in the short opening big hit is smaller than the number of shortings after the big hit in the long opening big hit. You may In addition, the stay stage in the probability fluctuation gaming state is common after the big hit end in the long open big hit and after the big hit end in the short open big hit until the time reduction number after the big hit end in the short open big hit after the big hit ends If it is a stay stage (for example, battle stage which is a production aspect to fight the enemy character) and then after a big hit end in a long open big hit, a different stay stage (for example, a big fluctuation time at the time of big hit or loss) To be). In addition, after the end of the long opening big hit, the number of time reduction is 100 times, 30 times of the first half is a big hit immediate notification mode (a mode in which the fluctuation time is relatively short regardless of the outcome), and then 70 The times may be set to be 50 times after the short opening big hit while the times may be the battle effect mode, and all 50 times may be set to be the battle effect mode.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment may be configured as follows. The configurations listed below may be combined with each other as appropriate, or only one of them may be applied.
(A1) The upper limit number of holdings of the second main game side is 1 or more (A2) The small hitting probability of the second main game side is high probability (1020/1024, etc.)
(A3) Even if you win the big hit triggered by the small hit of the second main game side, there is a case that it does not shift to the time shortening gaming state after the big hit end (A4) The second main game side hold after the big hit end The probability of winning the big hit by the end of the symbol variation completely digested is 65% or less (after the end of the big hit triggered by the suspension of the big hit symbol of the first main game side won in the non-time shortening gaming state, or After the big hit triggered by a small hit, it may be configured so that the number of time-savings may be 100 times)
(A5) Even if the game ball enters the big winning opening during a small hit, it is configured as above depending on the operation of the sorting member in the big winning opening and may or may not enter the V winning opening. May be Also, change the above configuration,
(B1) The number of time reductions granted after the second main gaming side is 2 or more (B2) big hit is multiple times, and the number of time reductions is the same number as the number of upper limit holdings on the second main game side is there

Further, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment may be configured as follows.
(C1) Aside from the number of time reductions counted in both the case where the first main game symbol fluctuates and the case where the second main game symbol fluctuates, there is a time reduction number that counts the fluctuation of only the first main game symbol (C2) Aside from the number of time reductions counted in both the case where the first main gaming symbol has fluctuated and the case where the second main gaming symbol has fluctuated, it has time reductions which count variations only in the second main gaming symbol (C3) The hold on the first main game is prioritized over the hold on the second main game (C4) The hold on the second main game is prioritized over the hold on the first main game (C5) When the lost symbol is stopped due to the time reduction final change when the time shortening game state is to be ended, the non-time shortened gaming state is in the fluctuation fixed time according to the lost symbol (C6) the first main game Time reduction game state transition rate after the big hit end of the side Design the big hit loop rate in the time reduced gaming state from the ratio that can win the big hit by the time shortening gaming state ends (designed to 65% or less), and also the number of times reduced by the big hit symbol or small hit symbol May be configured to be different

The following signals may be output as the external terminal output signals as described above with reference to FIG. It is preferable to apply to the case where the big hit is executed after the small hit by entering the V winning opening during the small hit described above.
Signal type: Jackpot system outline: Special signal or a small hit game being executed, or a signal 1 that outputs that the game state is in the time-saving game state (that is, a state advantageous to the player) Configuration: [output timing] condition device operation flag off → timing after 0.504 seconds from the on [output period] condition device operation flag on → timing when the main game time short flag is off when off, or the main game time short flag on → When the condition device operation flag is off, overlap of the output period to output the on signal until the timing when the condition flag is off: [possibility of duplication] None Remarks: When the condition device operation flag is on → off and it shifts to the non time saving gaming state Also, it will be on until all the fluctuation related to the second main gaming side's suspension existing at the transition timing concerned is finished, ie, the time-saving gaming state It may be output over the time reduction gaming state. In addition, in the above, when winning a small hit in the symbol change related to the last one of the second main game side pending, when the big hit triggered by the small hit is executed, the time after the big hit ends When it shifts to the shortening game state, it is continuously turned on, but when it shifts to the non-time shortening game state after the big hit ends, it becomes on → off. In addition, even after the big hit that is triggered by the small hit won by the symbol change on the second main game side, even if it is configured to be able to transition to either the non-time shortening gaming state and the time shortening gaming state Well, if configured in such a way, a big hit triggered by a small hit is executed in a situation where time saving gaming state and the second main gaming side's suspension remain, and after the big hit the non-time shortening gaming state is executed If you win the big hit again triggered by the small hit due to the change of the second main game symbol related to the remaining reserve of the second main game side, after the big hit end (the timing of the big hit end timing A When the gaming state of) is the time shortening gaming state, the above signal is continuously output after timing A, but after the big hit end (the big hit end timing is timing A) When the gaming state is the non-time shortening gaming state, the output of the above signal may be terminated at timing A when the second main gaming side has 0 pending after the end of the big hit. it can. In addition, if you win a small hit in the remaining reserve at the end of the second main game side in non-time shortening gaming state, and did not enter the V winning opening during the small hit, the small hit At the end of the small hit end demonstration time, the time signal is terminated. In addition to the above signals, it may be configured to output a signal of the big hit system, and when it is configured to have the big hit signals A, B and C, (1) the big hit signal A is a small hit and a large hit. (2) Big hit signal B will be output during both big hit, but not during small hit, (3) Big hit signal C will be won with a small hit during the non-time saving gaming state It may be configured to be output during all the big hit regardless of the playing state.

  In addition, it is configured to be able to output the big hit signal as an external terminal output signal different from the above signal, and when the big hit symbol stops and the big hit is started, the big hit signal is output from the start of the big hit start demonstration time, Even when a small hit is made, a big hit signal may be output from the entry timing of the V winning opening when the V winning opening is entered.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment may be configured as follows. It is preferable to apply to the case where the big hit is executed after the small hit by entering the V winning opening during the small hit described above.
(D1) Perform pre-reading effect triggered by entering the second main game start opening in the time shortening gaming state, specifically, in the time shortening gaming state, it will be a small hit within the hold that has already occurred After that, a pre-reading effect of suggesting or notifying whether or not there is a hold on the occasion of the occurrence of the hold of the second main game side newly generated (entering the second main game start port) as a trigger is executed.
(D2) Time reduction If the player wins a small hit on the first main gaming side (a small hit in which entering the V winning opening is difficult compared to the small hit on the second main gaming side) in the game state, the small After the big hit that is triggered by the hit, the game shifts to the time-saving gaming state (The effect during the big hit may be such an effect that a series of battles such as a battle loss effect is finished)
(D3) Win in the non-time shortening gaming state big win with the stop of the big hit symbol in the big hit or the small hit triggered the big hit, transition to the time shortening gaming state after the big hit end, and the number of time reduction is 100 times If there is, during the symbol change of the second main game side in the time reduction gaming state does not perform the pre-reading effect that suggests the possibility that there will be a small hit in the hold

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment is configured such that the big hit is executed after the small hit by entering the V winning opening during the small hit described above, and the stop of the big hit symbol on the second main game side It is possible to execute the same effect mode as the effect of notifying that there was a ball entry to the V prize opening that is executed when the game ball enters the V prize opening during the big hit as a trigger You may comprise (It is good also as a production | presentation in common with the production in the fluctuation | variation which concerns on a small hit symbol, and the production | presentation of the fluctuation | variation which concerns on a big hit symbol).

Further, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment may be configured as follows. In addition, it is suitable to apply, when it comprises so that it may transfer to a probability fluctuation game state after a big hit by entering a specific area in the above-mentioned big hit.
(E1) The ratio of the long opening big hit in the big hit of the second main game side is higher than the ratio of the long opening big hit in the big hit of the first main game side (The short opening big hit is also present in the second main game side doing)
(E2) Probability fluctuation gaming state does not end with the number of symbol fluctuation (E3) The limiter machine mentioned above (E4) Limiter (big hit in probability fluctuation gaming state which will shift to non-probability fluctuation gaming state after big hit end) The number of time reductions granted after the big hit is relatively greater after the big hit that has reached the limiter than after the big hit, which has not reached the predetermined number of times consecutively). In addition, the number of time reductions after the big hit at the time of the big hit in the time reduction gaming state may be configured to be greater than the number of time reductions after the big hit at the time of the big hit in the non-time shortening gaming state (E5) The first main game side or the second main game side won second time in the time reduction gaming state than the number of time reductions granted after the big hit end winning in the first main game side big hit in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state There are multiple types of time reductions that can be granted after the big hit end (E6) There are multiple types of time reductions that can be granted after the big hit end (for example, non-probability fluctuation gaming state and non-time shortening game) The number of time reductions after the short opening big hit end of the first main game side won in the state, and the number of time reductions after the big hit end when not entering the specific area in the long opening big hit etc, etc.)

  In the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the limited frequency transition (determination of the timing of transition of the limited frequency state) is determined by a random number and is not determined depending on the stop symbol {random number for determining the limited frequency For example, it has a fluctuation pattern table reference state determination random number), and determines a table to be referred to at the time of fluctuation mode determination after the big hit and a limited frequency transition pattern according to a lottery result using the random number. As an example, the random pattern lottery regarding the above-mentioned limited frequency transition is executed after the big hit end (or the random number lottery regarding the above limited frequency transition is executed during the fluctuation concerning the big hit symbol), the fluctuation pattern selection state after the big hit is determined Alternatively, the limited frequency transition pattern after that may be determined, and as a random number range, 0 to 299 out of 1024 is "limited frequency A 50 times → limited frequency B 49 times → limited frequency C 1 times", 300 to 599 " Limit frequency A 20 times → limit frequency B 79 times → limit frequency C 1 times, 600 to 899 are configured as "limit frequency B 99 times → limit frequency C 1 times", 900 to 1023 as "limit frequency D 100 times", etc. It is also good.

(Summary)
The following concepts can be extracted (listed) based on the configurations shown in the above embodiments. However, the concepts listed below are merely examples, and the concepts based on the additional configurations shown in the above embodiments are of course added to these concepts, as well as the combination and separation (superordinate conceptization) of these listed concepts. May be

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present concept (1) is
A first start port (for example, a first main game start port A10) to which game balls can enter;
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) to which game balls can enter;
A variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) capable of taking a closed state and an open state;
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
And a sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) that controls effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG);
The main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquiring means for acquiring a first random number based on entering a ball into the first starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10);
After the first identification information is variably displayed in the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) based on the first random number acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first identification information is stopped First identification information display control means for controlling to display;
Second random number acquiring means for acquiring a second random number based on entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10);
After the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) based on the second random number acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second identification information is stopped Second identification information display control means for controlling to display;
After the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, there is a predetermined number of entering balls into the variable winning opening (for example, the second big winning opening C20) Special game control means capable of executing a special game for executing a unit game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the second big winning opening C20) advantageous for the player until the period has elapsed;
Low probability lottery state in which the probability that the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group becomes the predetermined probability, and the stop the first identification information or the second identification information belongs to the predetermined group Execution of the special game when there is a high probability lottery state in which the probability of being stopped and displayed in the display mode is higher than the predetermined probability, and there is a ball entering a specific area during the execution of the special game The game state transition control to control to be in the low probability lottery state after the end of the special game execution when there is no entering the specific area during the execution of the special game while it may be in the high probability lottery state after the end Means,
Game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the side of the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) to the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) side,
The secondary gaming unit (for example, secondary control board S),
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) side;
And an effect display content control means capable of displaying an effect on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
The second identification rather than the ease of entering the specific area (for example, the specific area C22) during the execution of the special game executed by the first identification information being stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group It is configured such that the ease of entering the specific area (for example, the specific area C22) during execution of the special game executed by the stop display in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is higher. Yes,
A specific area entering game can be displayed to notify that there is a ball entering a specific area (for example, the specific area C22) as the effect displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) Has been
It is a pachinko game machine characterized in that it is configured not to display the specific area ball presentation effect at the time of entering the first specific area (for example, the specific area C22) during execution of the special game.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (2) is
A first start port (for example, a first main game start port A10) to which game balls can enter;
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) to which game balls can enter;
A variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) capable of taking a closed state and an open state;
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display unit capable of displaying an effect (for example, an effect display device SG,
And a sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) that controls effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG);
The main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquiring means for acquiring a first random number based on entering a ball into the first starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10);
After the first identification information is variably displayed in the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) based on the first random number acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first identification information is stopped First identification information display control means for controlling to display;
Second random number acquiring means for acquiring a second random number based on entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10);
After the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g) based on the second random number acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the second identification information is stopped Second identification information display control means for controlling to display;
After the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, there is a predetermined number of entering balls into the variable winning opening (for example, the second big winning opening C20) Special game control means capable of executing a special game for executing a unit game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the second big winning opening C20) advantageous for the player until the period has elapsed;
Game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the side of the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) to the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) side,
Low probability lottery state in which the probability that the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group becomes the predetermined probability, and the stop the first identification information or the second identification information belongs to the predetermined group There is a high probability lottery state in which the probability of being stopped and displayed in the display mode is higher than the predetermined probability, and there is a ball entering a specific area (for example, a specific area C22) during the execution of the special game In the case where it is possible to be in a high probability lottery state after the end of the execution of the special game, but after entering the special area (for example, the specific area C22) during the execution of the special game, after the execution of the special game Can be controlled to have a low probability lottery state at
There is a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state where it is easy to enter the second starting slot (for example, the second main gaming starting port B10) than the normal gaming state, and a high probability lottery state and If it is controlled to be in the specific gaming state, and it is in the high probability lottery state and in the specific gaming state, the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information from the start to the stop display is taken as one unit. After being counted and the one unit has been performed a predetermined number of times, it is configured to be in the low probability lottery state and the specific gaming state,
When the high probability lottery state and the specific gaming state are changed to the low probability lottery state and the specific gaming state, the probability is low after the one unit is performed a specific number of times starting from the time the one unit is performed a predetermined number of times It is configured to be in a lottery state and a normal gaming state,
The secondary gaming unit (for example, secondary control board S),
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) side;
And an effect display content control means capable of displaying an effect on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
In the low probability lottery state and the normal gaming state, the stop identification information of the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed as a stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, the special game is executed, and specified during the execution of the special game If there is an entry to the area, it is configured to be able to be in the high probability lottery state and the normal gaming state after the execution of the special game.
In the high probability lottery state and the normal gaming state, the stop identification information of the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed as a stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, the special game is executed, and specified during the execution of the special game When there is a ball entry to the area (for example, the specific area C22), it is configured to be in the high probability lottery state and the specific gaming state after the execution of the special game is completed,
In the high probability lottery state and the normal gaming state, the stop identification information of the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed as a stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, the special game is executed, and specified during the execution of the special game If there is no entry into the area (for example, the specific area C22), it is configured to be in the low probability lottery state and the specific gaming state after the execution of the special game is completed,
In the high probability lottery state and the normal gaming state, the stop identification information of the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed as a stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, the special game is executed, and specified during the execution of the special game There is an entry into the area (for example, the specific area C22), and the effect display format after the special game ends when the high probability lottery state and the specific game state are entered after the execution of the special game, and the high probability lottery In the state and the normal gaming state, the stop identification information of the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed as a stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group and the special game is executed, and the specific area (for example, , There is no entry into the specific area C22), and the effect display format after the end of the special game when the low probability lottery state and the specific game state are entered after the end of execution of the special game Is a pachinko machine, characterized in that it is configured to be identical.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (3) is
A starting opening where game balls can enter (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10),
A variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) capable of taking a closed state and an open state;
And an identification information display section capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g);
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on entering a ball into the starting opening (for example, the first main gaming starting opening A10, the second main gaming starting opening B10),
Based on the random number acquired by the random number acquisition means, after the identification information is variably displayed in the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display A21g and the second main game symbol display B21g), the identification information is stopped and displayed. Identification information display control means for controlling to
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, the variable winning prize opening (for example, the second big winning opening C20) variable winning prize until there is a predetermined number of entering the ball or a predetermined period elapses A special game control means capable of executing a special game for executing a unit game that can make the player's mouth (for example, the second big winning hole C20) advantageous to the player;
The low probability lottery state in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is the predetermined probability, and the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is the predetermined probability. Also has a high probability lottery state with high probability,
Normal gaming state and specific gaming state where it is easy to enter the starting opening (for example, the first main game starting port A10, the second main game starting port B10) than the normal gaming state, and after the end of the special game execution In the high probability lottery state and the specific gaming state, control is performed, and in the high probability lottery state and the specific gaming state, the variable display of identification information starts to stop display as one unit, and is counted after the end of the special game execution After the one unit is performed a predetermined number of times, it is configured to be in a low probability lottery state and a specific gaming state,
When the high probability lottery state and the specific gaming state are changed to the low probability lottery state and the specific gaming state, the probability is low after the one unit is performed a specific number of times starting from the time the one unit is performed a predetermined number of times It is configured to be in a lottery state and a normal gaming state,
The first information, the second information different from the first information, and the third information different from the first information and the second information are output as external output information for outputting to the outside from the pachinko gaming machine Is made possible,
The first information is configured to be output in response to the stop display in the stop display mode in which the identification information belongs to the predetermined group in the normal gaming state.
Even when the low probability lottery state and the specific gaming state are entered from the situation where the first information is output in the high probability lottery state and the specific gaming state, the first information may be continuously output while the high In the probability lottery state and the normal game state, the first information is not output.
The second information is configured to be output when the identification information is stopped and displayed,
The time when the second signal is output when the second information is output triggered by the stop display of the identification information in the high probability lottery state and the specific gaming state, the low probability lottery state and the specific gaming state The time when the second signal is output when the second information is output in response to the stop display of the identification information at the same time is the same time,
The selection tendency of the variation display time of the identification information in the high probability lottery state and the specific gaming state is different from the selection tendency of the variation display time of the identification information in the low probability lottery state and the specific gaming state It is a pachinko game machine that features it.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (4) is
The game ball flowing down on the first area side is located at a position where entering the ball is easier than the game ball flowing down on the second area side (for example, the second main game starting port B10) ,
A variable winning opening (for example, such as a closed state and an open state in which game balls flowing down on the first area side are arranged at positions where entering the ball is easier than game balls flowing down on the second area side) , The second big winning opening C20),
An identification information display section capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g);
A main gaming unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
And a sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) that controls effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG);
The main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on entering a ball into the starting opening (for example, the first main gaming starting opening A10, the second main gaming starting opening B10),
Based on the random number acquired by the random number acquisition means, after the identification information is variably displayed in the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display A21g and the second main game symbol display B21g), the identification information is stopped and displayed. Identification information display control means for controlling to
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, the variable winning prize opening (for example, the second big winning opening C20) variable winning prize until there is a predetermined number of entering the ball or a predetermined period elapses Special game control means capable of executing a special game which executes a unit game a plurality of times which can make the mouth (for example, the second large winning opening C20) advantageous to the player;
In the case of having a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and in the specific gaming state, the variable display of identification information starts to stop display as one unit, and the specific gaming state is entered. Necessary for display of effects performed on the side of the game state control means and the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) that can be controlled so as not to be in the normal gaming state until the one unit is counted a predetermined number of times And game information transmitting means for transmitting such game information to the side of the sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S);
The first variation pattern table as a table referred to when determining the variation display time of identification information in the specific gaming state, and the second variation pattern table in which the selection tendency of the variation display time of the identification information is different from the first variation pattern table And the first variation pattern table and the second variation pattern table have at least a third variation pattern table in which the selection tendency of the variation display time of the identification information is different, and the first variation pattern in the specific period in the specific gaming state The first change state referring to the table, the second change state transferred from the first change state referring to the second change pattern table after the specific period in the specific gaming state ends, and the normal gaming state from the specific gaming state Refer to the third fluctuation pattern table after the transition. Change the third fluctuation state from the second fluctuation state. And it has also,
The secondary gaming unit (for example, secondary control board S),
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) side;
And an effect display content control means capable of displaying an effect on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
In the case of the specific gaming state, a notification image can be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) as an effect to notify the first area to fire the game ball, and the notification The image includes a first notification image occupying a predetermined display area and a second notification image occupying a display area smaller than the first notification image,
While the first notification image is displayed in the specific gaming state and satisfies the predetermined display condition, the second notification image does not satisfy the predetermined display condition in the specific gaming state. Is also configured to be displayed,
When the predetermined condition is satisfied in the first variation state and in the second variation state at the next variation display of identification information, both the first notification image and the second notification image are the first variation In the situation where it is possible to output from the state to the second fluctuation state, and in the second fluctuation state and in the third fluctuation state at the next fluctuation display of the identification information, with the first notification image and the second notification image Is a pachinko game machine characterized in that it is not output from the second fluctuation state to the third fluctuation state.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (5) is
A starting opening where game balls can enter (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10),
A variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) capable of taking a closed state and an open state;
An identification information display section capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g);
A main gaming unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
And an auxiliary game unit (for example, an auxiliary control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display unit;
The main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on entering a ball into the starting opening (for example, the first main gaming starting opening A10, the second main gaming starting opening B10),
Based on the random number acquired by the random number acquisition means, after the identification information is variably displayed in the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display A21g and the second main game symbol display B21g), the identification information is stopped and displayed. Identification information display control means for controlling to
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, the variable winning prize opening (for example, the second big winning opening C20) variable winning prize until there is a predetermined number of entering the ball or a predetermined period elapses Special game control means capable of executing a special game which executes a unit game a plurality of times which can make the mouth (for example, the second large winning opening C20) advantageous to the player;
In the case of having a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and in the specific gaming state, the variable display of identification information starts to stop display as one unit, and the specific gaming state is entered. Necessary for display of effects performed on the side of the game state control means and the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) that can be controlled so as not to be in the normal gaming state until the one unit is counted a predetermined number of times And game information transmitting means for transmitting such game information to the side of the sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S);
The first variation pattern table as a table referred to when determining the variation display time of identification information in the specific gaming state, and the second variation pattern table in which the selection tendency of the variation display time of the identification information is different from the first variation pattern table And the first variation pattern table and the second variation pattern table have at least a third variation pattern table in which the selection tendency of the variation display time of the identification information is different, and the first variation pattern in the specific period in the specific gaming state The first change state referring to the table, the second change state transferred from the first change state referring to the second change pattern table after the specific period in the specific gaming state ends, and the normal gaming state from the specific gaming state Refer to the third fluctuation pattern table after the transition. Change the third fluctuation state from the second fluctuation state. And it has also,
The secondary gaming unit (for example, secondary control board S),
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) side;
And an effect display content control means capable of displaying an effect on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
While the specific effect is not performed until the one unit is performed a certain number of times after being in the first fluctuation state and in the first fluctuation state, the first fluctuation state is the first fluctuation state and the first fluctuation It is configured to be able to execute a specific effect after the one unit has been performed a certain number of times since the time when the state is reached.
In the second variation state, a specific effect can be performed,
The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the specific effect is not performed in the third fluctuation state.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present concept (6) is
A starting opening where game balls can enter (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10),
A variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) capable of taking a closed state and an open state;
An identification information display section capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g);
A main gaming unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
And a sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) that controls effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG);
The main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on entering a ball into the starting opening (for example, the first main gaming starting opening A10, the second main gaming starting opening B10),
A random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired random number as a hold until the random number acquisition unit acquires the random number until the condition for determining whether the acceptance or rejection is satisfied;
Pass / fail judgment means for executing a hit / fail judgment based on the random number when the hit / fail judgment permission condition is satisfied;
Identification information display content determination means for determining stop identification information of identification information based on the result of the success or failure judgment by the success or failure judgment means;
After the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display A21g and the second main game symbol display B21g) based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means, the identification information is stopped. Identification information display control means for controlling to stop and display the identification information;
The result of the pass / fail judgment by the pass / fail judgment means is winning, and the stop identification information of the identification information is stopped and displayed in the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display A21g, the second main game symbol display B21g) Special game control means for executing a special game advantageous to the player after the game
In the case of having a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and in the specific gaming state, the variable display of identification information starts to stop display as one unit, and the specific gaming state is entered. Necessary for display of effects performed on the side of the game state control means and the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) that can be controlled so as not to be in the normal gaming state until the one unit is counted a predetermined number of times And game information transmitting means for transmitting such game information to the side of the sub game unit (for example, the sub control board S);
The first variation pattern table as a table referred to when determining the variation display time of identification information in the specific gaming state, and the second variation pattern table in which the selection tendency of the variation display time of the identification information is different from the first variation pattern table And the first variation pattern table and the second variation pattern table have at least a third variation pattern table in which the selection tendency of the variation display time of the identification information is different, and the first variation pattern in the specific period in the specific gaming state The first change state referring to the table, the second change state transferred from the first change state referring to the second change pattern table after the specific period in the specific gaming state ends, and the normal gaming state from the specific gaming state Refer to the third fluctuation pattern table after the transition. Change the third fluctuation state from the second fluctuation state. And it has also,
The secondary gaming unit (for example, secondary control board S),
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) side;
And an effect display content control means capable of displaying an effect on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
While the specific effect is not performed until the one unit is performed a certain number of times after being in the first fluctuation state and in the first fluctuation state, the first fluctuation state is the first fluctuation state and the first fluctuation It is configured to be able to execute a specific effect after the one unit has been performed a certain number of times since the time when the state is reached.
In the second variation state, a specific effect can be performed,
In the third variation state, the specific effect is not executed,
In the case of the first change state, the number of reservations at the time of satisfying the qualification determination permission condition is the first number of reservations, and the number of reservations at the time of satisfaction of the qualification determination permission condition is the first suspension The average value of the fluctuation display time of the identification information in the case where the result of the propriety judgment by the propriety judgment means at the time of satisfying the propriety judgment permission condition is the second hold number more than the number. While an average difference of predetermined time occurs,
In the case of the second variation state, the number of reservations at the time of satisfying the qualification determination permission condition is the first number of reservations and the number of reservations at the time of satisfaction of the qualification determination permission condition is the second The selection tendency of the variation display time of the identification information is configured to be the same when the result of the qualification determination by the qualification determination means at the time of satisfying the qualification determination permission condition is not winning, in the case of the number of reservations. Yes,
In the case of the third variation state, the number of reservations at the time of satisfying the qualification determination permission condition is the first number of reservations and the number of reservations at the time of satisfaction of the qualification determination permission condition is the second The selection tendency of the variation display time of the identification information is configured to be the same when the result of the qualification determination by the qualification determination means at the time of satisfying the qualification determination permission condition is not winning, in the case of the number of reservations. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being

The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (7) is
A starting opening where game balls can enter (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10),
A variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) capable of taking a closed state and an open state;
And an identification information display section capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g);
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on entering a ball into the starting opening (for example, the first main gaming starting opening A10, the second main gaming starting opening B10),
Random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing the acquired random number until the variation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied when the random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, and for holding to occur;
When the variable display start condition of identification information regarding a certain hold is satisfied, a yes / no judgment is performed based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the change display manner of the stop display mode of identification information and the identification information Game content determination means for determining
In accordance with the determination by the game content determination means, after the identification information is variably displayed in the identification information display unit (for example, the first main gaming symbol display portion A21g, the second main gaming symbol display portion B21g), the identification information is stopped and displayed Identification information display control means for controlling;
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, the variable winning prize opening (for example, the second big winning opening C20) variable winning prize until there is a predetermined number of entering the ball or a predetermined period elapses A special game control means capable of executing a special game which executes a unit game a plurality of times, which can make the mouth (for example, the second large winning opening C20) advantageous to the player;
The low probability lottery state in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is the predetermined probability, and the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is the predetermined probability. Also has a high probability lottery state with high probability,
It has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state that makes it easier to enter the starting opening (for example, the first main gaming starting opening A10, the second main gaming starting opening B10) than the normal gaming state.
Control to be able to be either high probability lottery state or low probability lottery state after the end of the execution of the special game,
If it becomes a high probability lottery state and a specific gaming state after the execution of the special game, the variable display of identification information starts to the stop display as one unit, and the one unit is counted from the end of the execution of the special game. After being played once, it is configured to be in the low probability lottery state and the normal gaming state,
When the low probability lottery state and the specific gaming state are reached after the end of the special game execution, the variable display of identification information starts to the stop display as one unit, and the one unit is counted from the end of the execution of the special game. After being played twice, it is configured to be in the low probability lottery state and the normal gaming state,
When the first number is X and the second number is Y,
Y ≦ X
Configured to be
The effect display form in the high probability lottery state and the specific gaming state and the effect display form in the low probability lottery state and the specific gaming state may be the same.
The probability of becoming a high probability lottery state after the end of special game execution is A%,
In the high probability lottery state after the end of the execution of the special game, after the end of the execution of the special game, the period after the end of the execution of the special game until the one unit is performed the first number of times The probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is B%.
In the case where the low probability lottery state and the specific gaming state are reached after the end of the special game execution, after the end of the execution of the special game, one unit is counted after the end of the execution of the special game When the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is C% in the period up to
(A / 100) × (B / 100) <(A / 100) × (B / 100) + {(100−A) / 100} × (C / 100) <(A / 100)
And,
(A / 100) × (B / 100) <(A / 100) × (B / 100) + {(100−A) / 100} × (C / 100) <(B / 100)
The pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured to be.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (8) is
A starting opening where game balls can enter (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10),
A variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) capable of taking a closed state and an open state;
And an identification information display section capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g);
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on entering a ball into the starting opening (for example, the first main gaming starting opening A10, the second main gaming starting opening B10),
Random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing the acquired random number until the variation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied when the random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, and for holding to occur;
When the variable display start condition of identification information regarding a certain hold is satisfied, a yes / no judgment is performed based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the change display manner of the stop display mode of identification information and the identification information Game content determination means for determining
In accordance with the determination by the game content determination means, after the identification information is variably displayed in the identification information display unit (for example, the first main gaming symbol display portion A21g, the second main gaming symbol display portion B21g), the identification information is stopped and displayed Identification information display control means for controlling;
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, the variable winning prize opening (for example, the second big winning opening C20) variable winning prize until there is a predetermined number of entering the ball or a predetermined period elapses A special game control means capable of executing a special game which executes a unit game a plurality of times, which can make the mouth (for example, the second large winning opening C20) advantageous to the player;
The low probability lottery state in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is the predetermined probability, and the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is the predetermined probability. Also has a high probability lottery state with high probability,
It has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state that makes it easier to enter the starting opening (for example, the first main gaming starting opening A10, the second main gaming starting opening B10) than the normal gaming state.
Control to be able to be either high probability lottery state or low probability lottery state after the end of the execution of the special game,
If it becomes a high probability lottery state and a specific gaming state after the execution of the special game, the variable display of identification information starts to the stop display as one unit, and the one unit is counted from the end of the execution of the special game. After being played once, it is configured to be in the low probability lottery state and the normal gaming state,
When the low probability lottery state and the specific gaming state are reached after the end of the special game execution, the variable display of identification information starts to the stop display as one unit, and the one unit is counted from the end of the execution of the special game. After being played twice, it is configured to be in the low probability lottery state and the normal gaming state,
When the first number is X and the second number is Y,
Y ≦ X
Configured to be
At least the effect display format A and the effect display format B, which are effect display formats different from the effect display format A, are included as the effect display format.
When the high probability lottery state and the specific gaming state are entered after the end of the special game, the effect display format can be set to either the effect display format A or the effect display format B, but after the special game execution is completed. When the low probability lottery state and the specific gaming state are to be made, the effect display format A is not set as the effect display format, but is configured to be able to be set to the effect display format B,
The probability of becoming a high probability lottery state after the end of special game execution is A%,
In the high probability lottery state after the end of the execution of the special game, after the end of the execution of the special game, the period after the end of the execution of the special game until the one unit is performed the first number of times The probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is B%.
In the case where the low probability lottery state and the specific gaming state are reached after the end of the special game execution, after the end of the execution of the special game, one unit is counted after the end of the execution of the special game When the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is C% in the period up to
(A / 100) × (B / 100) <(A / 100) × (B / 100) + {(100−A) / 100} × (C / 100) <(A / 100)
And,
(A / 100) × (B / 100) <(A / 100) × (B / 100) + {(100−A) / 100} × (C / 100) <(B / 100)
The pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured to be.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this concept (9) is
A first start port (for example, a first main game start port A10) to which game balls can enter;
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) to which game balls can enter;
A variable member (for example, a second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) which is attached to a second start opening (for example, a second main game start opening B10) and which can be displaced to an open state and a closed state. When shifted to the state, the game ball can enter the second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) easily or compared to the closed or closed state, and when moved to the closed state, the second starting opening (For example, the second main game start opening B10) The variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric role thing B11d) which is configured to be difficult to enter the game ball compared to the ball entry impossible or open state ,
A variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) capable of taking an open state and a closed state;
A specific area (for example, V winning opening C27) in which the game ball entering the variable winning opening (for example, second large winning opening C20) can enter;
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
And an auxiliary game unit (for example, an auxiliary control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display unit;
First random number acquiring means for acquiring a first random number based on entering a first starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10);
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the acquired first random number is temporarily stored until the variation display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied, and control is performed so that the first hold occurs First random number temporary storage means,
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol) according to the contents of determination based on a first random number related to a certain first hold, when the variation display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied. First identification information display control means for controlling the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed on the display unit A21g);
Second random number acquiring means for acquiring a second random number based on entering a second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10);
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquiring unit, the acquired second random number is temporarily stored until the variation display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied, and the second hold is controlled to occur. Second random number temporary storage means,
When the variation display start condition of the second identification information regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol) according to the determination content based on the second random number related to the certain second hold A second identification information display control unit configured to control the second identification information to be stopped after the second identification information is variably displayed on the display unit B21g);
First special game control means for executing a first special game that can be advantageous to the player after the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
After the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, a variable winning opening opening game can be executed to change the variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) from the closed state to the open state Winning opening opening game control means,
A second special game that executes a unit game that can be made advantageous to the player a plurality of times when the variable winning opening opening game is executed and there is an entry into the specific area (for example, V winning opening C27) Second special game control means for executing
Game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the side of the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) to the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) side,
As a game state relating to the ease of opening the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric role B11d), a variable member than the normal gaming state and the normal game state (for example, the second main game start opening electric role B11d) Is controlled to be in the specific gaming state after the end of the execution of the first special game or the second special game, and when it is the specific gaming state, the first identification information or The variable display from the second identification information to the stop display is one unit, and after the end of the execution of the first special game or the second special game, until the one unit is performed a predetermined number of closing times, the normal gaming state and It is configured not to
As the predetermined number of end times, at least the number of first ends and the number of second ends which is different from the number of first ends are included.
The second hold can occur until a predetermined predetermined number is reached,
The secondary gaming unit (for example, secondary control board S),
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) side;
The effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
The second special game is executed when the variable winning opening opening game is executed by the second identification information being stopped and displayed in the specific mode and there is a ball entering a specific area (for example, V winning opening C27) After the end of, is configured to be able to be in a specific gaming state,
After the end of the first special game executed by the first identification information being stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner, it is configured to be able to be either the normal gaming state or the specific gaming state,
When the specific game state is entered after the end of the first special game due to the first identification information being stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner in the normal gaming state, counting after the end of execution of the first special game It is configured to be in the normal gaming state after one unit has been played for the first final number of times,
It is executed when the variable winning opening opening game is executed and the specific area (for example, V winning opening C27) is entered by stopping display of the second identification information in the specific mode in the normal gaming state When the specific game state is entered after the end of the second special game, the normal game state is set after one unit has been executed for the second final period, counting from after the end of execution of the second special game It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present concept (10) is
A first start port (for example, a first main game start port A10) to which game balls can enter;
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) to which game balls can enter;
A variable member (for example, a second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) which is attached to a second start opening (for example, a second main game start opening B10) and which can be displaced to an open state and a closed state. When shifted to the state, the game ball can enter the second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) easily or compared to the closed or closed state, and when moved to the closed state, the second starting opening (For example, the second main game start opening B10) The variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric role thing B11d) which is configured to be difficult to enter the game ball compared to the ball entry impossible or open state ,
A variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) capable of taking an open state and a closed state;
A specific area (for example, V winning opening C27) in which the game ball entering the variable winning opening (for example, second large winning opening C20) can enter;
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
And an auxiliary game unit (for example, an auxiliary control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display unit;
First random number acquiring means for acquiring a first random number based on entering a first starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10);
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the acquired first random number is temporarily stored until the variation display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied, and control is performed so that the first hold occurs First random number temporary storage means,
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol) according to the contents of determination based on a first random number related to a certain first hold, when the variation display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied. First identification information display control means for controlling the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed on the display unit A21g);
Second random number acquiring means for acquiring a second random number based on entering a second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10);
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquiring unit, the acquired second random number is temporarily stored until the variation display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied, and the second hold is controlled to occur. Second random number temporary storage means,
When the variation display start condition of the second identification information regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol) according to the determination content based on the second random number related to the certain second hold A second identification information display control unit configured to control the second identification information to be stopped after the second identification information is variably displayed on the display unit B21g);
First special game control means for executing a first special game that can be advantageous to the player after the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
After the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, a variable winning opening opening game can be executed to change the variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) from the closed state to the open state Winning opening opening game control means,
A second special game that executes a unit game that can be made advantageous to the player a plurality of times when the variable winning opening opening game is executed and there is an entry into the specific area (for example, V winning opening C27) Second special game control means for executing
Game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the side of the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) to the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) side,
The game state related to the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric role B11d) has a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the variable member is more likely to be open than the normal gaming state After the end of the execution of the first special game or the second special game, it is controlled to be in the specific gaming state, and in the case of the specific gaming state, from the variable display start of the first identification information or the second identification information to the stop display It is a unit, and after the end of the execution of the first special game or the second special game, it is configured not to be in the normal gaming state until one unit is performed a predetermined number of closing times after counting.
As the predetermined number of end times, at least the number of first ends and the number of second ends which is different from the number of first ends are included.
The second hold can occur until a predetermined number of predetermined two or more is reached,
The secondary gaming unit (for example, secondary control board S),
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) side;
The effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
The second special game is executed when the variable winning opening opening game is executed by the second identification information being stopped and displayed in the specific mode and there is a ball entering a specific area (for example, V winning opening C27) After the end of, is configured to be able to be in a specific gaming state,
After the end of the first special game executed by the first identification information being stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner, it is configured to be able to be either the normal gaming state or the specific gaming state,
When the specific game state is entered after the end of the first special game due to the first identification information being stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner in the normal gaming state, counting after the end of execution of the first special game It is configured to be in the normal gaming state after one unit has been played for the first final number of times,
It is executed when the variable winning opening opening game is executed and the specific area (for example, V winning opening C27) is entered by stopping display of the second identification information in the specific mode in the normal gaming state When the specific game state is entered after the end of the second special game, the normal game state is set after one unit has been executed for the second final period, counting from after the end of execution of the second special game Has been
In the normal gaming state, when the stop identification information of the first identification information is stopped and displayed as a predetermined mode and the special game is executed, the second identification information is 1 for the probability that the specific game state will be made after the execution of the special game. The pachinko game machine is characterized in that it is configured to have a higher probability of being stopped and displayed in a specific mode when it is displayed once.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present concept (11) is
A first start port (for example, a first main game start port A10) to which game balls can enter;
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) to which game balls can enter;
A variable member (for example, a second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) which is attached to a second start opening (for example, a second main game start opening B10) and which can be displaced to an open state and a closed state. When it is shifted to the state, the game ball can enter the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port electric role B11d) as it can enter the ball or it is easier to enter compared to the closed state, and when shifted to the closed state A variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric combination) in which the game ball is configured to be difficult to enter the ball in the second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10). B11d),
A variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) capable of taking an open state and a closed state;
A specific area (for example, V winning opening C27) in which the game ball entering the variable winning opening (for example, second large winning opening C20) can enter;
A first main game identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying first main game identification information;
A second main game identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying second main game identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
And a sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) that controls effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG);
First random number acquiring means for acquiring a first random number based on entering a first starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10);
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the acquired first random number is temporarily stored until the variation display start condition of the first main game identification information is satisfied, and the first hold occurs First random number temporary storage means to control;
When the variable display start condition of the first main game identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, the first main game identification information display unit (for example, the first main game identification information display unit according to the determination content based on the first random number (1) A first main game identification information display control means for controlling the first main game identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first main game identification information is variably displayed in the main game symbol display portion A21g),
Second random number acquisition means for acquiring a second random number based on entering the second starting opening;
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition means, the acquired second random number is temporarily stored until the variable display start condition of the second main game identification information is satisfied, and the second hold occurs Second random number temporary storage means to control;
When the variable display start condition of the second main game identification information regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, the second main game identification information display unit (for example, the second main game identification information display unit according to the determination content based on the second random number 2) Second main game identification information display control means for controlling so as to stop and display the second main game identification information after variably displaying the second main game identification information in the main game symbol display portion B21g);
First special game control means for executing a first special game that can be advantageous to the player after the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
After the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, a variable winning opening opening game that can change the variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) from the closed state to the open state Variable winning opening opening game control means for executing
A second special game that executes a unit game that can be made advantageous to the player a plurality of times when the variable winning opening opening game is executed and there is an entry into the specific area (for example, V winning opening C27) Second special game control means for executing
Game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the side of the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) to the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) side,
As a game state relating to the ease of opening the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric role B11d), a variable member than the normal gaming state and the normal game state (for example, the second main game start opening electric role B11d) Controls the game to be in the specific game state after the end of the execution of the first special game or the second special game, and when it is in the specific game state, the first main game identification From the variable display start of the information or second main game identification information to the stop display as one unit, counting from the end of the execution of the first special game or the second special game until the predetermined number of closing times of the one unit is performed It is configured not to be in the normal gaming state,
The second hold can occur until a predetermined predetermined number is reached,
The secondary gaming unit (for example, secondary control board S),
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) side;
Based on the information on the first main game identification information or the second main game identification information received by the game information receiving means, effect display contents capable of displaying the secondary game identification information in the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) Control means,
Within the period when the first main game identification information is variably displayed on the first main game identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) or the second main game identification information is the second main game identification Within the period displayed on the information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol display unit B21g), after the subsidiary game identification information is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) And an auxiliary game identification information display control unit configured to control the operation to temporarily display the stop temporarily as the pseudo change unit and to execute the pseudo change unit one or more times and then to display the stop fixedly.
It is configured to be able to execute the pseudo change unit from the start of the variable display of the secondary game identification information to the stop display,
When the first main game identification information is variably displayed in the normal gaming state, the probability that the pseudo variation unit is executed is the pseudo variation unit when the second main game identification information is variably displayed in the normal gaming state. A pachinko game machine characterized in that it is configured to have a lower probability of being executed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present concept (12) is
A first start port (for example, a first main game start port A10) to which game balls can enter;
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) to which game balls can enter;
A variable member (for example, a second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) which is attached to a second start opening (for example, a second main game start opening B10) and which can be displaced to an open state and a closed state. When the game ball is in the second start opening when it is displaced, it is easier to enter the ball than in the closed or closed state, and when it is closed, the game ball can not enter the ball in the second start opening or it is open A variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric role thing B11d) which is configured to be difficult to enter the ball in comparison;
A variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) capable of taking an open state and a closed state;
A specific area (for example, V winning opening C27) in which the game ball entering the variable winning opening (for example, second large winning opening C20) can enter;
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
And a sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) that controls effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the sub control board S);
First random number acquiring means for acquiring a first random number based on entering a first starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10);
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the acquired first random number is temporarily stored until the variation display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied, and control is performed so that the first hold occurs First random number temporary storage means,
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol) according to the contents of determination based on a first random number related to a certain first hold, when the variation display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied. First identification information display control means for controlling the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed on the display unit A21g);
Second random number acquiring means for acquiring a second random number based on entering a second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10);
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquiring unit, the acquired second random number is temporarily stored until the variation display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied, and the second hold is controlled to occur. Second random number temporary storage means,
When the variation display start condition of the second identification information regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol) according to the determination content based on the second random number related to the certain second hold A second identification information display control unit configured to control the second identification information to be stopped after the second identification information is variably displayed on the display unit B21g);
First special game control means for executing a first special game that can be advantageous to the player after the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
After the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, a variable winning opening opening game can be executed to change the variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) from the closed state to the open state Winning opening opening game control means,
A second special game that executes a unit game that can be made advantageous to the player a plurality of times when the variable winning opening opening game is executed and there is an entry into the specific area (for example, V winning opening C27) Second special game control means for executing
Game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the side of the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) to the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) side,
The variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) from the closed state within the displacement drive period which is a period during which the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) can be displaced After being displaced to the open state, it is configured to be able to execute an easy entry ball game in which an operation to be displaced to the closed state is performed one or more times,
As a game state relating to the ease of opening the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric role B11d), a variable member than the normal gaming state and the normal game state (for example, the second main game start opening electric role B11d) Is controlled to be in the specific gaming state after the end of the execution of the first special game or the second special game, and when it is the specific gaming state, the first identification information or The variable display from the second identification information to the stop display is one unit, and after the end of the execution of the first special game or the second special game, until the one unit is performed a predetermined number of closing times, the normal gaming state and It is configured not to
As the predetermined number of end times, at least the number of first ends and the number of second ends which is different from the number of first ends are included.
The second hold can occur until a predetermined predetermined number is reached,
The secondary gaming unit (for example, secondary control board S),
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) side;
The effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
The second special game is executed when the variable winning opening opening game is executed by the second identification information being stopped and displayed in the specific mode and there is a ball entering a specific area (for example, V winning opening C27) After the end of, is configured to be able to be in a specific gaming state,
After the end of the first special game executed by the first identification information being stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner, it is configured to be able to be either the normal gaming state or the specific gaming state,
When the specific game state is entered after the end of the first special game due to the first identification information being stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner in the normal gaming state, counting after the end of execution of the first special game It is configured to be in the normal gaming state after one unit has been played for the first final number of times,
It is executed when the variable winning opening opening game is executed and the specific area (for example, V winning opening C27) is entered by stopping display of the second identification information in the specific mode in the normal gaming state When the specific game state is entered after the end of the second special game, the normal game state is set after one unit has been executed for the second final period, counting from after the end of execution of the second special game Has been
It is executed when the variable winning opening opening game is executed and the specific area (for example, V winning opening C27) is entered by stopping display of the second identification information in the specific mode in the normal gaming state When the special game state is entered after the end of the second special game, the second identification information is variably displayed in the specific game state, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is not the predetermined mode or the specific mode In the case of the variable display time of the second identification information in the case, the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric combination B11d) is open when the easy entry ball game is executed once in the specific gaming state It is configured to be longer than the period,
In the normal gaming state, when the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner, and the specific gaming state is reached after the end of the first special game, the second identification information is variably displayed in the specific gaming state, The variable display time of the second identification information when the stop display mode of the second identification information is not the predetermined mode and the specific mode is a variable member when the easy entry ball game is executed once in the specific gaming state (For example, it is configured to be shorter than a period during which the second main game start opening electric combination B11d) is in the open state,
Since the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode in the normal gaming state, the variable winning opening opening game is executed and to the specific area (for example, V winning opening C27) during the execution of the variable winning opening opening game. When it becomes a specific gaming state after the end of the second special game executed when there is a ball, the first identification information as a variation display of the first first identification information or the second identification information in the specific gaming state Is a variable display, and the first display in the specific gaming state is more than the variable display time of the first identification information when the stop display mode of the first identification information is a stop display mode different from the predetermined mode and the specific mode. The second identification information is variably displayed as the variable identification of the first identification information or the second identification information, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is different from the predetermined mode and the specific mode. It is pachinko machines, characterized in that towards the variable display time of the second identification information is configured to be long in the case of the embodiment.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present concept (13) is
A first start port (for example, a first main game start port A10) to which game balls can enter;
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) to which game balls can enter;
A variable member (for example, a second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) which is attached to a second start opening (for example, a second main game start opening B10) and which can be displaced to an open state and a closed state. When shifted to the state, the game ball can enter the second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) easily or compared to the closed or closed state, and when moved to the closed state, the second starting opening A variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric role thing B11 d) configured to be difficult to enter the game ball compared to the ball impossible or opened state, and
A variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) capable of taking an open state and a closed state;
A specific area (for example, V winning opening C 27) in which the game ball entering the variable winning opening may enter the ball,
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
And an auxiliary game unit (for example, an auxiliary control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display unit;
First random number acquiring means for acquiring a first random number based on entering a first starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10);
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the acquired first random number is temporarily stored until the variation display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied, and control is performed so that the first hold occurs First random number temporary storage means,
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol) according to the contents of determination based on a first random number related to a certain first hold, when the variation display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied. First identification information display control means for controlling the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed on the display unit A21g);
Second random number acquiring means for acquiring a second random number based on entering a second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10);
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquiring unit, the acquired second random number is temporarily stored until the variation display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied, and the second hold is controlled to occur. Second random number temporary storage means,
When the variation display start condition of the second identification information regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol) according to the determination content based on the second random number related to the certain second hold A second identification information display control unit configured to control the second identification information to be stopped after the second identification information is variably displayed on the display unit B21g);
First special game control means for executing a first special game that can be advantageous to the player after the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
After the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, a variable winning opening opening game can be executed to change the variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) from the closed state to the open state Winning opening opening game control means,
A second special game that executes a unit game that can be made advantageous to the player a plurality of times when the variable winning opening opening game is executed and there is an entry into the specific area (for example, V winning opening C27) Second special game control means for executing
Game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the side of the secondary gaming unit to the secondary gaming unit side,
The variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) from the closed state within the displacement drive period which is a period during which the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) can be displaced After being displaced to the open state, it is configured to be able to execute an easy entry ball game in which an operation to be displaced to the closed state is performed one or more times,
As a game state relating to the ease of opening the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric role B11d), a variable member than the normal gaming state and the normal game state (for example, the second main game start opening electric role B11d) Is controlled to be in the specific gaming state after the end of the execution of the first special game or the second special game, and when it is the specific gaming state, the first identification information or The variable display from the second identification information to the stop display is one unit, and after the end of the execution of the first special game or the second special game, until the one unit is performed a predetermined number of closing times, the normal gaming state and It is configured not to
As the predetermined number of end times, at least the number of first ends and the number of second ends which is different from the number of first ends are included.
The second hold can occur until a predetermined predetermined number is reached,
The secondary gaming unit (for example, secondary control board S),
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) side;
The effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
The second special game is executed when the variable winning opening opening game is executed by the second identification information being stopped and displayed in the specific mode and there is a ball entering a specific area (for example, V winning opening C27) After the end of, is configured to be able to be in a specific gaming state,
After the end of the first special game executed by the first identification information being stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner, it is configured to be able to be either the normal gaming state or the specific gaming state,
When the specific game state is entered after the end of the first special game due to the first identification information being stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner in the normal gaming state, counting after the end of execution of the first special game It is configured to be in the normal gaming state after one unit has been played for the first final number of times,
It is specified after the end of the second special game which is executed when the variable winning opening opening game is executed and the specific area is entered by stopping display of the second identification information in the specific mode in the normal gaming state When it becomes a gaming state, it is configured to be put into a normal gaming state after one unit has been performed for the number of times of the second final period, counting after the end of execution of the second special game,
It is executed when the variable winning opening opening game is executed and the specific area (for example, V winning opening C27) is entered by stopping display of the second identification information in the specific mode in the normal gaming state When the special game state is entered after the end of the second special game, the second identification information is variably displayed in the specific game state, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is the predetermined mode and the specific mode The variable display time of the second identification information in the different stop display mode is a variable member when the easy entry ball game is executed once in the specific gaming state (for example, the second main game start opening electric role thing B11d ) Is configured to be longer than the open period,
In the normal gaming state, when the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner, and the specific gaming state is reached after the end of the first special game, the second identification information is variably displayed in the specific gaming state, The variable display time of the second identification information in the case where the stop display mode of the second identification information is the stop display mode different from the predetermined mode and the specific mode, the easy entering ball game is executed once in the specific gaming state It is a pachinko game machine characterized in that the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric combination B11d) in the case of being turned can be shorter than the period when it is in the open state.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present concept (14) is
A first start port (for example, a first main game start port A10) to which game balls can enter;
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) to which game balls can enter;
A variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric role B11d) attached to the second start opening and movable in the open state and the closed state, the second start opening (eg, the second start opening when displaced in the open state) , The second main game start opening B10) is a game ball is easy to enter compared to the ball allowed to enter or closed compared to the closed state, when displaced to the closed state second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10) A variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric role thing B11 d) configured to be difficult to enter the game ball compared to the ball impossible or opened state, and
A variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) capable of taking an open state and a closed state;
A specific area (for example, V winning opening C 27) in which the game ball entering the variable winning opening may enter the ball,
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
And an auxiliary game unit (for example, an auxiliary control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display unit;
First random number acquiring means for acquiring a first random number based on entering a first starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10);
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the acquired first random number is temporarily stored until the variation display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied, and control is performed so that the first hold occurs First random number temporary storage means,
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first main game symbol) according to the contents of determination based on a first random number related to a certain first hold, when the variation display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied. First identification information display control means for controlling the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed on the display unit A21g);
Second random number acquiring means for acquiring a second random number based on entering a second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10);
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquiring unit, the acquired second random number is temporarily stored until the variation display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied, and the second hold is controlled to occur. Second random number temporary storage means,
When the variation display start condition of the second identification information regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, the second identification information display unit (for example, the second main game symbol) according to the determination content based on the second random number related to the certain second hold A second identification information display control unit configured to control the second identification information to be stopped after the second identification information is variably displayed on the display unit B21g);
First special game control means for executing a first special game that can be advantageous to the player after the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
After the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, a variable winning opening opening game can be executed to change the variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) from the closed state to the open state Winning opening opening game control means,
A second special game that executes a unit game that can be made advantageous to the player a plurality of times when the variable winning opening opening game is executed and there is an entry into the specific area (for example, V winning opening C27) Second special game control means for executing
Game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the side of the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) to the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) side,
As a game state relating to the ease of opening the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric role B11d), a variable member than the normal gaming state and the normal game state (for example, the second main game start opening electric role B11d) Is controlled to be in the specific gaming state after the end of the execution of the first special game or the second special game, and when it is the specific gaming state, the first identification information or The variable display from the second identification information to the stop display is one unit, and after the end of the execution of the first special game or the second special game, until the one unit is performed a predetermined number of closing times, the normal gaming state and It is configured not to
As the predetermined number of end times, at least the number of first ends and the number of second ends which is different from the number of first ends are included.
The second hold can occur until a predetermined predetermined number is reached,
The secondary gaming unit (for example, secondary control board S),
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) side;
The effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
The second special game is executed when the variable winning opening opening game is executed by the second identification information being stopped and displayed in the specific mode and there is a ball entering a specific area (for example, V winning opening C27) After the end of, is configured to be able to be in a specific gaming state,
After the end of the first special game executed by the first identification information being stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner, it is configured to be able to be either the normal gaming state or the specific gaming state,
When the specific game state is entered after the end of the first special game due to the first identification information being stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner in the normal gaming state, counting after the end of execution of the first special game It is configured to be in the normal gaming state after one unit has been played for the first final number of times,
It is executed when the variable winning opening opening game is executed and the specific area (for example, V winning opening C27) is entered by stopping display of the second identification information in the specific mode in the specific gaming state If the special game state is entered after the end of the second special game, and the normal game state is entered after one unit has been played for the first closing period after counting up after the end of execution of the second special game, It is configured to be able to execute a specific effect during the execution of the second special game or before the execution of the second special game,
It is executed when the variable winning opening opening game is executed and the specific area (for example, V winning opening C27) is entered by stopping display of the second identification information in the specific mode in the specific gaming state If the special game state is entered after the end of the second special game, and the normal game state is entered after one unit has been played for the second closing period after counting up after the end of execution of the second special game, It is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it is configured not to execute a specific effect during execution of a second special game or before execution of the second special game.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present concept (15) is
A starting opening where game balls can enter (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10),
A variable member (for example, second main game start opening electric role thing B11 d which is attached to the start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10, second main game start opening B10) and which can be shifted to the open state and closed state ), And when it is shifted to the open state, the game ball can enter the start opening (for example, the first main game start opening A10, the second main game start opening B10) and can enter the ball easily or in comparison with the closed state Yes, when the ball is displaced to the closed state, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10) and it is difficult to enter in Variable members (for example, the second main game start opening electric role B11d),
A game winning ball in which the game area flowing down on the first area side is located at a position where entering the ball is easier than the game ball flowing down on the second area side. With the second big winning opening C20),
A specific area (for example, V winning opening C 27) in which the game ball entering the variable winning opening may enter the ball,
An identification information display section capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g);
A main gaming unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
A speaker capable of outputting sound (for example, a speaker D24);
And a sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) for controlling an effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) and an audio output of the speaker (for example, the speaker D24);
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on entering a ball into the starting opening (for example, the first main gaming starting opening A10, the second main gaming starting opening B10),
Based on the random number acquired by the random number acquisition means, after the identification information is variably displayed in the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display A21g and the second main game symbol display B21g), the identification information is stopped and displayed. Identification information display control means for controlling to
First special game control means for executing a first special game that may be advantageous to the player after the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined manner;
A variable winning opening opening game control means for executing a variable winning opening opening game in which the variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) can be opened from the closed state after the identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode ,
A second special game that executes a unit game that can be made advantageous to the player a plurality of times when the variable winning opening opening game is executed and there is an entry into the specific area (for example, V winning opening C27) Second special game control means for executing
Game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the side of the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) to the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) side,
As a game state relating to the ease of opening the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric role B11d), a variable member than the normal gaming state and the normal game state (for example, the second main game start opening electric role B11d) Has a specific gaming state that is likely to be in an open state, and controls so that the specific gaming state can be made after the end of the execution of the first special game or the second special game,
The secondary gaming unit (for example, secondary control board S),
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) side;
The effect display content control means for controlling the effect display content to be displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
As a variable winning opening opening game, variable winning opening opening game A where entry probability to a specific area (for example, V winning opening C27) is a predetermined probability, and entering a specific area (for example, V winning opening C27) It has at least a variable winning opening opening game B where the possibility is lower than the predetermined probability,
When the identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode in the normal gaming state, a variable winning opening firing effect is issued to instruct the game ball to be launched toward the variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) Configured to earn,
The variable winning opening emission effect is an effect mode in which the specific sound is output from the speaker (for example, the speaker D24) after the specific display is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
If the game ball is shot toward the second area side, the shot game ball can flow down the second area and enter the variable winning opening (for example, the second big winning hole C20), but from the speaker When the game ball is fired toward the second area at the timing when the specific voice is started to be output, the fired game ball flows down the second area and the variable winning opening (for example, the second big winning opening) At the timing when C20) is reached, the variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) is in a closed state, or the variable winning opening (for example, a second large winning opening C20) is in a closed state. The probability of being set is higher than the probability that the variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) is in the open state,
When the identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode in the normal gaming state, and when the variable winning opening opening game A is executed, the variable winning opening is opened after the identification information starts variable display. In the period until the game A is finished executing, the variable winning opening firing effect can be executed,
In the normal gaming state, when the identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific mode, and when the variable winning opening opening game B is executed, the variable winning opening is opened after the identification information starts variable display. The pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention is configured such that the variable winning opening emission effect is not executed in a period until the end of the execution of the game B.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present concept (16) is
A first start port (for example, a first main game start port A10) to which game balls can enter;
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) to which game balls can enter;
A variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) capable of taking a closed state and an open state;
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
And a sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) that controls effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG);
The main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquiring means for acquiring a first random number based on entering a ball into the first starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10);
After the first identification information is variably displayed in the first identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) based on the first random number acquired by the first random number acquisition means, the first identification information is stopped First identification information display control means for controlling to display;
Second random number acquiring means for acquiring a second random number based on entering the second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10);
Second identification information display control means for controlling the second identification information to be stopped and displayed after fluctuating display of the second identification information in the second identification information display unit based on the second random number acquired by the second random number acquisition means When,
After the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, there is a predetermined number of entering balls into the variable winning opening (for example, the second big winning opening C20) Special game control means capable of executing a special game for executing a unit game that can make the variable winning opening (for example, the second big winning opening C20) advantageous for the player until the period has elapsed;
Low probability lottery state in which the probability that the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group becomes the predetermined probability, and the stop the first identification information or the second identification information belongs to the predetermined group There is a high probability lottery state in which the probability of being stopped and displayed in the display mode is higher than the predetermined probability, and there is a ball entering a specific area (for example, a specific area C22) during the execution of the special game In the case where it is possible to be in a high probability lottery state after the end of the execution of the special game, but after entering the special area (for example, the specific area C22) during the execution of the special game, after the execution of the special game Game state transition control means for controlling to set the low probability lottery state in
Game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the side of the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) to the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) side,
As a game state regarding the ease of entering the second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10), the second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10) than the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state In the special game state that is easy to enter the ball, and control to be able to be in the specific game state after the end of the special game execution, when it is a specific game state, the variation of the first identification information or the second identification information One unit is from display start to stop display, and after the end of the special game execution, it is configured to be in the normal gaming state after the one unit has been performed a predetermined number of times.
It is possible to measure the number of consecutive times when the high probability lottery state is reached after the end of the special game execution, and after the completion of the special game executed after the continuous number reaches a certain number, the low probability lottery state and the specific gaming state Configured to be
The secondary gaming unit (for example, secondary control board S),
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) side;
And an effect display content control means capable of displaying an effect on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
The second identification rather than the ease of entering the specific area (for example, the specific area C22) during the execution of the special game executed by the first identification information being stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group It is configured such that the ease of entering the specific area (for example, the specific area C22) during execution of the special game executed by the stop display in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is higher. Yes,
In the special game (for example, specific area C22) during execution of the special game which is executed by the stop display of the first identification information or the second identification information in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group in the normal gaming state Selection of the first identification information or the second identification information variation display time in the low probability lottery state and the specific gaming state when there is no ball entry and the low probability lottery state and the specific gaming state are reached after execution of the special game is over A specific area (for example, a specific area C22) is being executed during execution of a special game executed by stopping and displaying the first identification information or the second identification information in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group in the tendency and the normal gaming state The first identification information or second identification in the high probability lottery state and the specific gaming state in the case where there is entering the) and the high probability lottery state and the specific gaming state are reached after the execution of the special game And selection tendencies of the variation display time information, is configured to differ,
In the special game (for example, specific area C22) during execution of the special game which is executed by the stop display of the first identification information or the second identification information in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group in the normal gaming state There is no ball entry, and when the low probability lottery state and the specific gaming state are reached after the execution of the special game is completed, the first identification information or the first gaming information in the low gaming state and the specific gaming state and the normal gaming state During the execution of the special game executed by the stop display mode in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group belonging to the 2 identification information is entering a specific area (for example, specific area C22), and the execution end of the special game The pachinko game is characterized in that it is configured to be different from the high probability lottery state and the rendering tendency in the specific gaming state when the high probability lottery state and the specific gaming state later occur. It is a machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present concept (17) is
A starting opening where game balls can enter (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10),
A variable winning opening (for example, the second large winning opening C20) capable of taking a closed state and an open state;
An identification information display section capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g);
A main gaming unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
And an auxiliary game unit (for example, an auxiliary control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display unit;
The main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on entering a ball into the starting opening (for example, the first main gaming starting opening A10, the second main gaming starting opening B10),
Based on the random number acquired by the random number acquisition means, after the identification information is variably displayed in the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display A21g and the second main game symbol display B21g), the identification information is stopped and displayed. Identification information display control means for controlling to
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, the variable winning prize opening (for example, the second big winning opening C20) variable winning prize until there is a predetermined number of entering the ball or a predetermined period elapses Special game control means capable of executing a special game which executes a unit game a plurality of times which can make the mouth (for example, the second large winning opening C20) advantageous to the player;
Game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the side of the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) to the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) side,
The low probability lottery state in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is the predetermined probability, and the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group is the predetermined probability. Also has a high probability lottery state with high probability,
As a game state related to the ease of entering the ball into the starting slot (for example, the first main game starting slot A10, the second main game starting slot B10), it is easy to enter the starting slot easier than the normal gaming state and the normal gaming state It has a gaming state, and is configured to be controlled to be able to be in a specific gaming state after the end of the execution of the special game,
It is possible to measure the number of consecutive times when the high probability lottery state is reached after the end of the special game execution, and after the completion of the special game executed after the continuous number reaches a certain number, the low probability lottery state and the specific gaming state Configured to be
The secondary gaming unit (for example, secondary control board S),
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) side;
And an effect display content control means capable of displaying an effect on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
If it becomes a specific gaming state after the end of the execution of the special game executed by the identification display being stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group in the normal gaming state, stop from the variable display start of identification information One unit is up to the display, and after the end of the execution of the special game, after the one unit is performed a predetermined number of times, it is configured to be in the normal gaming state,
At least the effect display format A and the effect display format B, which are effect display formats different from the effect display format A, are included as the effect display format.
When the effect display format B is set in the specific gaming state, the expectation in the high probability lottery state is higher than in the specific gaming state when the effect display format A is set. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being.

M main control board,
MP11t-H Auxiliary game symbol variation management timer, MP11t-C 1st and 2nd main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C1 1st main game timer, MP11t-C 2 2nd main game timer MP22t-B 2nd main game Start-up opening motorized part opening timer, MP33c Winning ball counter MP34t special game timer, MP51c probability variation counter MP52c time reduction counter, MN52c limited frequency counter MP41t small hit gaming timer, MP41t-2 discharge standby timer A 1st main game peripheral Device A10 1st main game start opening (1st main game start opening A), A11s 1st main game start opening entrance ball detection device A20 1st main game symbol display device, A21 g 1st main game symbol display part A21h 1st main Game symbol holding display unit, B 2nd main game peripheral device B10 2nd main game start opening, B11s 2nd main Technique start entrance setting detection device B11d second main game start opening electric role, B20 second main game symbol display device B21 g second main game symbol display unit, B21 h second main game symbol hold display unit C first · second Main game common peripheral equipment, C10 first big prize mouth C11s first big prize mouth prize detection device, C11d first big prize mouth electric role C20 second big prize mouth, C21s second big prize mouth prize detection device C21d second Large winning opening motorized combination, C22 specific area C23 second large winning opening outlet, C23s second large winning opening discharge detection device C24 upper shielding member, C25 lower shielding member C27 V winning opening, C27s V winning opening entrance detection device C20-1 Box-shaped member H auxiliary gaming peripheral device, H10 auxiliary gaming start port H11s auxiliary gaming start opening ball entry detection device, H20 auxiliary gaming symbol display device H21 g auxiliary gaming symbol display portion, H21 h assistance Technical symbol reservation display unit S sub-control board, SM effect display control unit (sub-main control board)
SM21t drawing fluctuation time management timer, SM26c look-ahead effect execution counter SM23c stay stage management counter, SM23c2 continuous count counter SM24t power on timer, SH10t fluctuation fixed time timer SS effect display means (sub-sub control unit), SG effect display device, SG10 Display area SG11 Decorative symbol display area SG12 1st hold display section SG13 2nd hold display section, SB sub input button SBs sub input button input detection apparatus KH award ball payout control board KE award ball payout apparatus, buffer for MT10 command transmission MP51c-2 probability variation continuous counter, MN52c-1 limited frequency A counter MN52c-2 limited frequency B counter

Claims (1)

The starting opening where the game ball can enter, and
A variable winning opening that can take a closed state and an open state,
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information;
A main gaming unit that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display unit capable of displaying an effect;
And an auxiliary game unit that controls the effect display on the effect display unit;
The main game club is
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on entry into the starting opening;
A random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired random number as a hold until the random number acquisition unit acquires the random number until the condition for determining whether the acceptance or rejection is satisfied;
Consent decision means for performing aptitude determination based on the random number related to a certain hold when satisfying a certainty determination permission condition regarding a certain hold;
Identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display unit based on the result of the success or failure judgment by the success or failure judgment means;
After the identification information is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode belonging to the predetermined group, the variable winning opening can be made advantageous to the player until there is a predetermined number of balls entered into the variable winning opening or the predetermined period elapses. Special game control means capable of executing a special game that executes a unit game a plurality of times;
In the case of having a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and in the specific gaming state, the variable display of identification information starts to stop display as one unit, and the specific gaming state is entered. Game state control means that can be controlled so as not to be in the normal game state until a certain number of times is counted from when the unit is performed a predetermined number of times;
Game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the side of the secondary gaming unit to the secondary gaming unit side,
A first variation pattern table as a table referred to when determining the variation display time of the identification information, and a second variation pattern table in which the selection tendency of the variation display time of the identification information is different from the first variation pattern table; The variation pattern table and the second variation pattern table have at least a third variation pattern table having different selection tendencies of the variation display time of the identification information, and the first variation state referring to the first variation pattern table, and the second It has at least a second change state that refers to the change pattern table and a third change state that refers to the third change pattern table, and the first change state is a change state in a specific period of the specific gaming state, The second fluctuation state is the fluctuation state in the specific gaming state, and is shifted from the first fluctuation state by the end of the specific period A dynamic state, the third variation state is variable state is migrated from it and a second change state variation state in the normal game state,
The secondary gaming unit is
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game unit side;
And an effect display content control means capable of displaying an effect on the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
If the remaining number of one unit in the specific gaming state becomes a specific number of times less than the predetermined number of times, in the specific gaming state thereafter, it indicates that the number of remaining one unit in the specific gaming state is the number of times less than the specific number of times It is possible to execute the remaining number of suggested effects that are the effects to be
While having at least a first period and a second period which is a period after the first period as a period in the first fluctuation state, the remaining number suggestive effect is not performed in the first period in the first fluctuation state The remaining number suggestive effect can be performed in the second period in the first variation state,
In the case of the second variation state, the remaining number suggestive effect can be performed,
In the case of the third change state, the remaining number suggestive effect is not executed.
In the case of the first change state, the number of reservations at the time of satisfying the qualification determination permission condition is the first number of reservations, and the number of reservations at the time of satisfaction of the qualification determination permission condition is the first suspension The average value of the fluctuation display time of the identification information in the case where the result of the propriety judgment by the propriety judgment means at the time of satisfying the propriety judgment permission condition is the second hold number more than the number. While an average difference of predetermined time occurs,
In the case of the second variation state, the number of reservations at the time of satisfying the qualification determination permission condition is the first number of reservations and the number of reservations at the time of satisfaction of the qualification determination permission condition is the second The selection tendency of the variation display time of the identification information is configured to be the same when the result of the qualification determination by the qualification determination means at the time of satisfying the qualification determination permission condition is not winning, in the case of the number of reservations. Yes,
The first variation pattern table is configured to be referred to in any of the first period in the first variation state and the second period in the first variation state,
Control is performed such that a first fluctuation state can be set until the one unit is performed a first number of times, and is controlled such that a second fluctuation state can be set until the one unit is performed a second number of times, and The first number of times is configured to be greater than the second number of times ,
Identification information that can be selected when the number of reservations is the first variation and the number of reservations at the time when the condition for judging success or failure is satisfied is the second number of reservations, and the result of the judgment of success or failure by the judgment unit is non-winning The number of candidates relating to the fluctuation display time of the is the second fluctuation state and the number of holdings at the time of satisfying the validity determination permission condition is the second number of holdings, and the result of the success or failure judgment by the validity judgment means is not elected The pachinko game machine is configured to be larger than the number of candidates for the variable display time of the identification information which can be selected in the case where

Images